GIFT  OF 
Mrs  l;aniels 


Miatt^,  ii)xE>alflLintL_ 


Or  79^ 


l2mo,  cloth.     $1.25. 


A^X 


ELEMENTARY 


HEBEEW  GEAMMAI 


WITH 


BY 

WILLIAM  HENEY  GEEEN, 

FBDFESSOB   IN  THB  THEOLOaiCAL  SEMINARY   AT   PRINCETON,    NEW   JERSEY. 


NEW  EDITION  WITH  CORRECTIONS. 


NEW    YOEK: 

JOHN  WILEY  &   SONS,   PUBLISHERS, 
15  Abtob  Tlace. 

1882. 


filtered  according  to  Act  of  Ojngress,  Li  the  year  1871, 

By  WILLIAM  HENRY  GREEN, 

Ib  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washingtcai. 


Trow's 

Printing  and  BooKniNDmc  Coi^ 

205-213  /i'aj/  i2tA  St.t 

MBW  YORK. 


PREFACE 


This  brief  Manual  has  been  prepared  with  special 
reference  to  the  wants  of  beginners.  .  The  essential 
facts  of  the  language  are  concisely  stated,  without  the 
encumbrance  of  minute  details,  which  would  confuse 
their  minds  and  impede  their  progress,  and  which  be- 
long properly  to  a  more  advanced  stage  of  study. 
The  tabular  form  has  been  adopted  to  as  great  an 
extent  as  possible,  in  order  to  exhibit  to  the  eye  what- 
ever is  capable  of  such  a  mode  of  representation. 
The  Beading  Exercises,  which  are  of  the  simplest  kind, 
have  been  carefully  selected,  with  a  view  to  illustrate 
the  forms  and  uses  of  different  parts  of  speech,  and 
especially  the  various  classes  of  perfect  and  imperfect 
verbs;  and  they  are  accompanied  by  a  special  Voca- 
bulary. 

It  will,  as  is  hoped,  meet  the  wants  of  non-profes- 
sional students  who  seek  a  general  knowledge  of  this 
venerable  and  sacred  tongue  rather  than  a  thorough 
acquaintance  with  it,  and  who  might  be  repelled  by  a 
larger  and   more   costly   apparatus.      It  is   sufficiently 

5307:*0 


IV  PEEFACE. 

simple  for  private  study,  as  wel.  as  adapted  for  use  in 
schools  and  colleges  where  facilities  are  offered  for  the 
acquisition  of  the  Hebrew.  The  author  ^vill  be  re 
joiced  if  this  humble  volume  should  tend  in  any  way 
to  a  more  extended  familiarity  with  the  original  Ian 
guage  of  the  Old  Testament  among  intelligent  and 
liberally  educated  laymen. 

Pbinceton,  August  23, 186d. 


PREFACE 

TO    THE    SECOND    EDITION 


The  Grammar  has  been  entirely  rewi'itten,  with  a  view 
to  adapt  it  more  fully  to  the  wants  of  those  for  whom  it 
is  intended.  In  doing  this,  the  writer  has  had  the  benefit 
of  practical  suggestions  from  some  of  the  best  Hebrew 
teachers  in  various  parts  of  the  country,  among  whom  he 
is  particularly  indebted  to  Prof.  Hoyt,  of  Ohio  Wesleyan 
University,  Delaware,  Ohio.  The  paradigms  are,  as  in 
the  previous  edition,  combined  together  in  Grammatical 
Tables,  which  afPord  a  complete  survey  of  all  the  forms 
of  the  language.  But  for  the  greater  convenience  of  the 
student  a  number  of  the  paradigms  are  inserted  in  the 
text  of  the  Grammar  likewise,  and  in  some  of  the  earlier 
of  these  the  pronunciation  is  also  given  in  Roman  letters, 
to  relieve  the  labor,  and  prevent  the  mistakes  incident  tu 
a  a  imperfect  acquaintance  with  the  characters.  A  more 
complete  system  of  exercises  both  in  Hebrew  reading 
and  composition  has  been  provided  throughout,  and  the 
greatest  pains  have  been  taken  to  make  them  strictly 
progressive  in  their  character.  No  grammatical  form  or 
construction  is  admitted  into  the  lessons  until  this  has 


VI  PEEFACE   TO    THE    SECOND    EDITION. 

first  been  explained.  In  the  orthography  these  exercises 
are  inserted  in  the  text  of  the  Grammar  in  order  that  the 
eye  of  the  student,  perplexed  by  the  strange "  forms  of 
unfamiliar  characters,  may  readily  pass  fi'om  the  rules  or 
principles  to  their  application.  The  exercises  in  trans- 
lation, whether  from  Hebrew  into  English  or  from  Eng 
lish  into  Hebrew,  are,  as  in  the  former  edition,  removed 
to  the  end  of  the  volume.  A  special  vocabulary,  num- 
bered to  correspond  with  each  successive  lesson,  contains 
all  words  not  previously  learned,  while  their  separation 
upon  different  pages  is  designed  to  counteract  the  temp- 
tation to  negligence,  which  would  arise  from  having 
these  significations  before  the  eye  in  the  very  act  of 
recitation.  It  is  assumed  that  all  words  are  mastered  as 
the  student  proceeds,  so  that  they  are  never  repeated  in 
the  special  vocabularies.  General  vocabularies  follow 
both  Hebrew-English  and  English-Hebrev/,  which  con- 
tain every  word  to  be  found  in  any  of  the  lessons.  The 
principles  of  Syntax  successively  illustrated  in  the 
lessons,  or  necessary  to  be  known  in  order  to  their  proper 
understanding,  are  supplied  in  accompanying  Eemarks  or 
Directions.  The  learner  is  thus  gradually  familiarized 
with  the  practical  application  of  nearly  all  the  important 
principles  of  Syntax  before  he  comes  to  study  them 
together  in  systematic  order. 

Princbton,  October  11,  1871. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Orthography. 

§  1.  The  Letters 1 

§  3.  Their  Classification 3 

^  3.  The  Vowel-Letters 5 

§4.  The  Vowel-Points 5 

§5.  ShVa 6 

§  6.  Pattahh-furtive 7 

§  7.  Quiescence    of    the    Vowel- 
Letters  8 

§  8.  Scriptio  plena  and  defectiva  9 

§9.  SyUables  10 

§  10.  Resulting  Vowel-changes. . .  12 
§  11.  Kamets    and    Kamets-Hha- 

tuph 13 

§  12.  Daghesh-lene 14 

§  13.  Daghesh-f orte 15 

§14.  Mappik 15 

§  15.  Raphe 16 

g  10.    Accents 16 

^17.  Position  of  the  Accent 17 

§  18.  Recession  of  the  Accent. ...  18 

§  19.  Pause  Accents 18 

§  20,  Consecution  of  Accents 19 

§21.  Makkeph 20 

§22.  Methegh "20 

§  23.  K'ri  aad  K^thibh 21 

Etymology. 

g24.  Prefixed  Particles 23 

§  25.  The  Article 23 

§  26.  He  Literrogative 24 

§  27.  Liseparable  Prepositions. ...  25 

§  28.  Vav  Conjunctive 25 

§  29.  Personal  Pronouns 26 

§  30,  Other  Pronouns 28 


VAaa 

§  31.  Verbs.     Their  Species 89 

§  32.  Perfect  Verbs 30 

§  33.  Kal  Preterite  and  Infinitives  31 
§  34.  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  Pre- 

terites  and  Infinitives 33 

§  35.   The  remaioing  Preterites  and 

Infinitives 34 

§  36.  Kal  Future,  Imperative,  and 

Participles 35 

§  37.  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  Fu- 
tures, etc 37 

§  38.  Hiphil,    Hophal,    and  Hith- 

pael  Futures,  etc 39 

§  39.  Peculiar  Forms 40 

§  40.  Paragogic    and    Apocopated 

Future  and  Imperative. . .  41 

§  41.  Vav  Conversive 43 

§  42.  Verbs  with  Suffixes 43 

§  43.  Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns  45 

§  44.  Femiuine,  Dual,  and  Plural  46 
§  45.  Dual  and  Plural  in  Feminine 

Nouns 49 

§  46.  Construct  State 50 

§  47.  Its  Formation 51 

§  48.  Paragogic  Vowels 53 

§  49.  Nouns  with  Suffixes 53 

§  50.  Irregular  Nouns 55 

§  51.  Imperfect  Verbs 56 

§52.  Guttural  Verbs 57 

§  53.  Pe  Guttural  Verbs 57 

§  54.  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs 58 

§  55.  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs.    .  59 

§56.  Pe  Nun  Verbs 60 

§  57.  Ayin  Doubled  Verbs 61 

^  58.  Pe  Yodh  Verbs 63 


vm 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

1 59.  Ayin  Vav   and   Ayin  Yodh 

Verbs 64 

§  60.  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs 65 

§  61.  Lamedb  He  Verbs 66 

§  62.  Doubly  Imperfect  Veios 68 

§  63.  Unusual  Forms 68 

§  64.  QuadriHteral  Verbs. 69 

§  65.  Numerals 69 

§  66.  Separate  Particles 70 

Syntax. 

§67.  TheCopula 71 

§68.  TbeArticle 71 

§  69.  Nouns  definite  without  the 

Article 73 

§  70.  Adjectives 72 

§  71.  Demonstrative  Pronouns. ...  72 

§  72.  Comparison  of  Adjectives. . .  73 

§73.  Numerals 73 

§  74.  Apposition 74 

§  75.  The  Construct  State 74 

§  76.  Tenses  of  Verbs 75 

§77.  The  Preterite 75 

§78.  The  Future 76 

§  79.  The  Secondary  Tenses 77 

§80.  Participles 77 

§81.  The  Infinitive 78 

§  82.  Object  of  Verbs 78 

§  83.  Verbs  with  more  than  one 

Object 79 

§  84.  Adverbial  Expressions 79 

§  85.  Neglect  of  Agreement 79 

§  86.  Compound  Subject 80 

§  87.  Repetition  of  Words 81 

§  88.  Relative  Pronouns 81 

S  80.  Conjunctions SI 


PAGB 

Grammatical  Tables. 

I.  The  Letters 83 

IL  Classification  of  the  Let- 
ters.    The  Points 84 

in.  The  Accents 85 

IV.  Inseparable      Prepositions 

and  other  Prefixes 8<i 

V.  Pronouns.       Verbs,    their 

Species 87 

VI.  Paradigm  of  Perfect  Verbs,    88 
Vn.  Paradigm  of  the    Perfect 

Verbs  with  Suffixes 90 

Vin.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Guttural 

Verbs 92 

IX.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Guttural 

Verbs 93 

X.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Gut- 
tural Verbs 94 

XI.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Nun  Verbs    95 
XII.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Doubled 

Verbs 96 

XIII.  Paradigm  of  Ayin  Vav  and 

Ayin  Yodh  Verbs 98 

XIV.  Paradigm  of  Pe  Yodh  Verbs  100 
XV.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  Aleph 

Verbs 101 

XVI.  Paradigm  of  Lamedh  He 

Verbs. 102 

XVII.  Declension  of  Nouns 104 

XVm.  Paradigm  of  Nouns  with 

Suffixes 107 

XIX.  Numerals 108 

XX.  Consecution  of  Accents. . .  109 

Lessons  in  Reading  Hebrew..  Ill 
Lessons  in  Writing  Hebrew.  . .  137 
Hebrew-English  Vocabulary  . .  175 
English-Hebrew  Vocabulary.  .  188 


J      9  .      >      » 


ELEMENTARY  HEBREW   GRAMMAR 


OETHOGRAPHY 


1.     Tlie  Letters, 


1.  The  Hebrew  lias  twenty-two  letters ;  these  are  all 
consonants,  and  are  wi^itten  from  right  to  left. 


1.  Aleph 

2.  Beth 

n 

Bh, 

B 

12.  La'medh 

13.  Mem 

on 

L 
M 

3.  Gi'mel 

> 

Gh, 

G 

14.  Nun 

1  5 

N 

4.  Daleth 

^ 

Dh, 

D 

15.  Sa'meVTi 

D 

S 

5.  He 

6.  Vav 

ji 

H 

V 

16.  A'yia 

17.  Pe 

w 

1 1 
1 

!)  S 

Ph,  P 

7.  Za'yin 

T 

z 

18.  Tsa'fllie 

T  s 

Ts 

8.  Hheth 

n 

Hh 

19.  Kopli 

p 

K 

9.  Teth 

t3 

T 

20.  Resh 

T 

R 

10.  Yodh 

n 

Y 

21.  Shin 

w 

Sh,  S 

11.  Kaph 

1  = 

Kh, 

K 

22.  Tav 

n 

Th,T. 

a.  For  the  proper  prontmciation  of  the  vowels  occurring  in  the  names  of  tlie 
letters,  see  §  4.  1.  a. 

2.  There  are  two  letters,  for  which  no  equivalent  is 
given  in  the  preceding  table;   K   like  the  English  h  in 
liour  or  the  smooth  breathing  in  Greek  had  no  sound;  3? 
had  a  strong  gnttnral  sound,  but  one  which  it  is  so  diifi 
cult  to  make,  that  it  is  commonly  neglected  in  reading. 


2  oiTHOciiakPHY.  §  1, 

3.  For  seven,  ox  tlie  let't'8i"&  -two  equivalents  are  given 
Thus,  tlie  six  aspirates  have  also  an  unaspirated  sound. 
wLicli  is  indicated  by  a  point  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter, 
§  12;  n  is  bh  or  v  and  S  b;  '>  gh,  5  g;  ^  dh  as  th  in  the^ 
"^  d;  D  M  as  the  German  ch  in  ic7ij  5  ^/  B  jpJi  or  f,  fe^j; 
ti  th  as  in  thi7i,  T\  t  As,  however,  there  are  no  sounds 
in  English  corresponding  to  gli  and  M,  5i  may  be  pro- 
nounced g  like  "^ ,  and  D  h  like  3 .  The  letter  i>  Avith  a 
dot  over  its  right  arm  has  the  sound  of  sA,  and  is  called 
Sfil7i;  to  with  a  dot  over  its  left  arm  is  called  Si/n,  and 
is  pronounced  like  s. 

4.  In  three  instances  two  letters  have  the  same  equi- 
valent; thus  12  and  n  are  represented  by  t,  1^  and  p  by 
Ic,  0  and  to  by  s.  These  letters,  though  pronounced 
alike  by  us,  are  nevertheless  quite  distinct  and  must  not 
be  confounded. 

5.  ri  and  S  require  a  doubled  letter  or  two  letters 
combined  to  represent  them;  r;  is  the  simple  A,  n  has  a 
stronger  sound  as  of  rasping  the  throat,  and  is  represent- 
ed by  hh  ;  s  is  ts  in  sits, 

6.  Fire  of  the  letters  have  two  forms;  D  ,  tt  ,  D ,  s,  s 
(combined  in  the  memorial  word  fi5^?  himnapjyets^  are 
used  in  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  words;  at  the 
end  of  words  the  bottom  stroke  is  bent  downward,  1,1, 
Ci  ^  f  ,  o]'  the  letter  closed  up,  d. 


EXERCISE  1. 
Hebrew  words  must  never  be  divided  at  the  end  of  a  line. 

Write  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  in  their  order,  with 
their  names  and  equivalents. 

Write  the  following  words  or  combinations  of  lettera, 
|)lacing  imder  each  its  equivalent; — 


§  2.  LETTERS.  S 

Pe-giiael  Nun-samekli-kapli  Sin-teth-nuii  Ayin-daleth 
.Kaph-lamedJi  Yodli-mem-yodli  He-alepli-resh-tsadlie  Za 
yin  resh-ayin  Koph-tsadhe-yodli-resli  Hhetli-mem  Illietli 
resli-pe  Lamedli-alepli  Yodh-sMn-betli-tav-vav. 

Name  the  letters  in  Genesis  i.  1-3  on  page  133,  and  give 
the  equivalent  of  each. 


§  2.     Their  Classification. 

The  letters  may  be  divided, 

1.  Fii-st,  with  respect  to  the  organs  by  which  they  are 
pronounced,  into  five  classes,  viz.,  Guttui'als  or  those 
which  represent  a  sound  produced  in  the  throat ;  Palatals 
formed  by  pressing  the  root  of  the  tongue  against  the 
posterior  roof  of  the  mouth ;  Linguals  formed  by  the  tip 
of  the  tongue  in  contact  with  the  anterior  roof  of  the 
mouth;  Dentals  fonned  by  the  air  driven  against  the 
teeth ;  and,  Labials  formed  by  the  lips. 


Gutturals  ^5  n  n  ^  {i>m^  aJi'^Jiha) 

Palatals  :}^  ^  :>  p  (pD\n  glMiak) 

Linguals  "7  t:  b  3  n     (npbt:^  dailenetli) 

Dentals  T  D  2r  tJ  (tjsor  zastsasli) 

Labials  n  1  tt  &  (q'J?^s  humapli) 

1  though  not  properly  a  guttural  may  be  classed  witJi 
them,  as  it  partakes  of  their  peculiarities. 

2.  Secondly,  into  weak,  medium,  and  strong.  The 
weak  consonants  suffer  or  occasion  frequent  changes  in 
the  formation  and  inflection  of  words.  The  strong  con- 
sonants are  capable  of  entering  without  change  into  any 
combinations   which    analogy   may   require.      Those   of 


4  OETHOGRAPirr.  §  2 

medium  strengtli  are  neither  so  stable  as  the  latter,  not 
flo  feeble  and  fluctuating  as  the  former. 


Weak 
Medium 


1  *»  Vowel-Letters, 

n  y  Gutturals. 

3  n  Liquids. 

s  ID  Sibilants. 


Strong      J  ^     ^    py  Aspirates  and  Mutes. 


3.  Thirdly,  with  respect  to  the  function  which  they 
perform  in  the  constitution  of  words,  into  radicals  and 
serviles.  The  former,  which  comprise  just  one-half  of 
the  alphabet,  are  only  used  in  the  roots  or  radical  poi*tiona 
of  words.  The  latter,  though  they  may  also  enter  into 
roots,  are  likewise  employed  in  the  inflection  of  words, 
and  the  formation  of  derivatives,  in  prefixes  and  suffixes. 
The  serviles  are  embraced  in  the  memorial  words  )T\^i< 
nbDi  nttJia  (ethdn  mosJie  v^TcJielehh^  Ethan,  Moses,  and 
Caleb).  All  the  other  letters  are  radicals,  viz.  ^  ,  T  ,  T  , 
",  ^,  0,  ^,  fi,  ^,  P,  ^. 


EXERCISE  2. 

Write  the  letters  of  each  class  with  their  names  and 
equivalents. 

Write  the  following  letters,  and  indicate  the  class  to 
which  each  belongs  in  respect  of  organ,  strength,  and 
function : — 

Aleph,  Lamedh,  He,  Shin,  Mem,  Vav,  Tav,  Beth,  Nun, 
Yodh,  Gimel,  Daleth,  Resh,  Tsadhe,  Ayin,  Koph,  Kaph, 
Samekh,  Pe,  Zayin,  Ilheth,  Teth. 


§§  3,  4  VOWELS. 


§  3.     Tlie   Vowel-Letters. 

There  were  originally  no  separate  signs  for  tlie  vowela 
In  Hebrew.  They  were  either  not  written  at  all,  or 
when  it  was  thought  necessary  to  express  them,  the 
vowel-letters  (T^ri^  ehfvi)  were  employed  for  this  pur- 
pose. Thus  "^  was  used  to  signify  not  only  y  but  also  i 
and  e;  ^  stood  for  o  and  u;  ^  ov  n  for  a,  and  in  some 
cases  for  e  or  o;  e  was  also  sometimes  represented  by  '^ 
or  n ;  the  other  short  vowels  were  scarcely  ever  written. 
Thus  T^  bin  or  ben;  Dip  Jcom  or  hum;  nb:j  gala,  gold,  gHe 
or  gole ;  riD'^ntJn  t^ sliubliend. 


§  4.     The   Vowel-Points. 

1.  After  the  Hebrew  ceased  to  be  spoken,  a  more  com- 
plete method  of  writing  the  vowels  was  needed,  in  order 
to  indicate  the  exact  pronunciation  of  words.  With  this 
view  the  vowel-points  were  invented.  Of  these  three 
represent  long,  three  short,  and  three  doubtful  vowels. 


Long  Vowds. 
Ka'mets      __     a 

Short  Vowels. 
Pat'tahh                _  a 

Bouhtful  Voicds. 
Hhi'rik   _.      ^  or  * 

Tse're        --,     e 
Hho'lem    ~     d 

Se'ghol                  _  e 
Kamets-Hhatuph_.  o 

Shii'rek     ^   ) 

Kii/buts_  r""''' 

a.  The  vowel  a  is  pronotmced  as  ia  father^  a  as  mfat,  e  as  in  there,  e  as  in  met 
i  as  in  macJdne,  *  as  ia  pin,  o  as  in  note,  o  as  in  not,  u  asm  ruU,  u  as  in  fuU. 
The  quantity  will  be  marked  when  the  vowels  are  long,  but  not  Trhen  they  are 
short. 

2.  All  the  vowels  are  written  under  the  letter  after 
which  they  are  pronounced,  except  two,  viz.  Hholem  and 
Shurek 

3.  Hholem  is  placed  over  the  left  edge  of  the  letter  to 


6  OETIIOGEAPHY.  §  5 

wLicli  ]t  belongs.  Wlien  followed  by  tj  or  preceded  b}' 
to  it  coincides  witb  tlie  diacritical  point  over  the  letter 
e.  g.  nra  mclsJie,  i^t^  soiie;  when  it  follows  t  or  precede?) 
to  it  is  written  over  its  op]3osite  arm  e.  g.  nt^  ,  rsnn  tirjyos. 
Accordingly,  if  an  unpointed  consonant  precede  (i.  e.  one 
without  a  vowel  or  Sh'va,  §  5)  T»will  be  osli  and  iiJ  os;  if 
it  have  itself  no  other  vowel  point  to  will  be  so  and  to  slio^ 
except  at  the  end  of  words. 

4.  Shurek  is  a  dot  in  the  bosom  of  the  letter  Yav. 
When  there  is  a  'i  in  the  text,  the  vowel  u^  whether  long 
or  short,  is  indicated  by  a  single  dot  within  it,  and  called 
Shurek;  in  the  absence  of  1  it  is  indicated  by  three  dots 
placed  obliquely  beneath  the  letter  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  called  Kibbuts. 

EXEECISE  3. 

The  place  of  Aleph  will  be  indicated  in  this  and  in  following  exercises  by  *,  and 
that  of  Ayin  by  f .  Teth,  Koph,  and  Sin  will  be  denoted  by  a  dot  beneath  the 
letter,  t,  k,  s. 

Write  the  long,  short,  and  doubtful  vowels  with  their 
names  and  equivalents. 

"Write :  Zahabh,  l^hhem,  r^bh,  yet,  khol,  kol,  khamus, 
f amal,  me*oyebh,  sh6*el,  soleth,  fim,  *eth,  bh^yith, 
sh5rashiin,  yaruts,  shophet,  shalosh,  soraph,  bhosem. 

Read  the  following  words,  and  give  the  names  and 
e "univalents  of  the  vowels  which  they  contain. 

,  y^i  ,  ^w  ,  ^nbb  ,  nbo  ,  in   ,  "ibto  ,  5>Sn    ,  'ja   ,  "ib^ 

.  ^tj']?  ,  nob  to  ,  Ds:  ,  -T?*  ,  -pn*  ,  pSto  ,  ^toS  ,  ntoj 

*  Kametfl-Hhatuph. 

§  5.     Sh'va. 

1.  ShVa  —  is  placed  under  vowelless  consonants  to 
iiidica,te  the  absence  of  a  vowel,  e.  g.  "^kiT^*^  mcmlakhtl 


§  6  sh'Va.  pattahh  fuetive.  7 

At  the  end  of  words,  however,  it  is  omitted :  ^^  (not  b^) 
halj  "i?b  (not  "y^b  )  f^dger,  unless  the  last  letter  is  T  .  or  ia 
immediately  preceded  by  another  vowelless  letter^  or  is 
doubled  by  Daghesh-forte,  §  13,  tfb'fa  meleM,  tpisp  Jsosht, 
PS?  att. 

2.  When  a  syllable  begins  with  two  consonants  a  slight 
sound  is  heard  between  them,  as  in  English  between  the 
last  two  consonants  of  giv'n^  lieav'n;  thus  'ip'^  p'hodh^  T\^ 
Vrii^  not  hru,  ShVa  is,  therefore,  said  to  be  silent  at  the 
end  of  syllables,  but  vocal  at  the  beginning. 

3.  Sometimes,  particularly  after  the  gutturals,  this  tran- 
sition sound  resembles  an  extremely  short  ^,  ^,  or  o.  It  is 
then  represented  by  the  compound  ShVas,  which  are 
formed  by  combining  the  sign  for  simple  ShVa  ali*eady 
explained  with  that  for  Pattahh,  Seghol,  or  Kamets- 
Hhatuph,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Compoimd  (  HMteph-Pattalili  ^  ;  thus  ann    Ifrogh 
SliVas     1  Hhateph-Seghol    -rr, ;  thus  fTT^n  Ifydth, 
\  Hhateph-Kamets  —  ;  thus  "hn    Jihf^ll, 


§  6.     Pattahli-furtive. 

Pattahh-furtive  is  a  scarcely  audible  ^,  which  steals  iu 
before  the  letter  under  which  it  is  wi'itten.  It  occurs 
with  :?,  n  or  the  conscttiant  ^  at  the  end  of  words, 
when  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  other  than  «,  or  followed 
by  another  vowelless  consonant,  J^'ij  gabli6^\  f?npb 
Idhfhlit     Coinp.  in  English  ^'^,  pronounced  j^^V. 

EXERCISE  4. 

Write  the  different  ShVas  and  Pattahh-furtive  with 
their  names  and  equivalents. 


$  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §   7 

Write  the  following  words,  and  wherever  Pattahh 
furtive  has  been  improperly  omitted,  make  the  requisite 
correction : 

Sh'n^yim,  th'nti,  y'dhekhem,  h^^agham^  y'hoshu^f,  *^lohj 
mof  °madli,  kh^/sher,  nulhhamoth,  bh'simhh^thkhcm,  le*^- 
khol,  z'bhiil,  y^f^lehu,  samehh,  s'bhibhoth^yikh,  rakif, 
dh'gliiith,  yest. 


§   7.     Quiescence  of  the    Vowel-Letters, 

1.  The  vowel-points  above  described  were  attached  to 
the  sacred  text  without  any  change  in  its  letters.  Con- 
sequently every  vowel,  which  had  previously  been  indi- 
cated by  a  vowel-letter,  was  now  denoted  both  by  that 
and  by  the  sign  subsequently  added.  In  all  such  cases 
the  letter  is  said  to  quiesce  in  the  vowel,  that  is,  it  has 
not  its  consonant  sound,  but  the  vowel-sound  represented 
by  the  accompanying  or  preceding  point.  Thus  in  "lia 
Vav  stands  not  for  v  but  for  o,  and  the  word  is  read  hor; 
in  nV5  ,  n  represents  not  A  but  a^  and  the  word  is  gold, 

2.  At  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  a  word  the 
letters  i5  n  1  "^  are  consonants,  if  they  are  followed  by 
a  vowel  or  a  ShVa;  if  not  so  followed,  they  are  quie? 
cent:  riib  Idve^  i^te  seyo,  but  t31tt  rmlt^  Tf^^  hetJi, 

3.  At  the  end  of  words  1  is  quiescent  when  preceded 
by  0  or  ??,  and  *'  when  preceded  by  e  or  I;  but  they  are 
consonants  if  preceded  by  any  other  vowel  sign,  '^n  hhe, 
^^  bi,  but  '^n  Jihay,  '^iiJ  go]/. 

Final  n  is  quiescent,  unless  it  has  Mappik,  §  14,  ni^^5 
a/rtsdj  but  ^nijnji^  artsdh. 

Final  x  is  invariably  quiescent,  if  a  vowel  precedes. 
Kb  Zr'',  i<a  hd;  but  if  a  vowelless  consonant  precedes,  it  is 
termed  otiant:  i5*J!il  vayyar. 


§  8.  VOWEL-LETTERS.  1? 

a.  It  may  be  observed  that  x  quiesces  in  a  multitude  of  cases,  where  it  is  not 
projyerlj  a  vowel-letter,  which,  in  fact,  it  rarely  is.  Its  feebleness  is  such  that  it 
Bcaroely  ever  terminates  a  mixed  syllable.  Such  forms  as  ^i^C'ri!}*^  do  occur;  bnt 
j^  mostly  loses  its  consonantal  power  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  whatever  the  pre- 
ceding vowel  may  be.  Yodh  similarly  gives  up  its  consonantal  character  in  the 
termination  ti  ,  or  at  least  is  neglected  in  the  pronunciation,  thus  T^Sri'i 
cTbhdrdv,  113 :?  dndv. 


EXERCISE  5. 

Pronounce  tlie  following  words,  and  apply  the  rules 
for  the  quiescence  of  tlie  vowel-letters. 

7  7     ».    -       7  ••.•:?  :         7  :    IT      7        I  -^   :   -        IT      7      T  r  7  -•    : 

*  The  Shurek  is  regarded  as  belonging  to  the  "i ,  and  x  is  quiescent.     "  Ish,  nob 
iyosh.     ^  The  Hholem  belongs  not  to  the  T ,  which  has  Sh'va,  but  to  the  *i ;  th« 


word  is  hence  to  be  read  edKvoih. 


§  8.     Scriptio  plena  and  defectiva. 

1.  Vowels,  whicli  are  indicated  both  by  a  vowel-letter 
and  by  a  vowel-point,  are  said  to  be  written  fully,  as  in 
miniic  otJioth^  D'^C'^btD  shallshlm^  r.^ia  muth  ;  those,  for  which 
a  vowel-letter  might  have  been  employed,  but  which  are 
expressed  by  the  points  only,  are  said  to  be  written 
defectively,  as  Jnn'K  ^  DTSbtj  ,  ra  . 

2.  As  letters  were  rarely  used  to  represent  the  short 
vowels,  §  3,  -z^  and  %  when  written  fully,  are  almost 
always  long,  e.  g.  'iS'^.^  Unit;  when  written  defectively, 
they  may  be  either  long  or  short,  e.  g.  tjn*^  ywasli^  '^n^ 
ylhliar^  tj'asn  tdwusJi.  33ir72  m/mlikdhli. 


10  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  9 


EXERCISE  6. 

Precision  in  the  employment  of  ttie  vowel-letters  can  only  be  attained  by  pra<i« 
tice  and  a  knowledge  of  forms.  For  the  present  the  following  general  rules  wiD 
BuiRce :  ^ 

Write  e  and  *  with  Yodh  and  o  and  u  with  Vav  at  the  end  of  words ;  elsewhere 
tbey  may  be  written  with  or  without  the  vowel-letters  at  discretion. 

Write  a  and  e  without  a  vowel-letter  except  at  the  end  of  words,  where  a  may 
and  e  must  be  represented  by  He. 

In  tlip  following  words,  wi'ite  the  vowels  botL.  fully  aud 
def eocively,  wlierever  botli  forms  are  admissible : — 

Zu,  nirasli,  *6tlio,  yasli5bli,  lanii,  ze,  bho,  liekimu, 
yamush,  moshe,  bhiil,  yakutsu,  *abliinii,  Mfidhotlii, 
m^yim,  sfcaven,   me,  me,  mi,  yam5tli,   yamotli,   lulihoth, 


shiibli,  min,  huslil^kli. 


§  9.     Syllables. 

1.  Two  vowels  can  never  come  together  in  the  same 
vrord  in  Hebrew  without  an  intervening  consonant,  and 
hence  there  can  never  be  more  than  one  vowel  in  the 
same  syllable. 

2.  Every  syllable  except  initial  1  must  begin  with  a 
consonant,  and  may  begin  with  two,  but  never  with  more 
than  two. 

8,  Syllables  ending  with  a  vowel  are  called  simple, 
JTQ  ^?'i?.v^;?n  li%e-md4lia  ;  those  ending  with  a  consonant, 
or,  as  is  possible  at  the  close  of  a  word,  with  two  con- 
sonants, are  said  to  be  mixed,  Dnn'aTJJD  nisli-mar-tem  j'nia 
nerd. 

4c.  As  Pattahh-furtive  and  the  vocal  ShVas,  whether 
simple  01  compound,  are  not  vowels  but  involuntary 
transition  sounds,  they  with  the  consonants  under  wliich 
fchey  stand  cannot  form  syllables;  Pattahh-furti\^e  is 
accordingly  attached  to  that  of  the  preceding  vowel,  and 


g  9.  SYLLABLES.  11 

the  vocal  SliVas  to  tliat  of  the  following  vowel;    thus 

5.  Unaccented  simple  syllables  always  contain  loug 
v^<nvols,  and  unaccented  mixed  syllables  short  vowels. 
But  an  accented  syllable,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  may 
contain  indifferently  a  Icng  or  a  short  vowel. 

6.  A  letter  with  simple  SliVa  in  the  body  of  a  "word 
may  either  end  or  begin  a  syllable.  If  it  is  preceded  by 
another  ShVa  or  by  an  unaccented  long  vowel,  it  belongs 
to  the  following  syllable,  T\r^V\  tiz-Vru^  ''HpT  zoWre  ;  if 
by  a  short  vowel  or  by  an  accented  long  vowel  it  is 
mostly  attached  to  the  preceding  syllable,  i^cn  hlias-do, 
nj'Qp  hoTYi-nd;  if  it  be  doubled  by  Daghesh-forte,  §  13. 
the  first  of  the  two  consonants  into  which  it  is  resolved 
is  connected  with  the  preceding  and  the  second  with  the 
follomng  syllable,  ^Sn;)  yit-tnu. 

7.  Sometimes  a  consonant  which  is  not  doubled  belongs 
in  a  measure  to  two  syllables,  completing  that  which  pre- 
cedes and  beginning  that  which  follows.  In  this  case 
the  former  syllable  is  strictly  speaking  neither  simple 
nor  mixed,  but  may  be  denominated  intermediate,  thuf> 
in  ^i";^nr\  tajiaji'^ glivJ  and  ^©i?^!'^  vay'hhW shu  for  vay- 
y^hhak'l^skii^  the  first  two  are  intermediate  syllables. 

a.  Consonants  which  stand  in  this  equivocal  relation  are  such  as  remain  single 
vrhen  analogy  would  require  them  to  be  doubled,  l'Dp2';>1  for  !i'ir;32^1  ,  ^"^^7 
ifhM-liel  for  y'hJmh-Ml ;  or  have  a  vocal  Sh'va  or  a  vowel  when  they  might  be 
expected  to  have  a  silent  Sh'va,  ^'iinin  for  '•.'s^fin  Wi-r' glm  ;  or  are  preceded  by  a 
short  vowel  which  has  arisen  from  Sh'va,  nrJi  for  HS'in  ^  Th'}'^  hidli'ghathiol 
r:-T3  ,  TjBn^  for  "^'ni  ,  C'^'ttJ'ij^  ko-dlmsliim  for  C^'ir? .  Also  when  the  same 
consonant  is  immediately  repeated  in  the  same  word  the  intervening  Sh'va  xa 
made  vocal  in  order  to  give  distinctness  to  the  reduplication,  e.  g.  iVbSfi  tsXHVJ, 

EXERCISE  7. 

Write  the  folloAving  words,  and  ascertain  the  ^[uantit^; 
of  their  vowels : — 


12  ORTIIOCfEAPHY.  §  10 

Yis-ra-*er,  glio-yim',  bh'no-tlie-liem',  u-b]i'*o-ts'ro-tlia'yiklij 
kliu-sb^n',  risli-f  a-thii  yim,  me'-lekh,  bli'bliit-iio',  li-liu-dha', 
•f-^^obli-klit'in',  yitli-ka-fe'-ka. 

Write  and  divide  into  syllables : — 

Umiknekliem',  yesk'bku',  Mmtsatho',  yikhrafem', 
sliigkyonotk',  bhe*^unatlio',  v'lar'*nblieni',  tk^h^o  gku, 
shole^kk'. 


§  10.     Resulting  Vmoel- Changes. 

Certain  vowel-ckanges  result  from  tke  foregoing  niles, 
viz. : — 

1.  If  two  vowelless  consonants  concur  at  tke  begin- 
ning of  a  syllable,  tke  first  will  receive  a  skort 
vowel.  Tkis  is  commonly  Hkirik,  e.  g.  ''b^^  dibhre  for 
'''nn'7 ;  but  if  one  of  the  consonants  kad  a  compound  SkVa, 
tke  vowel  corresponding  will  be  inserted,  e.  g.  l'b?;i 
yd'mbdlh  for  "TCiT, ;  or  if  a  vowel  kas  been  rejected,  tke 
new  vowel  may  be  conformed  to  it,  e.  g.  ii'p''2  moVhlio 
for  iDb^  from  tf'bti . 

2.  When  a  tone-vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  two 
consonants  tke  pronunciation  is  frequently  softened  by 
gi^dng  a  pretonic  vowel,  mostly  Kamets,  to  tke  first,  e.  g. 
niibis  from  nsb-a ,  no; ,  nnpb .  And  tke  vowel  a  is  often 
retained  in  suck  a  situation,  wken  otker  vowels  would  be 
rejected,  e.g.  *^2:r'aT»  from  yi3«,but  '^S'lW  not  ^^i^t  fiom 

3.  Tke  karskness  of  concurring  consonants  at  tke  end 
of  a  word  is  commonly  relieved  by  inserting  Segkol,  to 
wkick  a  preceding  Pattakk  is  conformed,  y)\  for  an^, 
r?!?  for  Jnpb  ,  ^biQ  jcr  ?[bi3 .  If  eitker  consonant  is  a  gut- 
tural Pattakb  is  mostly  used  instead,  ns5,  b^D,  y^S,  If 
eitker   consonant    is   "^ ,  Hkirik   is   used ;  if   tlie   secon(J 


§  11.  KAMETS    AND    KA:\IETSlinATUPH.  13 

consonant  is  1  it  will  rest  in  Shurek,  ri^'lh,  -"b^,  ^nn  ^  but 

4.  When  by  reason  of  any  changes  occurring  in  words 
a  short  vowel  comes  to  stand  in  a  simple  syllable,  the 
vowel  must  ordinarily  be  prolonged  or  the  syllable  con 
verted  into  a  mixed  syllable  by  doubling  the  succeeding 
consonant;  thus  instead  of  n^b^  we  find  rt'^i^  yd-iiflih  or 
T\^i^_  yan-nl'^lih. 

5.  When  a  simple  syllable  becomes  mixed  or  a  long 
mixed  syllable  loses  its  accent,  its  vowel  is  ordinarily 
shortened,  e.  2r.  "T^^o  from  ^tio ,  b^^  from  bi*'. 


§  11.     Kamets  and  Kamets-Hhatwph. 

Kamets  a  and  Kamets-Hhatuph  6  are  both  represented 
by  the  same  sign  (,  ),  but  may  be  distinguished  by  the 
following  rules : — 

1.  In  accented  syllables,  whether  simple  or  mixed,  and 
in  unaccented  simple  syllables,  §  9,  5,  it  is  Kamets, 
n^'Q  ma'veth^  ^i'n  da-blidr' ;  in  unaccented  mixed  syllables 
it  is  Kamets-Hhatuph,  ""fc&n  lihdpli-shl^  :ni»ni  vattd-slwhli, 

2.  Before  a  letter  with  simple  ShVa  the  distinction  is 
mostly  made  by  Methegh  (  _  ),  §  22 ;  without  Methegh 
it  is  always  Kamets-Hhatuph,  with  it  commonly  Kamets, 
niaDn  JihdlcJi-md^  ^%?}  Jihd-lchhad, 

3.  Before  a  guttui-al  with  Hhateph-Kamets,  or  Kamets- 
Hhatuph,  the  syllable  is  frequently  intermediate,  §  9,  7, 
and  the  vowel  o,  though  accompanied  by  Methegh,  '^nna 
hoJihPrl,  tDi??n  to^ohJfJ dhem. 


a.  Some  cases  falling  nnder  2  and  3  can  only  be  decided  by  the  etymology ; 
thus  n"':xi  with  the  prefixed  conjunction  v6''niyyuth,  '^I'-J?'!  with  the  article 
JuvniyycL;  C"'Tr'n^  sMrdsJilm  from  ^Sa,  ^"^'^y^  liJidiuUMm  from  TZJ^n  j 
n"^^'!:  in  Ps.  Ixxxvi.  2  the  imperative  «7io;wra,  in  Job  x.  12  the  preterite  sMrji'rd 


14  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  12 

EXERCISE  8. 

A)  'ply  the  foregoing  rules  to  the  words  that  follow. 

.njDt^  .^^nj  y^Afps  yCns  ,n^  ,  J^fe^'il  >*^t5?'7  i^^^)'^  >^i?; 
Wiite : — 

Ya'h6m,    ^^z',    :5=5ziiam',   mal'khu',  m5rkh6',  dhabhai-', 
niohh"rabhoth',  hhakh'ma',  hh5khma',  n6f5bh'dhem'. 


§  12.     DaghesTirlene, 

1.  Daghesh-lene  is  a  point  written  in  the  letters  a  5l  *! 
D  s  n  (n£)5  'i^ia  Vghadli  Ic'phatli)  to  indicate  the  loss  of 
their  aspiration,  §  1,  3.  They  retain  their  aspirate  sound, 
when  they  are  immediately  preceded  by  a  vowel  or  a 
vocal  ShVa ;  when  not  so  preceded,  they  receive  Daghesh- 
lene,  on^^a  V gliadliUm. 

2.  An  initial  aspirate  following  a  word  which  ends  in 
a  vowel,  and  has  a  conjunctive  accent,  §  16,  does  not  take 
Dagliesli-lene  ^Jin  T\T\'^r\ ,  Gen.  i.  2 ;  but  if  the  accent  is  dis- 
junctive, Daghesh-lene  is  inserted,  since  in  this  case  the 
asj)irate  is  regarded  as  removed  from  the  influence  of  the 
vowel  rxw\fi  ^^^^^,  j  Gen.  i.  26. 


EXERCISE  9. 

Correct  the  following  sentences  by  inserting  or  omitting 
Daghesh-lene : — 

Yashabh  bhaf ir  fadh  f 5m'dho  liphne  hafedha  I'mish. 
phat  f  adh  moth  khohen  ghadhol. 

V'fasita  hhesed  fal  fabdeka  ki  bib'rit  *donay  hebe«t^ 
at  abd'ka  v'«im  bi  f avon  h*miteni  v'fad  ^-'ibika  lo*  t'bL,eeni. 


^S   13,    14.  DAGHESH-FOETE.  16 


§  13.     Dagliesli-forte, 

1.  Daghesh-forte  is  a  point  inserted  in  tlie  bosom  of  a 
letter  to  show  that  it  is  to  be  doubled;  thus  bia^^  vayyim- 
nidi.  It  is  never  found  in  the  gutturals  a^  n  n  5 ,  and 
rarely  in  1 . 

2.  A  point  in  one  of  the  aspirates  is  Daghesh-forte  if  a 
vowel  precedes,  otherwise  it  is  Daghesh-lene,  §  12,  1, 
rn^"^  dihiartd'.  The  aspirates  when  doubled  likewise 
lose  their  aspiration. 

3.  A  point  in  Vav  is  Daghesh-forte  if  a  vowel  pre- 
cedes ;  otherwise  it  is  Shurek  ^^^^i  yHsavvu. 

4.  Daghesh-forte  is  sometimes  inserted  for  euphony,  as 
■•ifS?  in7i^bJie  for  '^hsy  Mhhe.  When  the  first  letter  of  a 
word  is  doubled  in  order  to  link  it  with  the  final  vowel 
of  the  word  preceding,  it  is  called  Daghesh-forte  con- 
junctive, ^i<Sf  ^"a^p  'kumuj:s4s'u. 

5.  Daghesh-forte  is  frequently  omitted  from  vowelless 
letters,  whether  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  words. 
In  ihQ  former  case  the  following  ShVa  generally  remains 
vocal,  tjin^i  vayliha^h  for  5in*>i  vayy'^hTiwpp. 


§  14.     Mappih, 

Mappik'  is  a  point  inserted  in  a  final  He  to  denote  that 
it  is  a  consonant,  and  not  a  vowel,  §  7,  3,  J^^b^  malkdh^ 
robti  malkd, 

EXEECISE  10. 

Write:— 

Shibb^tsta,  b^tt^bbafoth,  d^bb'rah,  **dh^bb'ra,  gulg6lto, 
bikk^rtim,  v^}^"ibbak'f u,  h^yyulladh,  tiikh'lu,  fasitha  Ho, 

Pronounce  the  following  words  and  name  the  pointa 
which  are  written  in  the  letters  : — 


!♦>  OETHOGKAPHY.  §§  15,  16 

,!i3i2n    j^b^kn    ,nn";^s    ,  y^^ii'ib  ,0^5  ,  D'^^sp  ,^"ti!)i   ,  njn 

§  15.    HapM. 

Rapli6  is  a  small  horizontal  stroke  placed  over  a  letter 
and  denotes  the  opposite  of  Daghesh-lene,  Daghesh-forte, 
or  Mappik,  as  the  case  may  be :  J^if^sn  hivvds^dhd  not 
hivvds^dhdh. 


§  16.     Accents. 

1.  An  accent  is  written  upon  every  word,  with  the 
twofold  design  of  marking  its  tone-syllable  and  of  indi- 
cating its  relation  to  other  words  in  the  sentence. 

2.  Accents  are  either  disjunctives  or  conjunctives,  as 
shown  in  table  III.  The  former  indicate  that  the  word 
upon  which  they  are  placed  is  more  or  less  separated 
from  those  that  follow;  the  latter  that  it  is  connected 
with  what  follows. 

3.  The  place  of  the  accent  is  either  over  or  under  the 
letter  preceding  the  tone- vowel,  with  the  exception  of  the 
prej)ositives  (marked  prep,  in  the  table),  which  always 
accompany  the  initial  letter  of  the  word,  and  the  post- 
positives  (marked  post/p.^^  which  stand  upon  its  final 
letter. 

4.  Silluk  has  the  same  form  as  Methegh ;  but  the 
former  invariably  stands  on  the  tone-syllable  of  the  last 
word  in  the  verse,  while  Methegh  is  never  written  under 
a  tone-syllable.     Pashta  is  likewise   distinguished   from 


§17.  ACCEISTS.  17 

Kadhma,   and  Y'thibh   from   Mahpakh,  only  by   their 
position. 

5.  In  the  poetical  books,  Job,  Psalms,  and  Proverbs,  a 
di-fferent  system  of  accentuation  prevails  from  that  wliich 
is  in  use  in  the  rest  of  the  Old  Testament. 


§  17.     Position  of  the  Accent 

The  accent  always  falls  either  upon  the  ultimate  or 
penultimate  syllable,  and  is  governed  by  the  following 
rules : — 

1.  In  their  uninflected  state  all  words,  whether  primi- 
tive or  derivative,  are  accented  on  the  ultimate,  ^i^  ,  yyr\ . 
But  Segholate  words  and  forms,  that  is,  such  as  have 
an  unessential  vowel  in  the  ultimate,  inserted  to  soften 
the  harshness  of  concurring  consonants,  §  10.  3,  are  ac- 
cented on  the  penultimate,  ^^^  for  -fbtt  ,  bj^  for  ^y}, 

2.  If  the  word  receive  an  addition  at  the  end  consist- 
ing of  a  vowel  or  beginning  with  one,  this  will  attract 
the  accent  to  itself  or  to  its  initial  vowel,  n'^'in^  ,  iinn  . 

Exceptions. — a.  Suffixes  added  to  the  3  fern,  preterite 
of  verbs,  tjni'nn.  5.  Personal  terminations  of  verbs 
and  the  paragogic  vowels  H  ^  ,  n  ^  and  *» .  ,  when  they  do 
not  cause  the  rejection  of  the  vowel  previously  accented, 
ni3i^,  ^^'^'^nn,  but  li'in. 

3.  When  a  simple  syllable  is  attached  to  a  word  either 
dii'ectly  or  by  means  of  a  union  vowel,  the  accent  is  given 
to  the  penult,  Dsia ,  noN-a ,  ^:nDS"a ,  bj? ,  niVg . 

The  suffix  ?|  follows  the  general  rule,  when  preceded  by 
a  vowel,  or  attached  to  the  3  f em.  preter.  of  verbs  ;  other- 
wis<5  it  draws  the  accent  upon  itself,  T^^  ,  'Hf?!^? ,  '^H  . 

4.  A  consonant  appended  to  a  long  final  vowel  draws 
the  accent  to  the  ultimate,  ^nii;' ,  'j^h^tt'^ . 


18  ORTHOGEAPHY.  §§  18,  19 

5.  Appended  mixed  syllables  always  receive  the  accent. 

6.  The  only  prefixes  which  affect  the  position  of  the 
accent  are  the  Vav  Conversive  of  the  future,  which  drawa 
it  back  from  a  mixed  ultimate  to  a  simple  penult,  y^^h  ; 
and  the  Vav  Conversive  of  the  preterite,  which  throws  it 
forward  from  the  penult  to  the  ultimate,  Pi^'a^ST . 

EXERCISE  11. 

Accent  the  following  words  : 

*abh  and  the  derived  forms  ha*abh,  *abhi,  ^abhinu, 
,„abhik,  ^abhoth,  /bhothenu,  M**bhothehem. 

PakMh'  and  the  derived  forms  pak'dhu,  pak^dhnu, 
pakMhti,  p'kMhtiv,  p'kMhtem,  yiphkodh,  hiphkidh, 
y^phkidhehu,  hithpak'dhu,  h^mmuphkadhim. 

§  18.     Iiecessio7i  of  the  Accent, 

A  conjunctive  is  frequently  removed  from  the  ultimate 
to  the  penult,  if  a  disjunctive  immediately  follows, 
whether  upon  a  monosyllable  or  the  penult  of  a  dissyl- 
lable, nb'^b  s-ip^  Gen.  1 ;  5. 

§  19.     Pause  Accents, 

The  greater  disjunctives,  which  mark  the  limits  of 
clauses  and  sections,  are  called  pause  accents. 

These  sometimes  stand  upon  the  penult  in  words 
ordinarily  accented  on  the  ultimate,  '^ib^ ,  '^pbif ;  or  vice 
versA  upon  the  ultimate  in  place  of  the  penult,  ■T5X''T  . 

They  also  occasion  certain  vowel  changes,  viz.,  they 

1.  Lengthen  short  vowels,  particularly  ( _ )  or  ( ^.  )  tc 
(   )  nii^,  -OX;  nni,  n-i5?. 

\   r      /  -    T    7  AT   T    7  •.••.•?  :•  Mt 


§  20,  ACCENTS.  ly 

2.  Restore  vowels  dropped  in  inflection,  'I'l^'i ,  ^iST  . 

3.  Change  simple  SliVa  to  Seghcl,  ■'n;' ,  ''n;  . 

4.  Change  compound  ShVa  to  the  corresponding  long 
70wel,  '^ix  ,  ■'S^  . 

§  20.     Consecution  of  Accents. 

1.  The  last  word  in  eveiy  verse  receives  Silluk,  and  is 
followed  by  two  dots  vei-tically  placed  ( J )  called  Soph 
Pasuk  (i.  e.  end  of-  the  verse). 

2.  If  the  verse  consists  of  two  clauses,  the  last  word  of 
the  jfirst  clause  is  marked  by  Athnahh.  If  of  three 
clauses,  which  is  the  greatest  number  that  any  verse  can 
contain,  the  first  is  limited  by  Segholta,  the  second  by 
Athnahh,  and  the  last  by  Silluk. 

3.  These  clauses  are  divided  into  sections,  if  necessaiy, 
by  one  or  more  of  the  disjunctives,  Zakeph  Katon, 
Zakeph  Gadhol,  E'bhi*,  Pazer,  and  T'lisha  Gh'dhola. 

4.  In  the  sections  thus  created  the  accents  are  disposed 
relatively  to  the  disjunctive  which  marks  its  close,  see 
table  XX. 

5.  Each  disjunctive  of  the  first  class  is  regularly  pre- 
ceded by  one  conjunctive  and  a  disjunctive  of  the  second 
class ;  disjunctives  of  the  second  class  by  two  conjunctives 
and  a  disjunctive  of  the  third  class ;  disjunctives  of  the 
third  class  by  three  conjunctives  and  a  disjunctive  of  the 
fourth  class ;  and  disjunctives  of  the  fourth  class  by  four 
or  more  conjunctives. 

6.  The  trains  of  accents  thus  formed  are  adapted  to 
sections  of  different  length  and  character  by  omitting 
such  of  the  Conjunctives,  and  more  rarely  by  repeating 
such  of  the  Disjunctives,  as  the  mutual  relations  of  the 
v^ords  may  seem  to  require,  and  breaking  off  the  series 
whenever  all  the  words  in  the  section  have  been  supplied. 


20  OETHOGEAPHY.  §§  21,  22 

§  21.     MaMeph, 

1.  Makkepli'  (")  is  used  to  connect  words.  Monosyi- 
JaLie  particles  especially  are  frequently  tlius  linked  witli 
tlui  succeeding  or  preceding  word,  '^^"ntel^n-D^ 

2.  Where  two  or  more  words  are  united  in  this  mannei 
the  last  only  has  an  accent.  Hence  a  long  mixed  syl- 
lable, followed  by  Makkeph,  must  be  shortened,  §  9,  5, 
vlii^'^i,  or  else  receive  the  secondary  accent  Methegh, 
§  22,  M^^?T¥- 

EXERCISE  13. 

Connect  each  pair  of  words  by  Makkeph,  inserting 
Daghesh-forte  conjunctive  whenever  the  former  ends  in 
a  or  k 

Kol  yisra*el,  yal'dha  lo,  *eth  *elle,  *ethmokh  bo,  tih'y^"^ 
li,  ten  li,  sh'losh  *ell^,  y'bh^kkesh  daf  ath,  I'kha  na*. 


§  22.     Methegh, 

1.  Metliegh  (  t  )  represents  a  minor  stress  of  the  voice, 
which  usually  falls  upon  the  second  syllable  before  the 
accent,  and  again  upon  the  fourth,  if  the  word  have  so 
many,  nirb^^n™^,  'i^^^")^ 

2.  If  the  syllable  which  should  receive  it  is  mixed,  il 
may  be  given  in  preference  to  an  antecedent  simple  syl 
]al)le ;  or  if  none  such  precede,  it  may  be  omitted  alto- 
gether. 

3.  It  is  always  given  to  simple  syllables,  followed  by 
a  vocal  ShVa,  ^1)2x7 ;  also  to  intermediate  syllables  fol 
lowed  by  compound  ShVa,  or  a  vowel  which  has  arisen 
from  compound  ShVa,  "ifcxb ,  T\y\;i ,  and  frequently  when 
the  Sh'va  is  simple,  nsfiiab . 

4.  The   place   of  Methegh   is   often   supplied   by  an 


§  28.  k'ri  and  k'thieil  21 

accent   chosen   agreeably   to   the   laws   of    consecution 

EXEECISE  13. 

Apply  the  rules  for  Methegh.  A  hyphen  represents 
Makkeph. 

Vejohe',  M**dhonehem',  meh^mm^f^rakha',  f^mmina- 
dhabh',  ben-ha*ama',  ber^khntikhem',  v^yyir'*ti',  hd,n- 
nogh'sim',  ha*ishsha',  me*^rtso',  latheth-la'nu,  hithh^- 
lekh-no*hh',  met^bhodh^th'khem'. 

§  23.     ICri  and  ICtUhh. 

1.  K'ri  (^read^  is  the  technical  name  of  a  marginal 
reading  in  the  Hebrew  Bible,  which  is  sanctioned  by  tra- 
dition as  a  substitute  for  the  corresponding  reading  in 
the  text,  or  the  K'thibh  {writteri).  The  vowels  of  the 
K'ri  are  connected  with  the  letters  of  the  text  and  a 
reference  made  to  the  margin  where  the  letters  of  the 
former  may  be  found. 

2.  If  a  given  word  is  to  be  omitted  in  reading,  it  is 
left  unpointed,  and  the  note  '^^p  fc<^i  n'TD  written  hut  not 
read^  placed  in  the  margin.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  a 
word  is  to  be  supplied,  its  vowels  are  inserted  in  the 
text,  and  the  letters  placed  in  the  margin  with  the  note, 
^^TO  Kbi  '^-ip  read  hut  not  written. 

3.  In  some  words  of  frequent  occurrence,  a  different 
reading  is  suggested  by  the  points  alone,  without  a  mar- 
ginal explanation.  Thus  the  sacred  word  nin"! ,  which  the 
Jews  have  a  superstitious  dread  of  pronouncing,  is  read 
by  Ihem  as  if  it  were  ^X^^^  Lord^  whose  points  it  accord- 
ingly receives,  r;in;> ,  unless  these  two  names  stand  in 
immediate  connection,  when  to  avoid  repetition  it  is  read 
D'^n'bbj  and  pointed  rfin;;  so  the  pronoun  i<in  is  read  i^^T}. 


22  ORTHOGRAPHY.  §  23 


EXERCISE  14 


Write  tlie  following  words,  as  they  would  appear  in 
the  text,  and  in  the  margin  of  the  Hebrew  Bible,  uniting 
the  points  of  the  K'ri  with  the  letters  of  the  K'thibh. 
and  making  the  appropriate  marginal  note. 

Lartibh  k'thibh — laribh  k'ri;  sima  k'thibh — stima  k'ri; 
fasithi  k'thibh — fasitha  k'ri ;  bish'n^th  k'thibh — ^b^sh- 
shana  k'^i  5  f^bhdo  k'thibh — f^bhdekha  k'l"!  ]  hotsithiha 
k'thibh — h^tstsithuha  k'l'i;  bh'yisra*el  k'thibh — yisra^el 
k'ri;  p'rath  read  but  not  written;  *im  wi^itten  but  not 
read. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

§  24.     Prefixed  ParticUs. 

1.  The  significant  elements  of  speech  in  Hebrew  con- 
sist of 

(1)  Prefixed  particles,  which  do  not  form  a  complete 
word  of  themselves,  but  are  always  attached  to  that 
which  follows. 

(2)  The  Pronouns,  which  are  used  both  separately 
and  as  appendages  to  other  words. 

(3)  The  remaining  parts  of  speech,  which  always  con- 
stitute separate  words. 

2.  The  prefixed  particles  are  the  article,  He  interroga- 
tive, the  inseparable  prepositions,  and  Vav  Conjunctive. 

§  25.     The  Article. 

1.  The  definite  article  consists  of  n  with  Pattahh  fol- 
lowed by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  first  letter  of  the  word  to 
which  it  is  prefixed,  l(y^  a  hing^  ^^^n  tJie  hing. 

2.  If  the  first  letter  of  the  word  have  Sh'va,  Daghesh- 
forte  may  be  omitted  except  from  the  aspirates,  §  13.  5, 
ix;'n,  ^liiOT,  but  ni'ian,  nsnsn. 

3.  Before  gutturals,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh- 
forte,  §  13.  1,  the  article  has  Kamets,  §  9.  5.  This  ia 
always  the  case  before  fc<  and  ^  and  commonly  before 
y;  before  n  and  n  Pattahh  is  mostly  retained,  §  9.  7, 
biiacn.  S'fc-in,  ta'^i^n,  vpir\  but  Vi^r\r\.  %tm, 

•.•T7  TTIT7  •      -    T     1  "T  -/•?- 

a.  Tiie  nouns  y^M  earthy  *1H  mountain^  and  G5  people  on  receiving  the  article 
lengthen  their  vowels  to  T^'i^iJ^  j   ^•7*7  ^''^^  ^V}  • 


24  HE   INTEREOGATIYE.  §  26. 

4  Before  tlie  strong  gutturals  with  Kamets,  the  article 
has  Seghol.  This  is  always  the  case  with  n ,  but  with  n 
and  "S  only  takes  place,  when  the  article  stands  upon  the 
second  syllable  before  the  accent,  ^i^n,  Q^nJ^,  ^'''^OsJj 
D^n?n,  but  ^r^T}^   D?n. 

§  26.     He  Interrogative, 

The  letter  ri  prefixed  with  Hhateph-Pattahh  asks  a 
question,  ify:  we  shall  go,  ^5^5 rj  shall  ive  go?  Before  a 
vowelless  letter,  §  10.  1,  or  a  guttural  this  becomes 
Pattahh,  nT\VX^  do  ye  Tcnowf  ?l?«n  %haU  I  go? 
Before  gutturals  with  Kamets  it  is  changed  to  Seghol 
nn^n  U  was^  •^^?v30  "loas  it? 

EXERCISE  15. 

Be  careful  to  apply  the  rule  for  Daghesh-lene,  §  12.  1 ;  and  observe  that  simple 
Sh'va  following  either  the  article  or  the  interrogative  is  always  vocal,  §  9,  a, 

^hpTS).  not  cny^-^n  . 

Prefix  the  article  to  the  following  words : — 
"Toa  fiesh;  nnj  gold;  D^  sea;  "^b  tree;  "lix  light; 
n^^K  ground;  tjitri  darkness;  nixbis  work;  nbb^n  fig- 
tree;  "1?^  dust;  'u%i  bone;  DnS  bread;  n^np  corpse; 
VT)  firmament;  T\T\  spirit;  nn:?  evening;  a'nn  sword; 
y^t  H-cd ;  siis  star;  Thv  leaf;  QiJJ  man;  ni©  year; 
*.»73  river;  "fi^^  earth;  n?  people;  ''n  or  ''n  living; 
cnni  ^^'ords;  nicns  shoulders. 

See  §  25.  3,  a. 

Prefix  He  Interrogative  to  the  following  words : 

,w  ^Tm    ,TO  ,Dyt   ,11   ,^>j?   j-ra©  ,Kiin  j'^bbx  ,rtoS[ 
,rix5  j^isn  ,nnnD«  ,b«b  ,bi«  jri'^nB  ,^5^^  i'^^'^  ^'H^i?^'?  ,pn 
.TD'i'ni^  .nDDi3  ,Dh'i&5n    n-'kn^  ,-ipn  ,^iiD)3  ,rnn  ,t:srn  ,np5{ 

^  Resb  is  not  regarded  as  a  guttural  in  the  rule  for  He  Interrogative. 


§§  27,  28.  INSEPARABLE   PREPOSITIONS. 


§  27.     Inseparable  Prepositions 

1.  Tlie  prepositions  n,  d  and  b  are  regularly  prefixed 
witli  Sli'va,  n^CK'na ,  Vis  ,  nO'^^^t*  •  Before  vowellesa 
letters  they  take  Hhirik,  §  10.  1,  TVy^  for  ?^p-i2i ;  before 
tj^utturals  with  compound  ShVa  they  take  the  correspond- 
ing short  vowel,  §  10.  1,  ^12!?5 ,  VD:«b ,  ^ira ;  before  mono- 
syllables  and  before  dissyllables  accented  upon  the  penult, 
they  frequently  receive  a  pretonic  Kamets,  §  10.  2,  sni^T? , 
csbb;  before  the  article  its  n  is  rejected  and  the  vowel 
given  to  the  preposition  na^3  for  "li'^D? ,  H?^  for  T'^^fnb . 

a.  The  initial  &<  of  *'3'T5<  Lord,  'ji'nfij  master  when  it  has  a  singular  suffix,  and 
L'i»i'bi<  God  quiescea  after  the  inseparable  prepositions,  §  7,  «,  '^V'lX^  ,  •^"'?."'^^ , 
C^n'bxs  for  D^rrbxa  the  Seghol  lengthened  to  Tsere  in  the  simple  syllable  • 
also  in  the  inf.  const.  "I'SX    to  say  after  \>,  ^'^^  but  '"•'3|?3,  "''s^l  • 

2.  The  preposition  I'D  from  may  either  be  written  as  a 
separate  M^ord  or  shortened  to  the  prefix  "a  with  Hhirik 
followed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  next  letter,  tj'^'i'a  for 
Xf]  I'P .  Before  n  Hhirik  is  commonly  retained,  §  9.  7, 
but  before  other  gutturals  it  is  lengthened  to  Tsere,  §  9. 
5,  T'lHtj  for  f^n  ya^  but  fn^Ta,  qi:^ra. 

a.  The  inseparable  prepositions  take  before  the  divine  name  nirTi  the  same 
pointing  that  they  would  receive  before  "^ in y;  J  which  the  Jews  substitute  for  it  in 
reading,  thus  rr['n^'2^   nirT«3,  ninib,   nin-^tt,  Comp.  §  23.  3. 


§  28.      Vav  Conjunctive. 

The  conjunction  1  and  is  regularly  prefixed  with  ShVa 
^©ni ,  yy^ry) .  Before  one  of  the  labials  n ,  tt ,  B ,  or 
before  a  vowelless  letter  Vav  quiesces  in  Shurek  T^T, 
iriD^;  before  a  vowelless  Yodh  it  receives  Hhirik,  in 
which  the  Yodh  quiesces,  ''Ji'^'i ;  before  a  guttural  with 


26  ETYMOLOGY.  §   29 

compound  ShVa  it  receives  tlie  corresponding  sLort 
vowel  j'^iiJin  ,  T^'»5|l  ,'^5^\]3;  before  monosyllables  and  dis- 
syllables accented  on  tlie  penult  it  frequently  receives  a 
pretonic  Kamets  ^nn; ,  i^nj . 


VOCABULAEY    1. 

The  parts  of  speech  are  distinguished  by  initials  or  abbreyiations ;  m.  denotei 
masculine,  f.  feminine,  pi.  plural. 

aiij  n.  m.  man  ?  prep,  according  to^  as,  like, 

*ii&5  n.  m.  light  D^^nDis  n.  m.  pi.  stars 

^  prep,  in  ip  prep,  to ^  for 

nibna  n.  f.  leasts  cattle  ^  adv.  not 

rti  n.  m.  house  DnS  n.  m.  f.  hread 

^^^  n.  m.  morning  Th"]^  n.  m.  night 

^tda  n.  m.  flesh  I'a  prep.  y7*6>m 

)  conj.  a7id  ^?  prep,  unto^  until 

!j©ri  n.  m.  darhness  sn?  n.  m.  f.  evening 

Di"^  n.  m.  day  nnto  n.  tr.  field 

d;"  n.  m.  sea  d^'iato  n.  m.  pi.  hsaven 

nS'i  n.  m.  moon  tJa©  n.  m.  f.  s^m. 

Lesson  1  in  Reading  Hebrew,  see  page  111. 
Lesson  1  in  Writing  Hebrew,  see  page  137. 
The  succeeding  lessons  are  connected  with  the  vocabu 
laries  that  follow  in  their  order. 


§  29     Personal  Pronouns, 
1    The  personal  pronouns  are  the  following,  viz. 


BINaULAK. 

X.      I  ''psx  anokhi;  •>?«  "ni 

Thou  m.  np5?  atta' 
Thou  f.     ni«  (^n«)  att 


■•I 


g    29.  PERSONAL    PBONOIINS.  27 


3 


( He  i^^n  \vl 


PLUBAL. 

I.       We  'Cnsij}  ^nahhnu,      ^sni    nahh'nti,    15K     •nu 

j   Ye  m.        OPii<  attem' 
^    (  Ye  f.  TTii?   atten',         njnx    atte'na 

r  TA^2/  ^-       °^  ^^^?  '^"'^''^     hem'ma 

^    I  TTiey  f.        W  hen,  nan     heii'iia 

2.  Wlieii  governed  by  verbs,  nouns  or  particles  they 
are  appended  to  tliem  in  tlie  following  shortened  forms, 
called  pronominal  suffixes : 


1.      Com. 

( MasG. 
^'  I  Fern, 

( MasG, 
^'   {Fern, 


3.  In  the  first  person  singular  "^    is  used  with  nouns, 
and  "»?  with  verbs.     The  third  plural  forms  Dn,  "jn  are 
used  with  plural  nouns;   D,    1  with  verbs  and  singular 
nouns.     The  suffixes  DD  ,  15 ,  dn ,  "jn  are  called  grave,  th 
rest  are  light. 

4.  The  inseparable  prepositions  are  united  with  pro- 
nominal suffixes  as  shown  in  Table  IV. ;  5  is  prolonged  by 
the  syllable  itt  and  TQ  becomes  before  light  suffixes  l^tt 
or  'E'a .  The  suffix  ^n  preceded  by  -7  is  contracted  to  ^i 
e.  g.  isi  for  ina ,  ib  for  ^nb ;  n  preceded  by  —  is  short- 
ened to  n  ^  e.  g.  n^  for  n^  and  in  like  manner  with  the 
pause  accent  ^5  >  2  masc.  sing,  for  T15  . 


TLAB. 

PLUB^. 

''D 

13 

^ 

DD 

? 

1? 

in 

D    nn 

n 

1    1^ 

28  ETrMOLOGY.  §  30 


VOCABULAEY   2. 

ni&5  n.  m.  f.  sign  ^^"^i??  n.  m.  Israel 

ns  n.  m.  hrotlier  5)0?  n.  m.  silver 

r^?  ^7^^/'<?  is  not  ^i2?  adv.  ^^^,  besides 

c^nbx  n.  m.  pi.  God  b^  prep.  'z^c^tz.,  6>t'^r 

f "jx  n.  £  ^ar^A,  J«7^J  D^b  n.  m.  eternitnj 

l"^?  prep,  between  d^  prep,  'zz;'/^^ 

nm  n.  m.  ^(?W  ^'7125'  or  ^^:si  with  me 

•^n  adj.  living^  alive  npi?  adv.  now 

ninj  n.  m.  Jehovah  nnn  prep,  under ^  instead  of 


§  30.     6^^A^7»  ProTiouns, 

1.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  is 

jlf^wc.    Fern.  Common. 

SmGULAu    n|    n»T  this  Plukal    ^^    t^\}^  these 

The  poetic  form  M  is  used  both  as  a  demonstrative  and 
a   a  relative. 

2.  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  i^^n  is  also 
employed  as  a  remote  demonstrative  that, 

3.  The  relative  pronoun  is  'it?^  who^  which^  sometimes 
shortened  to  %  ,  see  Table  V.  When  the  relative  is 
governed  by  verbs,  nouns,  or  particles,  it  stands  without 
change  of  form  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause,  and  the 
appropriate  pronominal  suffix  is  attached  to  the  govern- 
ing word  "W^  ntDK  who  his  day  i.  e.  whose  day  i^ — ^t^ 
who — to  him  i.  e.  to  lohom.  When  a  preposition  stands 
before  the  relative,  it  governs  not  the  relative  itself  but 
its  antedecent  understood ;  thus,  ^'^^^  means  not  to  whom 
or  to  which  but  to  him  who  or  to  that  which.  It 
receives  an  adverbial  sense  when  followed  by  Di?  there^ 


§  31.  VERBS.      THEIE   SPECIES.  29 

e.    2r.    DO — ^toa^    where,    mafe? — ^t}k    wliiiher,    DtJta — "i^s 

4.  The  interrogative  and  indefinite  pronouns  are  ''^ 
who  ?  or  whoever  and  ™  'z/^Aa^  .^  or  whatever,  Tiie  vowel 
of  nia  varies  with  the  first  letter  of  the  following  word, 
see  Table  IV.  In  a  few  instances  its  vowel-letter  is 
dropped,  and  it  is  converted  into  a  prefix,  e.  g.  M-iia  for 
nj  rra  'z^;A<2^  i8  this  ? 

5.  Another  interrogative  is  formed  by  prefixing  the 
particle  ''»?  to  the  pronoun  nr ,  nis^T,  thus  nr  ''X  lohichf 
or  what  f  ^^Tb  ''i^  for  what  ?  why  ?  s^J'Q  ""S?  from  what 
place  f  whence? 

VOCABULAET   3. 

bs  n.  m.  whole,  all,  every       Dip^  n.  m.  f.  jplax^e 

D^i?  n.  m.  pi.  water  ©"ip  n.  m.  holiness,   a  holy 

^yi^.  adv.  aiove  place  or  thirig, 

VERBS. 

§  31.     Thei/r  Species, 

1.  Hebrew  verbs  have  seveu  different  forms,  called 
species  or  conjugations,  viz. : 

1.  Kal  Simple  active. 

2.  Niphal      Simple  passive. 

3.  Piel  Intensive  active. 

4.  Pual  Intensive  passive. 

5.  Hiphil       Causative  active. 

6.  Hophal     Causative  passive. 

7.  Hithpael  Reflexive. 

2.  The  first  of  these  species  is  called  Kal  light,  because 
in  it  no  other  than  the  three  radical  letters  appear,  and 
these  only  in  their  single  power.  The  other  names  are 
taken  from  b?B  to  do,  being  the  forms  assumed  by  thia 
verb  in  each  species  severally. 


80  ETYMOLOGF.  §  32 

3.  To  eacli  of  these  species  belong  a  preterite  and 
future,  two  forms  of  the  infinitive  called  respectively  the 
absolute  and  the  construct,  a  participle,  and  except  to  the 
Pual  and  Hophal,  which  as  pure  passives  cannot  express 
a  command,  an  imperative.  The  Kal  alone  has  two  par 
ticij)les. 

a.  All  of  these  species  very  rarely  co-exist  in  the  same  verb.  Their  signification 
is  commonly  but  not  invariably  what  is  stated  above.  The  Piel  is  sometimes 
causative  like  the  Hiphil,  and  the  Niphal  reflexive  like  the  Hithpael,  or  the 
Hithpael  passive  like  the  NiphaL  In  these  cases  one  or  other  of  the  equivalent 
species  is  often  dropped  as  unnecessary,  or  some  distinction  in  usage  is  created 
between  them.  In  intransitive  verbs  the  Niphal,  if  it  exists  at  all,  is  usually  the 
passive  of  a  transitive  or  causative  sense. 


§  32.     Perfect  Verbs, 

1.  Verbs  are  called  perfect,  when  they  conform 
throughout  to  the  standard  inflection;  and  imperfect, 
when  in  consequence  of  a  weak  letter,  §  2.  2,  or  some 
other  peculiarity  in  the  root  they  deviate  from  it. 

2.  If  ^t:^  to  Mil  be  taken  as  the  model  of  the  perfect 
verb,  the  various  species  with  their  significations  will  be 
as  follows,  viz. : — 


1.  Kal 

^^5 

to  Mil. 

2.  Niphal 

^^f?? 

to  he  Mlled, 

3.  Piel 

bhp 

to  Mil  many  or  to  massacre. 

4.  Pual 

^D^ 

to  be  massacred. 

5.  Hiphil 

b'lppn 

to  cause  to  Mil, 

6.  Hoplial 

^^)?\' 

to  be  caused  to  Mil, 

7.  Hithpael 

^fep^n 

to  Mil  one^s  self. 

a.  It  is  in  each  case  the  third  person  masculine  singular  of  the  preterite,  which 
is  given  above,  and  the  strict  signification,  therefore,  is  he  has  killed,  etc.  But 
when  these  forms  are  used  to  represent  the  species  their  proper  erjuivalent  is  th« 
mfinitive,  which  is  the  form  employed  in  designating  verbs  iu  English. 


§  33.  KAL   PEETERITE   AND   rSTINITIVES.  31 

§  33.     Kal  Preterrite  and  Injmitives. 

1.  The  Kal  preterite  is  inflected  thus : — 

PRETEEITE. 

Sing.  3  m«5(?.     bbj?  katal'  hehilled^didTcillorhasTcilled, 

Zfem,     ri5t:5  kat'la'  she  hilled, 

2  masc.  ri^tSjp  katal'ta  thou  (m.)  Mlledst 

2>fem.     n'pt:^  katalt'  thou  (f.)  hilledst 

1  com,   '^r^tajp  katal'ti  I  hilled, 
Plttr.  3  com,      ^Vjg  kat'lu  they  hilled, 

2  masG.  t3P)bi:p  k'taltem'  ye  (m.)  hilled. 

2  fern,    'jn'p'DlP  k'talten'  ye  (f.)  ^^Zfo^^. 
1  com.    ^5bt3g  katarnti  'Z^;^  hilled, 

Infejotive  absolute  bib^  katol',  construct  bbj?  k'tol  ^6)  Mi 

2.  The  vowel  of  the  second  radical  in  the  Kal  preterite 
iff  commonly  Pattahh,  as  in  bfaj ;  in  a  few  verbs,  how- 
ever, most  of  which  are  intransitive,  it  is  Tsere  as  in  "lis 
to  he  heavy ^  or  Hholem  as  in  Vi©  to  he  bereaved. 

Kal  Peeteeite  with  e. 

dmasc.  Scam.       Zfem.  2  masc.  2  fern.  1  cmi. 

Sln-q.    ni3  n^nj         15715        nnn?       "^mns 

Plue.  1*115  nn^ii       in'ins         ?:2i33 

Infinitive  absolute  ^ii?  construct  iis. 

Kal  Peeteeite  with  d 

3  masc.  Scorn,       Sfem.  2  masc.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing.    bSi^  nbio         nVb»        pVdw        TiVitsJ 

»  T:rT  TT  ::t  •  t        t 

Plue.  ife©  ti^r'?^       I^t"?^  ^^^"^ 

Infinitive  absolute  bii© ,  construct  Vdw  . 


82  ETYMOLOGY.  §  34 

3.  The  endings  of  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the 
preterite  are  fragments  of  the  corresponding  pronouns ; 
thus  ri  in  S^b-bj)  is  from  nniC  2  masc.  sing.,  ri  in  r^^ttg 
fi'om  F^i^  2  fem.  sing.,  dFi  and  IFi  from  the  2  plui\  Drix 
and  )T\^ ;  ''H  in  "^F^^^p  is  by  euphonic  change  for  ''S  from 
^bb^  1  pers.  sing.,  ^5  in  ^^bbp  from  ^2S|  1  pers.  plur.  As 
two  of  the  persons  are  thus  designated  by  pronominal 
fragments,  no  such  designation  was  needed  in  the  case  of 
the  third  and  only  remaining  person.  The  simple  form 
of  the  verb  without  addition  bpjp  is  accordingly  used  for 
the  3  masc.  sing. ;  n^  in  riSipg  being  the  sign  of  the 
feminine  and  so  used  also  in  nouns  and  adjectives,  and  »: 
in  ^itpg  the  sign  of  the  plural. 

VOOAEULAEY   4. 

^"1?  V.  (fut.  a)  to  he  great       n'^i?  adv.  veri/ 
pi'7  V.  (fut.«)  to  cleave,  adhere  fi^?^  n.  f.  commandment 
Jnbi  n.  f.  door  bfc^  v.  to  rule 

"^^n  n.  m.  majesty  I^J  v.  to  give 

*7in  n.  m.  splendor  "^io  v.  to  shut 

pi  J  V.  to  jpour  p'lS  n.  m.  righteousness 

•'S  conj.  for,  because,  that       tiit  v.   to  rest,  cease,  heep 
Q^'^s  n.  m.  pi.  vessels,  articles       Sabbath 
rib  or  rib  v.    (fut.   a)    to  "chit  n.  ra.  f.  Sabbath 
put  on,  wea/r,  be  clothed  "jbr  v.  to  dwell 
with  "^w  V.  to  Tceep,  observe. 

ns?  is  the  sign  of  the  definite  object  and  is  placed 
before  pronouns  or  definite  nouns  when  governed  by  a 
transitive  verb. 

§  34.  Niphal,  JPiel,  and  Pual  Preterites  am^d  Infinitives. 

The  Niphal  is  formed  by  prefixing  5 ;  the  Piel  and  Pual 
by  doubling  the  second  radical  and  attaching  the  appro* 
priate  vowels. 


§31.  NIPUAL,    PIEL,    AND   PUAL    PKETERITES.  83 


NLPHAL   PEETEEITE. 


3  mane.   3  com.       3  fem.              2  masc.            2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing,     bisp?                 ^5*P1??          ^nbap?         P^^'i?!??  ''^^^^p? 

Plur.             i^c))??                    d^^^!??       1^^^!??  ^^bbpa 

Infiniuve  absolute  b*t5|^n,  conshmct  ^liJi^n. 


PIEL   PRETERITE. 


3  wia^c.    3  C(?m.        3  /<?m.  2  masc.  2  fem.  1  com. 

Sing.    Isbp  ntep  r.biDp        nbtbp        "^Pibt^p 

Plur,  fe?  cribEip        IPib^P         ^^b^p 

Infinitive  absolute  Viij?  ,  construct  bijj . 

PUAL   PRETERITE. 
3  wio^c.    3  cewi.       Zfem.  2  maac.  2  fem.  1  com. 

SiNa.    b6^  nte^  nbtOj?         nb^jj         ''rib^lj 

Plur.  ^fe];  s^^^l?        is^^l?  ^^b^jj 

Infinitive  absolute  b"^|j,  const/ruct  b^jj. 

Vocabulary  5. 

The  initials  K.,  N.,  P.,  etc.,  denote  the  verbal  species. 

"^TirbK  n.  m.  Eleazar  "lio  v.  K  Pu.  to  be  sliut 

■fi'iif  n.  m.  f.  arh  T^n]?  v.  P.  to  gather;  K  to  be 

bia  v.  N.   to  be  separated,  gathered 

divided  ©^jj    v.   P.    H.    to   sanctify^ 

Ti'l  V.  K.  to  hnow  consecrate;   N.  Pu.  to  be 

tJns  V.  K.  P.  to  subdue;  N.  sanctified 

to  be  subdued  :?niD  v.  N.  to  swea/r 

•>:£)b  ^^a;'d  bSiD  v.  P.  to  bereave 

ri^b  V.  K.  to  talce  1?©    v.    P.   H.  to  cause  tc 

n©"53  V.  K.  to  anoint  dwell 

isBtt  n.  m.  tabernacle,  dwell-  'j'QtD  n.  m.  oil, 

ing 

9* 


84  ETYMOLOGY.  §  35 


§  35.     Tlie  remaining  Preterites  and  Infinitives, 

Tlu^Hipliil  and  Hophal  are  formed  by  prefixing  n  witt 
the  proper  vowels.  The  Hithpael  is  formed  by  prefixing 
r.n  to  the  construct  infinitive  of  the  Piel. 


HIPHIL   PRETERITE. 
Zmasc.     S  com.  Sfem.         2masc.  2  fern,  1  com. 

Sing.    ^'^Pipn  s^^''£?l?n      ^^^J?*?       ri^^l?r»     ^'P^^^iPr* 

Infective  absolute  'Ppn,  construct  ^''^l^n. 

HOPHAL   PRETERITE. 

Sma^G.     ^  com.         dfem.  2mnsc.  2  fern.  1  com. 

Sing,    bbjipn  ^?^!?r?        ^nbbpn      Pi^fajpn     *inbbpn 

Plur.  ^^P!?0  D^^'Pl?r?      1^^^j?7      ^^^Pi?0 

Infestitive  absolute  bt?!?D>  construct  ^'^PO- 

HITHPAEL    PRETERITE. 
8  771050.      3  com.        8/(SW.  2  ttiosc.  2 /em.  1  com. 

Sestg.    bfepinn  ^^^P^H      Pi^^p^^H     ^^k'^^T^  ""nbtaprin 

Plur.  ^bp)?nri  onbis^n    inbcifrin    ^sb^j^nn 

Infinitive  absolute  b^j^nn,  construct  ^k'^^^. 

Vocabulary  6. 

b'is  V.  H.  to  sepa/rate  ^P^)"^  n.  f.  worh 

D^iii  n.  m.  pi.  nations  ^^?   v.  Ho.  to  be  caused  tc 
Da  conj.  also  reign^  to  be  made  hing 

'Tr\  n.  m.  David  ^b'la  n.  m.  hing 

n^^n  n.  f.  animal^  wild  beast  tn^ibtt  n.  £  hingdom 

tto  V.  H.  to  cut  off;  Ho.  to  toiti  n.  a  little  * 
^^  (?2^^  off 
*  135a  ia  a  noun  meaning  a  little  tiling  or  a  small  quantity  of  any  tiling,  but-  not 


36. 


KAL    FUTURE. 


35 


1:3^^  V.  H.  to  make  small  or  mniD  v.   H.  to  cause  to  rest, 

few  or  cease 

©■ij?  V  Hitli.  to  savMify  or  tht  v.  H.  to  destroy 

purify  one^s  self  nS©  y.  P.  H.  to  send, 

anj  V.  H.  to  Iring  nea/r^  offer 


§  36.     Kal  Fuimre^  Imperative^  and  Participles. 

1.  Tke  future  and  imperative  of  each  species  are 
foT-raed  from  the  construct  infinitive  by  attaching  the 
proper  pronominal  fragments. 


FUTURE. 

SlXG. 

3  masc. 

^t3)?^ 

yiktol' 

he  shall  or  will  Mil 

Zfem. 

bDj^n 

tiktor 

she  will  hill 

2  masc. 

bi3j?n 

tiktor 

thou  (m.)  wilt  Mil 

2  fem. 

''^t:pn 

tikt'ir 

thou  (f.)  wilt  Mil 

1  com. 

"^m 

ektor 

I  shall  Mil 

Plur 

,  3  masc. 

^%!?? 

yikt'lti' 

they  (m.)  loill  Mil 

Sfem, 

Mjjjtbpn 

tiktolna 

they  (f.)  will  Mil 

2  masc. 

^St2j?n 

tikt'lti' 

ye  (m.)  loill  Mil 

2  fem.. 

njbtipn 

tiktolna 

ye  (f.)  will  Mil 

1  com. 

'"^^P? 

niktol' 

we  shall  Mil, 

IMPERATIVE. 

SrsTG. 

2  masc. 

^)? 

k'tor 

Mil  thou  (m.) 

2  fem. 

^^^P 

kit'li' 

Mil  thou  (f.) 

Plur. 

2  masc. 

^Sttp 

kit'lti' 

Mil  ye  (m.) 

2  fem. 

»^?yt!? 

k'tol'na 

Mil  ye  (£) 

little  or  smaU  as  an  adjective.  Thus  we  may  say  trnq  tt5^  a  Uttte  watery  t35a 
clnS  a  ^^Y?Z(3  bread  ;  but  I3?a  could  not  be  used  in  such  phrases  as  a  UttU  7wu8e_ 
a  Utile  door.     A  different  word  \^'Ould  be  required  in  the  latter  case. 


36 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§36 


SiNGULAE. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Active,  Plukal. 

fern.  mase.  fern. 

pp       n3i2p    or    mbtjp  n\St2p        ni^op        killing 

koter    kot'la'  koteleth      kot'lim'     kot'lotli' 


ir/isc. 


katul'    k'ttila' 


Passive, 


D'^5^i:p       ni5^t2p      y^^7W 
k'tulim'    k'tuloth' 


2.  Some  verbs  have  Pattahli  in  the  second  syllable  of 
the  Kal  future  and  imperative.  This  is  regularly  the 
case  with  those  which  have  Tsere  or  Hholem  in  the  pre- 
terite, thus  niD':,  bsTD^ 


kal  future  with  a. 


dmase. 

dfem. 

2masc. 

2  fern. 

1  com. 

Sing. 

'^^?': 

"liDH 

*iaDn 

•^I???! 

"7^?^ 

Plur. 

i  :  • 

T  :    -  :    • 

^'lasn 

,  ^?75?^ 

"l4?? 

IMPERATIVE. 

2masc. 

2  fern. 

2maso. 

S/<9m. 

Sing. 

nns 

'^nns. 

Plur. 

^inns 

n2nn3 

3.  In  the  inflection  of  the  future  the  letters  prefixed 
mostly  denote  the  person  and  those  affixed  the  gender  or 
number;  *^  of  the  3  masc.  ^tbp^  is  by  euphonic  change  foi 
*i  from  xin,  and  as  in  the  preterite  ^  is  appended  as  the 
sign  of  the  plural  ^^itpp;* ;  n  of  the  3  fern.  iJibpn  is  the  sign 
of  the  fem.  (see  above  the  fem.  ending  of  tlie  participle), 
and  nj  is  appended  in  the  plural  nrbibpn  from  Ti^h .  In 
the  second  person  m  is  from  S^J^^ ,  the  fem.  taking  ^. 
from  "^ni? ,  the  masc.  plur.  *•.  as  in  the  third  person,  and 


§37. 


NIPHAL,    PE^L,    AND    PUAL. 


37 


the  fern,  nj  from  njnfi? .     In  the  first  person  sing,  btbip^ 
«  is  fi'om  "^sai} ;  in  the  plur.  bi:!p5 ,  3  is  from  ^^i^ . 

4.  In  the  imperative  no  personal  prefix  is  needed,  as 
but  one  person  is  in  use ;  gender  and  number  are  distin- 
guished as  in  the  second  person  of  the  future. 


Vocabulary  7, 


rfS^na  n.  f.  pi.  virgins 
^i"!  V.  P.  to  s])eak 
vioi''  n.  m.  Joseph 
1?  adv.  so 
ybo  n.  m.  rock 


n?  n.  m.  f.  time 

Dipirbs  n.  m.  pi.  PMlistines 

li^s  n.  f.  Zio7i 

^'itD  n.  m.  crimson 

"^"SW  n.  m.  f.  gate. 


§  37.     NipTial^  Piel^  and  Pual  Futures^  etc, 

1.  Where  the  infinitive  has  n  prefixed  to  the  radicals 
this  is  rejected  in  the  future  after  the  jDersonal  prefix, 
thus  from  ^^j^n  is  formed  ^^!^^.  . 

2.  The  participles  of  the  Piel  and  subsequent  species 
are  formed  from  the  construct  infinitive  by  prefixing  13  ,  a 
fragment  of  the  indefinite  pronoun  ''^  or  rra . 


NIPHAL   FUTURE. 

8  maso. 

3  fern.              2  masc. 

2/m. 

1  com. 

Sma. 

^W! 

btj;^n         bpi^n 

^St^i^^n 

^Pi|J^ 

Plur. 

^^g? 

IMPERATIVE. 

J^2bt3gn 

^-^i>? 

2  ma%G 

2/m. 

^masc. 

2/m. 

Si  NO. 

ia^n 

*i3t5gn         Plur.     . 

PARTICIPLE. 

^w^ 

s^?bi:i?n 

ma&c. 

fern. 

rruiM. 

fern. 

Si  NO. 

bi:p53     nbt:p3 

or  nb-bj^s          Plitr. 

D^bt)]?: 

nibrp!:: 

S8 

ETY3I0L0GY. 

§87 

PIEL   FUTTJEE. 

Smase. 

3  fern.               2  masc. 

2  fern. 

1  (VWl 

Sing. 

^^P? 

bibpn         btapn 

^SiDpn 

b^piS 

Plue. 

^^P? 

imperative. 

njbcjpn 

^^?? 

2  7na80. 

2  fern. 

2  7na4iG, 

2 /em. 

Sing. 

^^'P 

'^biDp            Plue. 

PAETICEPLE. 

eap 

njb^p 

masG. 

/m. 

Wl<WO. 

fern. 

Sing. 

^feP? 

nbcap^          Plue. 

PUAL   FUTTJEE. 

D'^bapa 

nibipp^ 

8  mase. 

3  fern,             2  masc. 

2/0»». 

1  (5(?7?». 

Sing. 

^^1?: 

bDjjn         bcapn 

■ifejjn 

bibpx 

Plub. 

^i^ij. 

njbiopn        ^btppn 

njb^^n 

bb^a 

IMPEEATIVE  wanting. 

PAETICIPLE. 

maso.  fern.  maso.  fern. 

Sjng.       b]b;jia    ^^^^I?^  or  nbiajja      Plue.    D^^b^jjij    nibajj-a 


VOCABULAEY   8. 


nfafij  V.  K.  to  say 
rr^'na  n.  f.  covenant 
T\iT)'mt  lo!  behold! 
3it3  adj.  good 
sp?;i  n.  m.  Ja^oh 
yrm^  n.  Jericho 


nn?  V.   P.    ^6>  honor;  N.  ^o 

Z>^  honored 
^ia?  n.  m.  A(9?i(?r 
n^ins  n.  m.  pi.  priests 
TTO  V.  K.  to  cictj  make  a  co 

venant 


§38. 


39 


yatt  V.  K.  to  withhold^  heep  it2p  v.  H.  to  burn  incense 

bach  l?'i  adj.  had^  evil 

tri:?  n.  f.  company  J  assembly  nitj  v.  K.  ^^  forget 

^'is-b:^  in  the  presence  of  ^'hit  v.  N.  to  heep  one's  self 
a:?  n.  m.  people  tahe  heed. 

^3  conj.  lest,  that  not 


§38.     Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  jFutv/reSj  etc. 


HLPHTTi 

FUTURE. 

Smase. 

d  fern. 

2  masG. 

2  fern. 

1  <;om. 

SmG. 

^'^r^ 

b^'pipn 

b'^IDj^n 

ib-^pfpn 

'>'m 

Plur. 

*''^j?!! 

npbbjppi 

^,bit:]?p 

nabiJipn 

bitapj 

IMPERATIVE. 
2  wflwc.  2  /em.  2  wosc.  2  fern. 

Sing.        btjjpn         '^b'l-ojpn       Plur.       ^b-'rijjn  ^^jbbgn 

PARTICIPLE. 

wt<wc.  /(^m.  mase.  fern. 

Siivra.     b^p^    nb'iippi?  or  nb-jpia       Plur.  D'^biipp^  f^'i^^^P'a 


HOPHAL   FUTURE. 

8  masG, 

3  /<9»i.           2  m«sc. 

2/m. 

1  com 

Sl>fG. 

^"-:p: 

bi2pn      btapn 

■'^^pP' 

^^i?« 

Pj.ur. 

ib'ipp;" 

n5bt:pn      ^btppn 

nsbbpn 

^^i» 

IMPERATIVE  wanting. 


PARTICIPLE. 


maso. 


fern.  maso.  fern. 

Ring,    bbp^a      nb-jp-a  or  Jnb'bp'a       Plur.    D'lbtjp'a     fiibup'c 


40 


ETYMOLOaY. 


§39 


Sma 
Plub. 


8  ma^c. 


?ifepn:> 


inTHPAEL   FUTURE. 
3  fern.  2  masc. 


2  fern. 


1  com. 


njb^i^nn     ilsDpinn,      njbibpnn     b^pna 


IMPEKATIYE. 
2  masc.  2  fern.  2  masc.  2  fern. 

Sing.       bfepJ^n        ''S'lppirin        Plur.       ^^^S^in     njbibprin 


PARTICIPLE. 


masc. 


f&n.  masc.  fem. 

Sing,  b^pnia  nb^pra  or  f^b^pnti     Plur.  D'^^^gt^'a  mitepra 


Vocabulary  9. 

non  n.  m.  hindness^  viercy  ?fbi3  v.  H.  ^(9  <?«^^5^  to  reign 

y®^  n.  m.  salvation  n^jit  n.  f.  (^r^/ 

riis  adv.  ^7i^5  biij    v.   H.   to   he  wise,   act 
tJib  V.  H.  to  cause  to  put      wisely 

on,  to  clothe  HTOiD  n.  f.  gladness 

^h*q  V.  H.  to  cause  to  rain  X^tm  n.  m.  joy 

*it:i3  n.  m.  rain  n'^Ssi©  n.  f.  remnant 


§  39.     Peculiar  Forms, 

1.  When  the  last  radical  is  3  or  n^  it  is  united  by 
Daghesh-foi-te  with  personal  endings  beginning  with  the 
same  letter,  e.  g.  "•niTJJn  for  ""niniiDn,   nabcn  for  njabcn . 

2.  The  vowel-letter  n  may  be  added  to  the  2  masc. 
sing,  of  the  preterite,  and  dropped  from  the  fem.  plurals 
of  the  future  and  imperative,  e.  g.  S^r^^i?  ,  3"??!^^ . 


§   40.  PARAOOGIC    AND    APOCOPATED    FUTURE.  41 

3.  Final  1  is  sometimes  added  to  u  of  the  preterite,  and 
to  u  and  I  of  the  future,  e.  g.  I^^^-t  •>  TPI?^  • 

4.  The  Kal  construct  infinitive,  in  a  few  instances,  has 
Pattahh  in  place  of  Hholem,  ni©  ,  !:£© ;  and  occasionally 
i  t  takes  a  feminine  ending  nj^n'i  for  pi'7 . 

5.  The  Niphal  absolute  infinitive  may  be  either  bib]::?  or 
bibj^n ;  bcjp  may  be  used  for  the  absolute  as  well  as  the 
construct  infinitive  Piel. 

6.  A  few  verbs  have  Pattahh  or  Seghol  as  the  vowel 
of  the  second  radical  in  the  Piel  preterite,  TJJ'np,  ^%/\ 
instead  of  tt?tp,  "i^^;  Pattahh  also  occurs  in  the  Hith- 
pael  ^^pJnr^. 

7.  Pual  sometimes  has  Kamets-Hliatuph  and  Hophal 
Kibbuts  in  the  first  syllable   rr^a  ,   nstDn . 

8.  Tav  of  the  prefixed  nn  in  Hithpael  is  transposed 
with  the  first  radical  of  the  verb,  if  it  be  one  of  the 
sibilants  0 ,  to  or  to ;  with  s  the  n  is  transposed  and  in 
addition  changed  to  t: ;  with  ^ ,  t:  or  M ,  and  occasionally 
with  other  letters,  the  ri  is  assimilated  to  the  first  radical 
and   united  with   it  by   Daghesh-forte,    binon,    pijtasn, 


§  40.  PoA'agogic  and  Apocopated  Futv/re  and  Imperative. 

1.  The  vowel  n^  is  appended  to  the  first  person  of  the 
future,  and,  in  a  very  few  instances,  to  the  third  person 
lingular,  to  express  desire  or  determination,  s^pri^??  ^oe  will 
break  or  let  us  hreah.  This  is  called  the  paragogic  or 
cohortative  future. 

2.  The  apocopated  or  jussive  future  is  a  shortened 
form  of  the  second  or  third  persons  singular  and  expresses 
a  wnsh  or  command,  or,  with  a  negative,  dissuasion  or 
prohibition.       In  perff.ct  verbs  it  is  distinguished  from 


42  ETYMOLOGY.  §    41 

the  simple  future  only  in  the  Hiphil  species,  in  which  the 
'^.  of  the  ultimate  is  changed  to  (.  ),  ^3  ton  tliou  may  est 
understand  or  understand  thou, 

3.  Paragogic  n^  is  sometimes  appended  to  the  mascu 
line  singular  of  the  imperative,  softening  the  command 
into  an  entreaty  or  expression  of  desire,  n:b^to  oh.^  liear  ! 
or  pray,  hear  ! 

4.  The  addition  of  n^  to  a  future  or  imperative  com- 
monly causes  the  rejection  of  its  last  vowel,  except  in  the 
Hiphil  species  where  ''.  remains  or  is  restored  rri'QTJJx, 
Sib'^'^ni^.  The  Kal  imperative  with  6  becomes  nSi:^ 
hofld  /  the  Kal  imperative  with  a  becomes  nin3  MhhhlJid. 


§  41.     Vav  Conversive. 

Vav  Conversive  is  a  modification  of  the  copulative  1 
and,  and  is  so  called  because  it  has,  in  certain  cases, 
the  effect  of  converting  the  future  into  a  preterite  and 
the  preterite  into  a  future. 

Vav  Conversive  prefixed  to  the  future  takes  Pattahh 
followed  by  Daghesh-forte  in  the  next  letter,  "ii^"^  lie  loill 
shut,  "laot'T  and  he  shut  If  this  be  Yodh  with  Sh'va, 
Daghesh  is  usually  omitted,  ©'ng)'^ .  Before  K  of  the  first 
person,  which  cannot  receive  Daghesh,  Pattahh  is  length- 
ened to  Kamets,  ^k^l^^ .  The  verb  commonly  suffers  tho 
same  change  as  in  the  apocopated  future,  §  40.  2,  and  in 
the  first  person  sometimes  has  paragogic  n^. 

Vav  Conversive  prefixed  to  the  preterite  has  the  same 
pointing  with  Vav  Conjunctive,  §  28,  "TbtD  he  has  hept, 
n-a©)  and  he  will  heep. 

For  the  influence  of  Vav  Conversive  on  the  accent,  st  e 

§  ir.  6. 


§  42  teres  with  suffixes.  48 

Vocabulary  10. 

t'T^ii  n.  m.  Aaron  nir;«  v.  K.  to  divell,  inlidbli 

-N  adv.  not  ^pro  n.  f.  tunic 

"'-55  prep,  to^  unto^  T€S2'>ecting  H^bia  n.  f.  queen 

"2^5  D.  m.  ashes  '^^H^  i^-  ™-  Mordecai 

ai"jn  n.  m.  pi.  garments  ^4?  v.  P.  to  receive^  acGe]jt 

inin  n.  m.  liail  nSg  v.  K   (fut.  «)  come  near ^ 

nsn  adv.  hither  apjproach 

p:?T  V.  K.  (fut.  (2)  to  cry  y^jj  v.  K.  (fut.  «)  ^6?  r^7i(i 

nj^ljT  n.  f.  cry  t'tkry  n.  m.  head 

inn  n.  f.  sivord  "^tn  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  ^c?  'w;asZ5' 

S?.\;  V.  K.  to  he  wea/ry  pto  n.  ra.  sackcloth 

"V  n.  f.  hand  nS«  v.  K.  (fut.  ci)  to  send, 

©V  or  ton;  V.  K.  ^(?  d/riveout 

§  42.     F"^r55  '^^;^7^   Suffixes. 

1.  Tlie  personal  pronouns  are  frequently  suffixed  to 
the  verbs  of  which,  they  are  the  object.  The  forms  of 
the  suffixes  have  already  been  given,  §  29.  2. 

2.  The  personal  terminations  of  the  verbs  suffer  the 
following  changes  before  suffixes : — 

PRETERITE. 

SixG.  3  fern,     n^  becomes  n,, 

2  masc   n  sometimes  becomes  l?  before  ''3. 

2  fern,     n  becomes  '^n . 
Plur.  2  masc.   dpi  becomes  w.     The  2  fern.  ])lur,  does 
not  occur  with  suffixes. 

FUTURE. 

Plur.  2  and  3  fem,  nslpiipn  becomes  ^^tppPi . 

3.  The  suffixes  are  joined  directly  to  those  verbal 
forms  whicli  end  in  a  vowel ;  those  forms  which  end  in  a 


44 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§42 


consonant  insert  before,  Tj ,  DD  and  1?  a  vocal  SliVa,  and 
before  tlie  remaining  suffixes  a  full  vowel,  wliich  in  the 
preterite  is  mostly  a  and  in  tlie  future  and  imperative 
mostly  e, 

4.  Nun  is  sometimes  inserted  between  the  future  of  the 
verb  and  the  suffix,  particularly  in  emphatic  and  pausal 
furms.  This  is  called  ISTun  Epenthetic.  It  is  commonly 
united  by  Daghesh-forte  with  3  of  the  1  pers.  suffix  and 
^  of  the  2  pers.,  to  which  it  is  almost  always  assimilated. 

5.  The  3  pers.  suffix  is  liable  to  the  following  contrac- 
tions ;  in  the  masc.  ^n^  becomes  i ,  ^n*' .  becomes  1"^ . ,  ^nn 
becomes  ^n_,  ^ns^  becomes  ^3.. ;  in  the  fern,  n  ^  becomes 
•^,,  «7^.  becomes  nn.,  nD„  becomes  na . . 

6.  The  iirst  and  second  persons  of  the  verb  do  not 
receive  suffixes  of  the  same  person  with  themselves. 

The  3  masc.  sing,  of  the  Preterite  Kal  b-jp  assumes  the 
foUowin^c  forms  in  combination  with  suffixes : — 


Sing. 


Pluk. 


1  com. 

^?bbp 

k'talani 

he  hilled  m,e 

2  masc. 

^V^P 

k'tal'lvha' 

he  hilled  thee  (m.) 

^fem. 

^^"^P 

k'talakh' 

he  hilled  thee  (f.) 

3  masc. 

k'tala'hu 

I  he  hilled  him 

k'talo' 

J 

?>fem.. 

ri3i3p 

k'talah' 

he  hilled  h^r 

1  com. 

^3'3i:p 

k'tala'nu 

he  hilled  us 

2  masc. 

oiVjp 

k'tal'khem 

V    he  hilled  yon  (m.) 

^fem. 

l^^tap 

k'tarkhen 

he  hilled  y OH  (f.) 

3  masc. 

C3^'9P 

k'talam' 

he  hilled  them  (m. ) 

^fem. 

I^^P 

k'talan' 

he  hilled  them  (  f) 

7.  Verbs  having  e  in  the  Preterite  substitute  Tsere  for 
Kamets  with  the  second  radical  throughout  the  Kal  pre 
terite  with  suffixes,  e.  g.  "^^h?  fi'om  bij . 

The  remaining  parts  of  the  verb  are  sufficiently  repre- 
sented in  Table  VIL 


NOUNS,  GENDER  AND  NUMBER. 


45 


Vocabulary  11. 


ax  n.  m,  father 
"^5^2$  n.  m.  Lord 
c^?  n.  f.  mother 
ria  n.  f.  daughter 
':5ij  V.  P.  to  make  great 
'py^  V.  H.  to  overtaJce 
D^n  n.  m.  hlood 


I'bn  n.  m.  Haman 

nsT^  n.  m.  altar 

rrianbia  n.  f.  war  ^fighting 

*i^?  V.  P.  to  shut  wp ;  H,  t^ 

cause  to  shut 
15DD  Y.  P.  to  recount^  tell 
aijn  n.  m.  famine. 


Vocabulary  12. 


nDi^^5  adv.  how 
T^i^iJi  n.  m.  Tnan 
r;(|«  n.  f.  woman 
ni'13  n.  f.  blessing 
pi|i2'n  n.  Damascus 
X)%  n.  m.  f.  way 
*t?T\  V.  K.  to  go,  walh 
"^DT  V.  K.  to  remember 
7^0  T.  P.  to  deliver 
P]?t3  V.  P.  to  soil,  defile 
bfc^  T.  H.  to  cause  to  rule 
«;  pray,  I  pray  thee 


^55  prep,  before,  in  the  pre' 

sence  of 
b^2?  n.  m.  sucMing,  babe 
ito^  V.  P.  to  crown 
-dm  V.  K.  to  take  off  clothes 
STi:?  n.  f.  trouble 
"O^hT^  n.  f.  ^Vi.feet 
D'ln'i  adj.  merciful 
rriabto  n.  £  garment 
DDi5  Y.  H.  to  rise  early 
5?'bi?  Y.  K.  to  hear 
iasri  Y.  K.  ^c?  lay  hold  of  seize. 


NOUNS. 
§  43.     Gender  and  Number. 

1.  Nouns  in  Hebrew  are  of  tvYO  genders,  masculine 
and  feminine.  Tlie  masculine  has  no  characteristic  ter- 
mination ;  the  feminine  ends  in  H^  or  ti . 

2.  There  are  three  numbers,  the  singular,  dual,  and 
plural.     The  dual  is  restricted  for  the  m^st  part  to  the 


46 


ETYMOLOGY. 


44 


It  ends  in  d"^ .  iE 


names  of  objects  occurring  in  pairs 
nouns  of  both  genders. 

3.  The  plural  of  masculine  nouns  ends  in  W^ 
rarely  V.  ?  and  that  of  feminine  nouns  in  ni . 

4.  It  is  to  be  observed,  however,  that  a  number  of 
feminine   nouns  lack   the   characteristic   endino*   in  the 

o 

singular.     Also 

the  plural,  some  feminines  take  D''.  , 

gender  take  indifferently  W^ .  or  mi . 


or  mor(i 


,   that  some  masculine  nouns  take  mi  in 

and  some  of  each 


§  44.     Feminine^  Dual^  and  Plural. 

The  following  changes  result  fi*om  appending  the  tei 
minations  for  gender  and  number. 

I.  The  feminine  ending  m  . 

1.  If  the  ultimate  is  simple  there  is  no  change. 

masc.  fern.  mase.  fern. 

''ii'^     an  Egyptian^     m'^'n^i?  ^i»        second^   tr^^V. 

•»D^;»     right,  n^iti'?  '^©■'btj    tlm^d,      n^-'buj 

■»'b''?s    interior^  tr^m'Q  xiia     finding^  t^^'ism , 

2.  If  the  ultimate  is  mixed,  an  unaccented  Seghol  is 
inserted  before  the  termination  to  prevent  the  concur- 
rence of  vowelless  consonants,  §  10.  3,  and  to  this  a  pre- 
ceding a^  e  ov  I  is  commonly  assimilated. 


nuisc. 

fern. 

Tnasc. 

fm.. 

"^sirs 

hrohen, 

'^'^i'^} 

aito* 

lying 

mniiii 

triple, 

vv   \    : 

itl^ 

speaking 

fTiin^ 

r%v:q 

gathered, 

^??i?'? 

^'''ni^ 

large 

fi'^-!^ 

D^'a'ix 

reddish, 

n^'^ia'iij 

t)^^TO 

imperious 

t^^M 

?l3Dto' 

shedding, 

^?s^' 

•  J  - 

prudent 

tb^m 

3.  If  the  last  letter  be  a  guttural,  Pattahh  is  sub 
stituted  for  Seghol,  §  10.  8. 


§  44. 


FEMII^INE,    DUAL,  AND    PLURAL. 


47 


rPii^  friend,    fern.  n?T'^ 
2?ii»    hearing,  fern,  n^'ain' 


^72 ©5    heard, 
T^i"Q    toucJiing, 


fern,  n^tttja 
fern.  r)5>li'a 


tlie  plural  U"^ ,  or  ni,  and  the 


II.  The  feminine  n^ 
dual  D\. 

1.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  rejected  from  the  penult, 
except  from  nouns  in  n  ^ . 

fern,  r&n^ 
fern,  ninh^ 
fern,  nn^ns 
fern.  !inii»i3 
pi.  D'^hi?: 
pi.  ni"'i?7 
pi.  niiiiDt 

du.  D'^&53 


pi.  D^^i-ia 
pi.  D'^nh^ 
pi.  D-in^ns 

pi.  D'^i^TStJ 


f,  pi.  ni5i-i|i 
f.  pi.  ninhii 
f.  p].  nii^ns 
f.  pi.  nin-'tis 


nins    written, 
y^Wi  restoring, 
pii^    master, 
"in'^    word, 
•jinsT  memorial, 

2.  In  an  accented  mixed  ultimate 

(1)  Tsere  is  rejected  except  from  monosyllables,  or 
when  the  preceding  vowel  is  a  pretonic  Kamets.  Other 
vowels  suffer  no  chano-e. 


f  ■^S'a  interpreter,  pi.  D'^3£ibia 
nnb  Iwart,  pi.  ninnb 

^??  grape,  pi.  D'»n:? 

:?52  r^'5,  pi.  D-iibbx 


^!?n 

going. 

fem.  nibh 

pi.  D'^pbh           f.  pi.  niDbh 

i\t>'t 

shedding, 

fern.  SiisiJ? 

pi.  D'^DSiJJ          f.  pi.  niDBiD 

tSSTD' 

judge. 

pi.  D'l'pBto 

narp    (^/^^(^n   pi.  tm^ra 

inb 

priest, 

pi.  n''5n3 

b^^      r(?4      pi.  nibp^ 

but 

nx? 

dead, 

fem.  nra 

pi.  D^nia            f.  pi.  nirra 

D^TJ 

complete, 

fem.  nfcb» 

pi.  D^iibTD           f.  pi.  niibtp 

^4? 

dry. 

fem.  n©?? 

pi.  n^tjn;'           f.  pi.  niten;' 

r? 

t/re€j   . 

pi.  D'^S?     . 

DTI?      71^77^,    pi.  iniiw 

^^^ 

thigh, 

du.  tr^byi 

nns    7i,^a.<yy,    pi.  D-ini? 

(2)  If  two   consonants  have   coalesced  in  the  final 
letter,  this  is  doubled,  and  the  preceding  vowel,  if  long 


48 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§44. 


is  shortened.     A  like  doubling  occurs  in  a  few  instances 
wliore  tliere  lias  been  no  contraction  in  tte  form. 


a'n  (from  nin)  inucli,  fern,  nin  pi.  D'^ii'i  f.  pi.  nis'i 
Dn  (from  tihTJ)  perfect^  fern,  nian  pi.  n'^iar)  f.  pi.  niisn 
li^;;  5maZ/,    fern,  narij?       pi.  d^^spip    f.  pi.  nibj? 

pbij  *^j9,      f em.  rr^-at.      pi.  Q'^l^'a?;    f.  pi.  t^'ip^ 

•ja  (from  l.i?)  garden^  pi.  D-^ii^      isix  '^^;^^,?^,  pi.  D^siaJ 

t?  (from  TT?)  ^^aiJ,  pl.Q'^-TS?  b^nn  hramble,  pi.  D'^^'^n 
ph  (from  ppti)  6'2^<3^?'?^?56',  pi.  D^pn  lb  (from  nib)  A^«7'2^,  pi.  niib 
51X  (for  !^5i5)  nose,     du.  D^Bi?     1©  (from  I?©)  /(^o/7^,pl.  d^std 


3.  Nouns  having  an  unaccented  vowel  in  tlie  ulti- 
mate, commonly  called  Segholates,  §  10.  3,  drop  this 
vowel  before  the  feminine  ending  n  ^ ;  in  the  plural 
pretonic  Kamets  is  inserted,  §  10.  2,  and  the  vowel  of 
the  first  radical  falls  away ;  the  dual  sometimes  drops 
the  unaccented  Seghol  and  sometimes  inserts  pretonic 
Kamets. 


Mng, 
covert, 
calf, 
saying, 


fem. 
fem. 
fem. 
fem. 


strength,  fem. 

lord,        fem. 

foot,         du. 


queen, 


nsb-a 

T  :    - 

rrnno 

rr^y^  or  TT\'m 

nb:^5    lady, 
d:^??1       11'^     ear 


D^pbia 

pi.  D-^bi^n 
du.   D'^DTi^ 


pi. 
pi. 
pi. 

pi. 
pi. 


hiiigs 


lords. 


hnee,         du.      rriy^      1'^p  /<t(?r?i,  du,  D'^nporD^'D^)? 


a.  Medial  Vav  frequently  quiesces  in  Hholem  and  Yodh  in  Tsere  before  lh« 
dual  and  plural  endings. 


n]«  death,       pi.  d-iriTS 
1!!8J  iniquity,     pi.  ciix 


rr^f  <?fo®<5  <re<5,  pi.   D'^h'^t 
•J")^  <^«,  du.  0*^3  ■'3 


45. 


49 


4.  In  a  simple  ultimate 
(1)  n^  is  rejected. 

r\i'}      fair,  fern,  ns;  pi.  D^'p:' 

nfeis?      doin{/j         fern,  rw'^  pi.  n^fti? 
ntbs^'a   wo7'\             pi.  D''Ti??'a  sniip    r^66?, 

njkn'a    wppearance,   pi.  D'^^'^t?  n'lto  ^^?6?, 


(2)  ''.  becomes  nj   ,  u^^_  or  D*^ 


inl»» 


f.  pi.  nis:* 

f.  pi.  nito 
pi  oil? 
pi.  ni'ito 
pi.  n^'th 


'^nt:    /r^sA,      fern.  nHt)  pi.  D^^Ht)  f.  pi.  iniHi: 

i:j     afflicted,  fern.  n;D?  pi.  d^^:5?  f.  pi.  ni*::? 

^ins'  Hebrew,  fem.  m'nna?  pi.  D'^Hn:?  or  D'^nn:^  f.  pi.  ni^^n:? 
"1^      island,       pi.  D^^i?  'inioba  Philistine,  pi.  D^rn^bsp 


§  45.     In  Feminine  Nouns. 

1.  Feminine  nouns  in  n^  of  the  form  derived  from 
Segholates,  §  44.  3,  insert  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  plural, 
and  drop  their  original  vowel ;  all  others  simply  substi- 
tute the  plural  for  the  singular  ending. 


nsb'a  queen, 

T\"^t\Xi  covert, 

Tky)  reproach, 

nniax  saying, 

ninn  desert, 

nb?3  lady. 


pi.  niDbti 
pi.  ninno 
pi.  nisnn 
pi.  ninisN! 
pi.  riinnn 
pi.  inii?a 


n^^tD^   salvation,  pi.  mii^©^ 

blessing,  pi.  fiii'^3 

vengeance,  pi.  fii^j?3 

counsel,  pi.  tiii:? 

garden,  pi.  mih 

s7i'/^,        •  pi.  ni'^'ai? 


2.  Feminine  nouns  in  ti..  (or  in_)  substitute  the  plural 
for  the  singular  ending,  and  reject  the  preceding  vowel,  if 
it  be  Hholem  or  derived  from  Tsere ;  otherwise  they  restore 
it  to  what  it  would  have  been,  if  t\  had  not  been  appended, 
§  44. 1.  2.    Nouns  in  ri'',  take  ni**.  and  nouns  in  t\^  take  fii''.. . 


50 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§46. 


M'niQisi?  (from     'i^®'*?)    observance^   pi.   ni'^^iD^ 


nb5j«73  (from  i^i^ia)  Icnife^ 

t\^S^^^,  (from  Dt^ali?)  reddish^ 

^ip'r'?  (from  p''?'^^)  nwse, 

ri:?ip  (from  5?it:)  ^'^^^i^, 

mib  (from  ^Sb)  touching^ 

ngji*^  (from  pii'^)  sucker^ 

pi         sing. 

nib5b5    n-ii^iia  MoaUtess, 


sing. 


pi.  niSD55)a 

pi.  niB^^'i^ 

.pL  r^ip5'''a 

pi.  rii:^s^ 

:  I 

nipsi'i 

pi. 


pi. 
pi. 


n;p3     fT''?2ft3   Egyptian  woman^  ni^'-i2f^ 


nb^o  <?(27'  o/'  c^^r/z.,  D'^bzi©  n^ib"a    Mngdom, 


ni'^Dbtt 


3.  Before  tlie  dual  ending  n,  becomes  n^ ;  and  nouns 
in  m^  follow  tlie  rule  of  other  Segholates,  §  44.  II.  3. 


thigh,     du.  n^M^yi 
lip,         du.  Dfnsi» 
nitj    ^^ar,      du.  ot'tij© 


nSTD 


^^il    folding-door^  du.  D;'hb'n 
nbi?j  sZoi^A,  du.  D:'r)b25 

n^irrtp  5ra55,  du.  D^'nicnj 


VOCABULAEY     13. 


15X  n.  m.  f.  a  stone 
Di":^   n.  m.  JEdom 
"li^a   II.  f.  a  well 
"jirnii   n.  Giheon 
binj    adj.  ^r^(3^^,  Z(awy^ 
"^is   n.  m.  nation 
TCnn   adj.  7i<??z; 
n5b   V.  K.  to  capture 


ty^'a   V.  K.  to  reign 

''^   n.  (with  art.)  Ai 

W   n.  f.  city 

'2r\   adj.  (f^i":))  mz^cA,  many 

T^T\  n.  f.  6t;^7 

^t  V.  H.  if{?  <?as^ 

n;i$n  n.  f.  ip^^.^^)  fig-t^ee,fig 


§  46.     Consi/ruct  State. 

1.  "When  one  noun  stands  in  a  relation  of  dependence 
on  another,  the  fii'st  is  put  in  the  construct  state.     A 


§  47.  FOEMATION    OF   THE    CONSTEUCT.  51 

noun  wMcli  is  not  so  related  to  a  following  one.  is  said 
to  be  in  tlie  absolute  state.  Thus  'li'^  word  is  in  tlie  ab- 
solute state  ;  but  in  tlie  expression  ^fbisn  nn'n  the  word  of 
tlie  Mng,  "in'n  is  in  tlie  construct  state. 

2.  The  construct  is  a  shortened  form,  the  speaker 
naturally  hastening  forward  from  the  first  noun  to  the 
second,  which  is  necessary  to  complete  the  idea. 


§  47.     Its  FormaUon. 

The  following  changes  occur  in  the  formation  of  the 
construct : 

1.  The  feminine  n^  becomes  D.;  the  dual  n\  and  the 
plural  D^i .  become  "^ .  . 

•^25  garden,  const.  tT35   -  D^'j^n    statutes,  const,  ^^j^n 

nsb-a  queen,  const,  n?^^  D'^'b&iri  judges,  const.  ''tJ&iu 

^???  c^Z/;  const,  nia?  D:»j3in  /^^^J,  const.  "^Jan 

nS?;5  fo^y,  const.  n555  d:>5T!$    <?(2r5,  const.  *»5J? 

2.  In  a  mixed  ultimate  Kamets  is  shortened  to  Pattahh : 
so  is  Tsere  when  preceded  by  pretonic  Kamets. 


absd. 

const. 

dbsd. 

const. 

^^ 

fish, 

»!? 

in 

old,         l^T 

niis 

star. 

s5i3 

^in 

court,     "lin 

m^*a 

sanctua/ry, 

©■^ptt 

^3? 

Am-z;?/,    '^i?  or  nns 

3.  Medial   'i  commonly  quiesces  in  Hholem  and  "^  in 
Tsere  ;  final  '^ .  becomes  "^ . . 

t^yq     death,         const,  f^itt  n;>5    valley,        const.  K'^l 

tf^n     midst,         const.  ?rin  nia     house,         const,  tn'^a 

nil  top  ci^p^,          const,  mitejp  t^'y:^'^,  fountains,  const.  niJ^ 

but  "ji?  iniquity,  const,  "jl?  "^n      ?^/^^,             const.  T! 


52 


ETYMOLOGY. 


§  48 


,  becomes  n.. ;  otlier  vowels 

fc^iitt  going  forth,  const.  ^%yi^ 
i<i?  host,  const.  ^ySL 

xS^  fearing,         const.  J!<n^ 
"^"is  y7"^^^^,  const,  '^'ns 

5.  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  rejected  from  the  syllable 
preceding  the  accent ;  and  if  this  occasions  a  concurrence 
of  vowelless  consonants,  a  short  vowel  is  inserted  between 
them,  §  10.  1. 


4.  In  a  simple  ultimate  !^ 
remain  unchanged. 

fito       sheep,       const,  fii? 
n^h     shepherd,  const,  nin 
ni;:)?   cattle,       const.  ^51?^ 
ii'b^ia  worh,        const,  rtfc^tt 


aJsoZ. 

const. 

ahsol 

const. 

'ji'isi     master. 

V^'^: 

nSna 

blessing. 

ni'ia 

'ji'i^T    memorial. 

r'"^?T 

'^^l?? 

vengeance. 

ni?]?? 

li^     '2^;(9rJ, 

"^5? 

•       -    T       1 

lips, 

''riS)^ 

15^      c?Z^?^(^, 

1??' 

D-'ib'Q 

Icings, 

''^^^ 

ni^    7*^^(^, 

nsjp 

nisnn 

reproaches. 

niann 

7*^1515    interpreter. 

T/^ 

niini 

threshing  floors,  mihj 

aib     Am^-iJ, 

=^i^ 

ni-ania 

beasts. 

niina 

See  Table  XVII.     Declension  of  Nouns. 

Vocabulary  14. 
rttti*  n.  Amanah  'isij  n.  m.  (ni)  ^s^ 

ir?  int.  Zo.^  behold!  ito  n.  m.  ^5(Z«z 

^ntt  V.  K.  to  be  clean,  pv/re  ^ib'ib  n.  Pha/rpar 
5lb?  n.  f.  wing  bip  n.  m.  (f>i)  '^;c>^<?^,  sound 

n-ins  n.  m.  (^A^^t'^^S  ft)]? ,    19^   adj.    (nattjy)   ZMe, 

^tt  V.  K.  to  sell  small 

^nj  n.  m.  {^  ,  and  ni)  7*2^^^ 


§  48.     Paragogio  Vowels, 

1.  The  unaccented  vowel  n  ^  added  to  nouns  indicates 
motion  or  direction  towards  a  place,  whence  it  is  called 


§49. 


NOUNS   WITH   SUFFIXES. 


53 


He  directive  or  He  local,  D*'^©  heaven^  nia^'aTD  heaven 
ward, 

2.  Paragogic  "^ .  ,  i ,  or  n  ^  are  in  poetic  or  archaeic 
forms  sometimes  appended  to  nouns  without  affecting  the 
sense,  e.  g.  ^'^  ,  Gen.  xlix.  11  for  15 ,  wn  Gen.  i.  24  for 


tm^  r\t\v^iTi  Ps.  iii.  3  for  rmt^^ 


§  49.     Nouns  with  Suffixes^  see  Table  XVIII. 

1.  The  pronominal  suffixes  are  appended  to  nouns  in 
the  sense  of  possessive  pronouns. 

2.  The  forms  which  they  assume  when  attached  to 
singular  nouns  or  combined  with  "^  .  of  nouns  in  the  dual 
and  plural  are  shown  in  Table  V. 

I.  Before  the  grave  suffixes  (viz. :  dd  ,  p  ,  Dn   ,  ^n), 
ISTouns  of  both  genders  and  of  all  numbers  take  the 
form  of  the  construct. 


suffix. 

nn^ 

word, 

const. 

- « 

yov/r  word 

D^in'7 

words, 

const. 

^"^V, 

t3i'^'D:?'=T 

yov/r  words 

D^nsto 

lips, 

const. 

'^b^to 

Q?''J:i£)i? 

your  lips 

T    : 

lips, 

const. 

niriBto 

DD^nnsir 

)  your  lips 

n5na 

blessing. 

const. 

ns'^a 

your  blessing 

niina 

blessings. 

const. 

niins 

dD-iob^^ 

you/r  blessings. 

II.  Before  the  light  suffixes, 

1.  Singular  or  plural  nouns  with  a  feminine  ending 
adopt  the  construct  form,  only  n.  is  changed  to   n^. 

nsbia  queen,       const,  nlb-a  suf.  ""hiTQ  my  queen 

niibti  queens,      const,  n^ibtt  suf.  ''nbb^  my  queens 

nina  blessing,    const.  n?n:a  suf.  ''ri?'?^  'r)iij  blessing 

niina  blessings,  const,  nii'^5  suf.  ''inb'ia  my  blessings. 

2.  Singular   or  plural  nouns   not  having   a   feminine 


54  ETYMOLOGY.  §  49 

ending  adopt  tlie  same  form  as  before  the  absolute  plural 
termination. 


plur. 

8Uf. 

nnb 

heart, 

D'^n?^ 

•  T  : 

my  heart. 

-  T  : 

my  hea/rts 

T    T 

word, 

•    T    ; 

my  word, 

^"^n 

my  words 

t:tUJ 

judge. 

BitjEte' 

hlb&P 

myjudge, 

h-bstp 

my  judges 

5^^ 

Mng, 

n^ibu 

^^^^ 

my  Icings. 

*  The  resemblance  to  the  plural  form  does  not  imply  that  the  word  is  plnral, 
but  simply  that  appending  the  suffix  produces  the  same  effect  upon  the  voweli 
and  syllables  of  the  word  as  the  addition  of  the  plural  ending. 

3.  Dual  nouns  retain  the  form  wMcli  they  have  before 
the  absolute  dual  termination. 

mf.  mf. 

^iVi     hands,  *^j^    my  hands,    ^i\]^    ears,  ^i]^    my  ea/rs 
U^%^  feet,       ''b^l  my  feet,        D?3nST2  Ivps,   ''CiSi?  my  lips, 

III.  Before  all  suffixes,  grave  or  light, 

1.  Segholate  nouns  in  the  singular  drop  their  unac- 
cented vowel,  as  before  the  feminine  ending  n^. 

8Uf, 

•yb^      Mng  ""^b^      my  Mng,      Q??^^       your  Mng 

nno     covert  ^''^inp      my  covert,   ^'^.'^^9      your  covert 

Bsii?      strength       *''as?    my  strength,  DDia^ij     your  strength 
b:?2       work  ''bys       my  loorlc,     D?b:jB       your  worh 

trffi/tii  ohservance  ^i^yzw^  my  ohserv.,  ODPi'n^c^  your  ohserv. 
ri.;n3    tAinio  ''rnjns    my  tunic,     dinjns    your  tunic. 

2.  Final  letters  which  are  doubled  in  the  plural,  or  iu 
which  two  consonants  have  coalesced,  are  doubled. 

plur.       8uf. 

15      garden  U^h     '•35      my  garden,       0335     you/r  ga/rden 
sb     heoA't     fiiib     '^ib     my  heart,  DD^b     your  heart 

fsix  loheel    D'^i&ii^  'li&i^  my  wheel,         D?2Six  your  wheel 
pn    stat/ute  D^ij^n    *»]^n    my  statute,h\\iuy^T\    your  statute 

[§  13.  a 


§  50.  IRREGULAR   NOUNS-  55 

3.  Final  ?i^  is  dropped. 

ni?'"i    shepherd    suf.  ''^'"i   my  shepherd,    T^)?n    thy  shepherd 
nbjP'Q  cattle  suf.  ''bjp'a  m^/  (?ai(z5?(?,         Ti^ip'a  i^A^  6?<3^ifi5?^ 

HDia   7*^6?  suf.  ^^'^  my  rod,  ^rj'?^  thy  rod 

Vocabulary  15. 

^iij    V.  P.  to  destroy  ^??  v.  K.  tofall^fail 

nnx    adj.  one  fijsi  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  S(9z^Z,  ?^f^ 

^n«    prep,  after  T^inj  v.  P.  j^(9  demolish 

^^      n.  m.  f.  fire  ^4?  v.  K.  ^(9  serve 

n^^i?;  n.  f.  (d'^.  aIldni)^^7?a7'   ^I'ni?  v.  K.  ^(9  S-wrTz. 

^:^T     n.  m.  '2^;6>7'(^  ^litj  v.  P.  to  hreak  in  pieces 

y'lT     n.  m.  seed  DO  adv.  there 

nnb     n.  m.  (Mi)  heart  DW  n.  m.  (tii)  7^am^ 

ni!2^  n.  f.  statue 

§  50.     Irregula/r  Nouns, 

1.  The  following  nouns  of  frequent  occurrence  are 
irregular  in  the  plural : — 


"^^^  man 

plur. 

0*^03 N  rarely  x^w\ 

nfeic  woman,  const,  twi^ 

plur. 

D^to 

nisij  maidservcmt 

plur. 

T     -I 

t\^%  house 

plur. 

D'lri^ 

15  son 

plur. 

oi? 

nia  daughter,  suf.  '^Pia 

plur. 

niba 

Di**  ^^2^ 

plur. 

D^j  rarely  nitt;« 

'1''^  c^'^^ 

plur. 

D-^n?  once  Di'i;^ 

tDi^n  head 

plm*. 

D'ltjxn 

2.  The  nouns  ii$  father,  riij  brother,  and  ns  moutfi 
take  the  vowel  "».  in  the  construct  and  before  suffixes^ 
e.  g.  const,  ^h^^  ,  suf.  '^nsj ,  'r^'^nsj . 


56  ETYMOLOGY.  §  51, 

§  51.     Imperfect   Verbs, 

Imperfect  verbs  depart  more  or  less  from  the  standard 
inflection,  as  tlie  nature  of  their  radicals  may  requira 
They  are  of  three  classes,  viz. : — 

I.  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  guttural 
letter  in  the  root. 

II.  Contracted  verbs,  two  of  whose  radicals  are  in 
certain  cases  contracted  into  one. 

III.  Quiescent  verbs,  or  those  which  have  a  quiescent 
or  vowel-letter  in  the  root. 

There  are  thi*ee  kinds  of  guttural  verbs : — 

1.  Pe  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  a 
guttural. 

2.  Ay  in  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  radical 
is  a  guttural. 

3.  Lamedh  Guttural  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radi- 
cal is  a  guttural. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  contracted  verbs : — 

1.  Pe  Nun  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Nun. 

2.  Ayin  Doubled  verbs,  or  those  whose  second  and 
third  radicals  are  alike. 

There  are  four  kinds  of  quiescent  verbs  : — 

1.  Pe  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose  first  radical  is  Yodh. 

2.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  verbs,  or  those  whose 
second  radical  is  Vav  or  Yodh. 

3.  Lamedh  Aleph  verbs,  or  those  whose  third  radical 
is  Aleph. 

4.  Lamedh  He  verbs,  or  those  in  which  He  takes  the 
place  of  the  third  radical. 

These  names,  like  those  of  the  verbal  species,  §  31,  are 
derived  from  the  verb  ^l?s  to  do ;  a  Pe  Guttural  verb  u 


§§  52,  53.  PE    GUTTUliAL    VEKBS,  57 

one  wliicli  lias  a  guttural  in  that  place  which  Pe  occupies 
in  ^is ,  that  is,  as  its  first  radical ;  and  so  with  the  rest. 


§  52.     Ghittural   Verls, 

Gutturals  have  the  following  peculiarities : — 

1.  They  prefer  the  vowel  Pattahh. 

2.  They  receive  Pattahh-furtive. 

3.  They  take  compound  in  preference  to  simple  Sh'va. 

4.  They  do  not  admit  Daghesh-forte. 

Kesh  shares  the  last  peculiarity,  but  partakes  of  the 
others  only  in  a  very  limited  degree. 


§  53.     P^  Guttural  Verbs,  see  Table  VIII. 

1.  Hhirik  of  the  letters  prefixed  to  the  root  is  changed 
to  Pattahh  or  Seghol;  to  the  latter  chiefly  in  those 
parts  or  tenses  in  which  the  second  radical  has  prevail- 
ingly a, 

2.  For  simple  ShVa  the  guttural  takes  compound,  either 
Plhateph-Pattahh,  or  a  Hhateph  conformed  to  the  pre- 
ceding short  vowel.  Before  a  vowelless  letter  this  com- 
pound ShVa  becomes  a  short  vowel  in  an  intermediate 
syllable. 

3.  Upon  the  omission  of  Daghesh-forte  in  the  infinitive, 
future,  and  imperative  Niphal,  the  preceding  Hhirik  is 
lengthened  to  Tsere. 

4.  A  few  verbs,  whose  first  radical  is  i^,  receive 
Hholem  in  the  first  syllable  of  the  Kal  future,  the  second 
vowel  being  Pattahh  or  Tsere.  This  is  called  the  Pe 
Aleph  (^s)  mode  of  inflection. 

3* 


58  ETYMOLOGr.  §  54 


VOOABULAEY    16. 

nnx  or  nnij  v.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  ^sn  v.  K.  to  twrn,  N.  to  ht 

love  twrned 

©■•y:  *  n.  m.  ^  man^  each  "pvn  v.  K.    (fut.  a)    to   be 
bis  V.  K.  (ss)  to  eat^  H.  to        strong 

cause  to  eat  IP     n.  m.  manna 

b«     n.  m.  God  in^  n.  m.  servant 

'\^^  Y,l^,  to  he  verified^ found  ST?    y.'K.  to  leave^forsahe 

true  Tb?  v.  K.  to  stand 

nias  V.  ]Sr.  (i<'b)  to  he  said  m%  n.  f.  (d\  and  ni)  hone 

13     n.  m.  (d*'?^)  so^i/  !^^b]?  n.  f.  a  cu/rse. 


*  n5'^S<;  is  the  common  word  for  an  individual  man ;  liili^  is  poetic;  onx  is  a 
generic  term,  denoting  man  generally,  and  is  also  the  name  of  the  first  of  the 
human  race. 


§  54.     Ayin  Guttural  Verhs,  see  Table  IX. 

1.  The  vowel  following  tlie  guttural  is  convei^ted  into 
Pattalili  in  tlie  future  and  imperative  Kal  and  in  the 
feminine  plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  in  the  other 
species. 

2.  When  the  second  radical  should  receive  simple 
ShVa,  it  takes  Hhateph-Pattahh  instead ;  and  to  this  the 
new  vowel  formed  from  ShVa  in  the  feminine  singular 
and  masculine  plural  of  the  imperative  is  assimilated. 

3.  Daghesh-forte  is  always  omitted  from  the  second 
radical  in  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  in  which  case  the 
preceding  vowel  may  remain  short  in  an  intermediate 
syllable,  or  Hhirik  may  be  lengthened  to  Tsere,  Pattahh 
to  Kamets,  and  Kibbuts  to  Hholem. 


§  55.  lamedh  guttural  verbs.  59 

Vocabulary  17. 

Sf'ia    V.  K.  P.  to  hless^  N.  Pu.  b^^i?  n.  m.  benefit 

to  he  Uessed  "^^^   v.  P.  to  d/rive  out 

b»5    V.  K.  to  redeem^  P.  to  "iJn"^  v.  P.  to  purify  ^cleanse 
defile  N.  to  be  purified 

§  55.     Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  see  Table  X. 

1.  The  vowel  preceding  the  third  radical  becomes  Pat- 
tahh  in  the  future  and  imperative  Kal  and  in  the  femi- 
nine plurals  of  the  future  and  imperative  in  the  other 
species. 

2.  Tsere  preceding  the  third  radical  may  either  be 
changed  to  Pattahh  or  retained;  in  the  latter  case,  the 
guttural  takes  Pattahh-furtive. 

3.  Hhirik,  Hholem  (of  the  infinitive),  and  Shurek 
suffer  no  change  before  the  final  guttural,  which  receives 
a  Pattahh-furtive. 

4.  The  guttural  retains  the  simple  ShVa  of  the  perfect 
verb  before  personal  terminations  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, though  compound  ShVa  is  used  before  sufiixes. 

5.  When,  however,  a  personal  affix  consists  of  a  single 
vowelless  letter,  as  in  the  second  feminine  singular  of  the 
preterite,  the  guttural  receives  a  Pattahh-furtive. 

Vocabulary  18. 

•ji'lij  n.  m.  lord,  master  J^'iT  v.  K.  to  sow 

tij  adv.  then  ©"in  adj.  deaf 

)1'^  n.  f.  ea^  :?b;  v.  P.  H.  to  weary,  cattS4 

rr^t  n.  m.  olive-tree,  olive  to  toil 


60  ETYMOLOGY.  §  56 

nibTS'a  n.  f.  hingdoni  npB  v.  N.  to  he  opened^  used 
5?  3  "a  V.  N.  to  he  witliheld-  specially  of  the  eyes 

^•1^  adj.  hlind  nt]B  v.  N.  to  he  opened 

X!k  11.  f.  eye  n^©  v.  K.  to  send 

r?  11.  m.  tree  fiisife  adv.  thither. 


§  56.     Fe  Nun  (fs)    Verhs,  see  Table  XL 

Nun,  as  the  first  radical  of  verbs,  has  two  peculiarities, 
viz. : — 

1.  At  the  end  of  syllables  it  is  commonly  assimilated 
to  the  following  consonant,  the  two  letters  being  written 
as  one,  and  the  doubling  indicated  by  Daghesh-forte.  In 
the  Hophal  Kamets-Hhatuph  becomes  Kibbuts  before  the 
doubled  letter. 

2.  In  the  Kal  imperative  with  Pattahh  it  is  frequently 
di'opped,  its  sound  being  easily  lost  at  the  beginning  of  a 
syllable  when  it  is  without  a  vowel.  A  like  rejection 
occurs  in  the  Kal  infinitive  construct  of  a  few  verbs,  the 
abbreviation  being  in  this  case  compensated  by  adding 
the  feminine  termination  n . 

inj  assimilates  its  last  as  well  as  its  first  radical. 
nJ5b  has  the  peculiarities  of  Pe  Nun  verbs. 

Vocabulary  19. 

nin«  n.  f.  sister  t^)%  n.  m.  death 

ty^  n.  m.  honey  "^i.}  v.  H.  to  tell^  Ho.  to  he  told 

d'^'^n  n.  m.  pi.  life  T»i?  v.  K.  N.  to  approach 

^^n  n.  m.  ('isn)  half  nniijp  n.  f.  incense 

nfcb,  xrt^  for  what?  why?  d'''br;'i  n.  m.  pi.  mercies^  com 

"iD^tt  n.  m.  inst/ruction  passions. 


§57.  A  YIN    DOUBLED    VERBS.  61 


§  57.     Atjin  Doubled  {^':')    Verbs,  see  Thhle  XIL 

1.  In  the  Kal,  Niplial,  Hipliil,  and  Hoplial  tlie  repeti- 
tion of  tlie  same  sound  is  avoided  by  uniting  the  two 
similar  radicals  and  giving  the  intervening  voAvel  to  the 
previous  lette]*,  thus :  3D  for  nio ,  nb  for  nno . 

2.  In  the  Kal  this  contraction  is  optional  in  the  pret- 
erite ;  it  is  rare  in  the  infinitive  absolute  though  usual  in 
the  construct,  and  it  never  occurs  in  the  participles. 
With  these  exceptions  it  is  universal  in  the  species  already- 
named. 

3.  This  contraction  produces  certain  changes  both  in 
the  vowel,  which  is  thrown  back,  and  in  that  of  the  pre 
ceding  syllable. 

(1)  When  the  first  radical  has  a  vowel  (pretonic 
Kamets)  this  is  simply  displaced  by  the  vowel  of  the 
second  radical,  nno ,  no;  nn&n  ^  nion . 

(2)  When  tbe  first  radical  ends  a  mixed  syllable,  this 
will  become  simple  upon  the  shifting  of  the  vowel  fi'om 
the  second  radical  to  the  first.  Then  a  Daghesh-forte 
may  be  given  to  the  first  radical  in  order  to  preserve  the 
preceding  short  vowel,  or  the  preformative  may  take  the 
simplest  of  the  long  vowels  a,  or  its  previous  vowel  may 
be  lengthened  from  Hhirik  to  Tsere,  Pattahh  to  Kamets, 
and  Kamets -Hhatuph  to  Shurek,  thus:  sio?  becomes 
nc")  or  no;^ ,  and  "I'ltJ';  -rb;: . 

(3)  The  vowel,  which  has  been  thrown  back,  is  com 
[)ressed  as  vowels  usually  are  before  two  consonants. 
I'Juis  in  the  Niphal  future  and  imperative,  ^i?"?,  3©?; 
nncn,  nfen  (comp.  btop ,  nbtop) ;  in  the  Hiphil,  n^ion, 
:^kT}  (comp.  ^""t?]?^,  njbt:]?n). 

4.  Although  the  letter,  into  which  the  second  and 
third  radicals  have  been  contracted,  represents  two  con- 


69  ETYMOLOGY.  §  57 

sonants,  the  doubling  cannot  be  made  .to  appear  at  tlic 
end  of  a  word.     But, 

(1)  When  in  the  course  of  inflection  a  vowel  is  added, 
the  letter  receives  Daghesh-forte,  and  the  preceding 
vowel,  even  where  it  would  be  dropped  in  perfect  verbs, 
is  retained  to  make  the  doubling  possible,  and  hence  pre- 
serves its  accent,  §  17.  2.  Z>,  ^t*??  ^^^t  • 

(2)  Upon  the  addition  of  a  personal  ending  which 
begins  with  a  consonant,  the  utterance  of  the  doubled 
letter  is  aided  by  inserting  6  (i)  in  the  preterite,  and  e 
(''..)  in  the  future.  By  the  dissyllabic  appendage  thus 
formed  the  accent  is  carried  forward,  and  the  previous 
part  of  the  word  is  shortened  in  consequence  as  much  as 
possible,  non,  C''^^'??:!;  =1^;',  J^ri^J?- 

(3)  When,  by  the  operation  of  a  rule  already  given, 
the  first  radical  has  been  doubled,  the  reduplication  of 
the  last  radical  is  frequently  omitted  in  order  to  relieve 
the  word  of  too  many  doubled  letters,  ^^. ,  S^jnon . 

5.  The  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael  sometimes  preserve 
the  perfect  forms,  sometimes  reduplicate  the  contracted 
root,  as  tJODp ,  bpbfnn  ,  and  sometimes  give  up  the  redup- 
lication altogether  and  insei*t  the  long  vowel  Ilholem 
after  the  first  radical,  snio ,  b^iinn . 

6.  In  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  futures,  when  the  penult  is  a 
simple  syllable,  the  accent  is  drawn  back  by  Vav  Con- 
versive  and  the  vowel  of  the  ultimate  is  shortened,  ab;* , 


Vocabulary  20. 

a«  conj.  if  *^??  n.  m.  Baal^  lord 

Tl^  V.  K.  to  curse     Ho.  to  V?a  v.  K.  to  roll 

be  cursed  Pi?"?  v  \l.  to  crush^  pulverize 


§   58.  PE   YODH   VERBS.  6b 


I  b^n  V  H.  to  begin  si?  v.  K.  surround 

j  ni^n^i  n.  m.  Judah  fis  n.  m.  (const.  ''3)  mouth 

j  '^i'in;»  n.  m.  a  Jew  D'^ifi  n.  m.  ^.face, 
nis^-a  n.  f.  cave 


§  58.     Pe   Yodh  ('^s)    Verbs,  see  Table  XIV. 

1.  The  first  radical  is  mostly  Yodli  at  tHe  beginning, 
and  Vav  at  the  close,  of  a  syllable. 

2.  In  the  Kal  future,  if  Yodh  be  retained  it  will  quiesce 
in  and  prolong  the  previous  Hhirik,  and  the  second  radi- 
cal will  take  Pattahh,  e.  g.  tbi"'': ;  if  the  first  radical  be 
rejected  the  previous  Hhirik  is  commonly  lengthened  to 
Tsere,  "ip::,  the  Pattahh  of  the  second  syllable  being 
sometimes  changed  to  Tsere  to  correspond  with  it,  stD.'^ ; 
in  a  few  instances  Hhirik  is  preserved  by  giving  Daghesh- 
forte  to  the  second  radical  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs,  n^"? ,  psr;' . 

3.  Those  verbs  which  reject  Yodh  in  the  Kal  future, 
reject  it  likewise  in  the  imperative  and  infinitive  con- 
struct, the  infinitive  being  prolonged  as  in  Pe  Nun  verbs 
by  the  feminine  termination. 

4.  In  the  Niphal  preterite  and  participle,  Vav  quiesces 
in  its  homogeneous  vowel  Hholem;  in  the  infinitive, 
future,  and  imperative,  where  it  is  doubled,  it  retains  its 
consonantal  character. 

5.  In  the  Pliphil,  Vav  quiesces  in  Hholem ;  a  few  verbs 
have  Yodh  quiescing  in  Tsere,  ^^isTi ,  2*^12^;: ;  more  rarely 
still  the  first  radical  is  dropped  and  the  preceding  short 
vowel  is  preserved  by  doubling  the  second  radical,  "j^k^} , 

6.  In  the  Hophal,  Vav  quiesces  in  Shurek ;  occasionally 
the  short  vowel  is  preserved  and  Daghesh  inserted  in  the 
Becond  radical,  S^J. 


64  ETYMOLOGY.  §  59. 

7.  In  tlie  Hithpael  the  fii'st  radical  is  commonly  Yodh. 
but  a  few  verbs  have  Vav. 

^^n  follows  the  analogy  of  Pe  Yodh  verbs. 


VOCABULAEY   21. 

bryk  n.  m.  tent  rij  v.  H.  to  cause  to  know, 
nxrifi?  n.  m.  Aliab  let  hnow 

n*^  adv.  where  ?  ttj'ij  v.  H.  to  d/)'ive  out 

?f^n  V.  H.  to  cause  to  go^  ^t'^  n.  m.  (ni)  throne 

lead  ^%1^  h-  ni.  wilderness 

©ij  V.  K.  to  be  dry  i:ihiti2  n.  m.  judgment 


§  59.     Ayin    Vav  (fs?)  and  Ayin  Yodh  ('''i^)    Verhs^ 
see  Table  XIII. 

1.  The  quiescent  may  be  rejected  and  its  vowel  given 
to  the  preceding  radical.  So  in  the  Kal  preterite :  Q^ 
for  Dij5 ,  where  a  is  in  partial  compensation  for  the  con 
traction,  rra  for  t^rq.  Active  participle  Op  for  D^Jp,  vrq 
for  t^yq ,  the  ordinary  participial  form  being  superseded 
by  that  of  another  verbal  derivative.  Hiphil  and  Ho- 
phal:  D'lpn  for  n^jpn,  D'lp;'  for  Q"*!!?::,  Dp^n  for  Qipn, 
the  short  vowel  of  the  prefix  being  prolonged  in  a  simple 
syllable. 

2.  Or  it  may  be  converted  into  its  homogeneous  vowel 
u  or  i^  n^p,  n-^n;  D^p;",  nin;',  the  prefix  usually  taking 
the  simplest  of  the  long  vowels,  a;  it  combined  with  a 
preceding  or  accompanying  a  forms  6>,  Kal  abs.  infin.  Dip 
=lcaum^  Niphal  DipJ  for  Dip? . 

3.  In  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  Niphal  and 
Hiphil  preterites,  6  (i)  is  inserted  before  the  affixed  termi- 
nations, and  sometimes  e  (^^  in  the  feminine  plui-als  of 


§  60.  LAMEDn   ALEPH    VERBS.  6i; 

the  Kal  future.  In  the  Niphal  preterite,  when  the  in- 
serted i  receives  the  accent,  the  preceding  i  is  for  euphony 
changed  to  ^ . 

4.  In  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  species  the  apocopated  future 
takes  6  and  e  in  distinction  from  the  ordinary  future 
which  has  u  and  i,  niji*'; ,  nfc^ .  "With  Vav  Conversive  the 
accent  is  drawn  back  to  the  simple  penult,  and  the  vowel 
of  the  last  syllable  is  shortened,  ntj^i ,  m»n  . 

5.  (1)  In  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael,  the  form  of  per- 
fect verbs  is  rarely  adopted,  the  second  radical  appearing 
as  '^ ,  e.  g.  ^-i? ,  or  as  '' ,  e.  g.  D!!p . 

(2)  Commonly  the  third  radical  is  reduplicated  instead 
of  the  second,  which  then  quiesces  in  Hholem,  Pi.  D'bip , 
Pu.  Dbip,  Hith.  Disiprin . 

(3)  Sometimes  the  quiescent  letter  is  omitted  from  the 
root,  and  the  resulting  biliteral  is  reduplicated,  Pi.  bsbs , 
Pu.  b?b?. 

Vocabulary  22. 

JTQii?  n.  f.  ground^  land  ^i\  n.  m.  young  man 

y'M  adv.  roller e  f  only  after  "lip  v.  K.  to  hury ;  N.  to  he 

•j"?? ,  ipi^'a  whence  ?  hv/ried 

•^pif  adv.  whither?  ^"^71?  n.  i. former  state 

fc^in  V.  K.  (f  ut.  xii;)  to  come;  Dip  v.  K.  to  arise 

H.  to  cause  to  come^  bring  'y^*\  v.  K.  to  contend 

^'pn  Hith.   to   go  for  one^s  S'^tz?  v.  K.  to  return  /  H.  to 

self  go  about  cause    to    retu/rn^     bring 

■p^  V.  K.  to  lodge  bach 

•11^  V.  K.  to  die ;  H.  to  put  nnsiJ?  n.  f.  handmaid 

to  death 

§  60.     Lamedh  Alejjh  (jk:^)    Verbs,  see  Table  X\. 
1.  Aleph,  as  the  third  radical  of  verbs,  retains  its  con- 


66  ETYMOLOGY.  §  6L 

sonantal  cliaracter  only  wlien  it  stands  at  the  beginning 
of  a  syllable. 

2.  At  the  end  of  the  word  it  invariably  quiesces  in  the 
preceding  vowel,  and  if  this  be  Pattahh,  it  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets;  so  always  in  the  Kal  future  and  imperative, 
where  i5  as  a  guttural  requires  «,  xi^^  for  i5i'a;» . 

3.  Before  syllabic  affixes  fc^  quiesces  in  Kamets  in  the 
Kal  preterite  C*^?"^?  except  in  those  words  which  have 
Tsere  as  their  proper  vowel,  fi^^n;* .  In  the  preterites  of 
the  derivative  species  it  quiesces  in  Tsere,  and  in  all 
futures  and  imperatives  in  Seghol. 


Vocabulary  23. 

nw  n.  TIr  ^%^  v.  K.  to  jmd 

Kna  V.  K.  to  create  fc^'j^  n.  f.  Mara  (hitter) 

inno  adj.  clean^pure  '^'bs^S  n.  f.  Naomi  (sweet) 

i^s;"  V.  K,to  go  out;  H.  to  "^'bp,  n.  m.  Uli 

bring  out  ^^"75  v.  K.  to  call 

D^'nto?  n.  m.  pi.  Clialdees        ^""^TT}  n.  m.  pi.  troughs 
Db  n.  m.  (p^Y)  heart  f^n  v.  K.  to  run 

sS?  V.  K.  to  he  full ;  N.  to  a?©  v.  K.  to  lie  down 

hejilled;  P.  to  fill  bk^nw  n.  m.  Samuel 


§  61.     Lamedh  He  (nb)    Verhs,  see  Table  XVI. 

1.  The  third  radical  which  is  Yodh  or  Vav,  does  not 
appear  at  the  end  of  the  word  except  in  the  Kal  passive 
participle  "'^^ ;  in  all  other  cases  it  is  rejected  or  softened, 
the  resulting  vowel  termination  being  usually  expressed 
by  the  letter  H . 

The  various  preterites  end  in  n,. 

The  futures  and  participles  ip  H... 


§  61.  LAMEDH    HE    VERBS.  6? 

The  imperatives  in  n^. 

The  absolute  infinitives  in  n'  or  n^ . 

The  construct  infinitives  have  the  feminine  ending  f.i . 

2.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  vowel,  the 
last  radical  (though  occasionally  retained  in  prolonged 
and  pausal  forms  ^"^SO)?  is  commonly  rejected,  and  its 
vowel  given  to  the  antecedent  consonant,  '^^^  for  ^"^^5  . 

3.  Before  personal  endings  beginning  with  a  consonant 
the  radical  ''  remains  and  quiesces  in  either  Hhirik  or 
Tsere  in  the  preterites  and  in  Seghol  in  the  futures  and 
imperatives. 

4.  The  third  person  feminine  of  the  preterites  retains 
the  primary  characteristic  t^^,  fiib:^,  which  is  commonly 
softened  by  an  appended  n^,  ^Ki^^- 

5.  Forms  not  augmented  by  personal  endings  lose  their 
final  vowel  before  suffixes,  e.  g.  '^S^?  ,  'n^J  fi-om  Sib5  .  The 
preterite  3  fem.  takes  its  simple  form,  e.  g.  ^nn^a  or  ^r\"^a  . 

6.  The  final  vowel  n^  is  rejected  from  the  futures 
when  apocopated,  or  when  preceded  by  Vav  Conversive, 
e.  g.  bi^ ,  bS^]  from  !n5^^ .  The  concuiTence  of  final  con- 
sonants thence  resulting  in  the  Kal  and  Hiphil  is  com- 
monly relieved  by  inserting  an  unaccented  Seghol  between 
them,  Kal,  b^\  or  bj:^  from  n5^:> ;  Hiph.  bj-;  ^  bj^^  from  nbi:^ . 

7.  The  final  vowel  n^  is  sometimes  rejected  from  the 
imperative  in  the  Piel,  Hiphil,  and  Hithpael  species,  e.  g 
ba  for  nSa,  bjn  for  n3^n,  binn  for  ri%m, 

s^;^«  to  be,  fut.  n^n;? ,  apoc.  ''H!' ,  part,  n'in . 
n^n  to  live,  fut.  n^n;;' ,  apoc.  '^nj . 

Vocabulary  24. 

Di'Jaij  adv.  trtdy,  indeed  ?^53  v.  K.  to  huild 

••s  vji^  Jioio  rmcch  more,  or    ri^n  v.  K.  to  le 

after    a    negative    Jiow     Ti^  v.  K.  to  go   down^  de- 
much  less  scend 


68  ETYMOLOGY.  §§   62,  63 

d^ic^n^ '  n.  Jerusalem  T\w  v.  K.  to  make^  do^  N.  to 

"^^i??  as  he  done 

bis  V.  P.  (b?^3)  to  contain 

n3?  V.  P.  to  comjplete^  finish  J^j?  v.  P.  to  command 

HD-a  n.  f.  led  nifn  v.  K.  to  see,  N.  to  he  seen 

nir  V.  K.   to  go  up^  H.  to       to  ajpjpear 

hring  ujp^  offer  nb'b©  n.  m.  Solomon 

t\^'^  n.  f.  hurnt-offering  ri'^Di?  ad\''.  <z  second  time 

^  Pointed  as  though  it  were  written  Di|tJ!ii'' . 


§  62.     Doubly  Imperfect   Verhs, 

Verbs  which  have  two  weak  letters  in  the  root,  oi 
which  are  so  constituted  as  to  belong  to  two  different 
classes  of  imperfect  verbs,  commonly  exhibit  the  peculiar- 
ities  of  both,  unless  they  interfere  with  or  limit  one  an- 
other. Thus,  a  verb  which  is  both  KB  and  n>  will  follow 
the  analogy  of  both  paradigms,  the  former  in  its  first,  and 
the  latter  in  its  second  syllable.  But  in  verbs  which  are 
both  i:^  and  H'b,  the  1  is  invariably  treated  as  a  perfect 
consonant,  and  the  Wb  peculiarities  only  are  preserved. 


§  63.     Unusual  Forms, 

1.  Verbs  belonging  to  one  class  of  imperfect  verbs 
occasionally  adopt  forms  from  another  and  closely  related 
class.  Thus,  a  ^^  verb  may  appear  with  a  nb  form,  or 
an  nV  verb  with  an  3?V  form,  or  vice  versa, 

2.  A  few  verbs  of  different  classes  adopt  the  peculiar 
"PV  or  l"y  modes  of  forming  the  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael, 
inserting  the  vowel  o  instead  of  the  usual  reduplication 


!    g§  64,  65.  NUMERALS.  6S 

I  irn©  and  ©"^te,  Piels  of  tnw ,  "^^V^^^  and  lir^iin^  from 
!  ts^ ,  or  doubling  tlie  third  radica*!  in  place  of  the  second . 
e.  g.  15?'^,  ^?^^,  ^)^^.  {="^^.^.)  from  T'^^}  (  =  Ijkj ), 
ninpvujn  (fut.  ninntD:»,  with  Vav  Conv.  ^r^ntj^^)  from 
r.nij,  or  reduplicating  an  entire  syllable,  e.  g.  '^'^y^T},, 
nnnno . 

3.  A  very  few  instances  occur  of  what  may  be  called 
compound  species ;  thus,  Niphal  of  Pual  '^%)!>^ ,  Niphal  of 
Hithpael  ^'lO^.?,  "is??,  5  5"05^?- 

§  64.     Quad/riliteral  Verbs. 

The  number  of  quadriliteral  verbs  is  very  small.  Some 
adopt  the  vowels  and  inflections  of  the  Piel  and  Pual 
species,  while  others  follow  the  Hiphil. 

§  65.     Numerals,  see  Table  XIX. 

1.  The  cardinals  from  three  to  ten  are  in  form  of  the 
singular  number,  and  have  a  feminine  termination  when 
joined  to  masculine  nouns,  but  omit  it  when  joined  to 
feminine  nouns. 

2.  The  tens  are  formed  by  adding  the  masculine  plural 
termination  to  the  units,  D^'Sto:^  twenty  being,  however, 
derived  not  from  two  but  from  ten  ^W . 

3.  There,  are  no  distinct  forms  for  ordinals  above  ten, 
the  cardinal  nmnbers  being  used  instead. 

4.  Fractional  parts  are  expressed  by  the  feminine  ordi- 
nals, as  well  as  by  special  terms. 

VOCABTJLAET    25. 

^%'^^.  n.  f.  ejpTiah  T&y^  n.  m.  Pharaoh 

^'^H  n.  m.  month  niw  n.  f.  (tt'^.)  year 

nb  n.  m.  Noah  bg©  n.  m. 
"lift:?  n.  m.  decade^  ten 


70  ETYMOLOGY  §  66 

^66.  Separate  Pa/rUcles. 

1.  The  longer  particles,  wlietlier  adverbs,  prepositious^ 
conjunctions  or  interjections,  are  written  as  separate 
words. 

2.  The  prepositions  "in^  after^  "bK  to^  n:?.  unto^  b:?  upon^ 
and  nnn  under ^  assume  before  suffixes  the  form  of  nouns 
in  the  masculine  plural,  e.  g.  '^in?,  ^"^tin??  T?  between^ 
adopts  sometimes  a  singular,  sometimes  a  masculine 
plural,  and  sometimes  a  feminine  plural  form,  ii*^3  and 
n-^ra,  tA:^%  and  ^S'^nira. 

3.  The  preposition  rix  with^  commonly  becomes  tJJ? 
before  suffixes,  e.  g.  ''riNi ,  DDni^i ,  and  is  thus  distinguished 
from  Ms^  the  sign  of  the  definite  object,  which  becomes 
Mifi^ ,  or  before  grave  suffixes,  nij ,  e.  g.  ""riJ*,  Ditnx . 


SYNTAX. 

§  67.  The  Copula. 

1.  The  predicate  of  a  sentence,  if  a  substantive,  adjec- 
tive, or  pronoun,  may  be  directly  connected  with  its  sul>- 
ject  without  an  intervening  copula,  Di^©  n'^nin^'rij*!:?  all 
her  paths  (sltg)  peace,  T?n  aiib  the  tree  (was)  good, 

2.  Or  the  verb  n;n  to  he,  or  the  pronoun  x^n  of  the 
third  person,  may  be  used  as  a  copula,  inn  nn^n  f^xn 
the  earth  was  desolate,  trie  i^^n  *':^"'?nn  ^risn  the  fourth 
river  is  Euphrates, 


§  68.  The  Article, 

1.  The  article  is  used  in  Hebrew  as  in  English  to  dis- 
tinguish an  object  as  one  which  has  been  mentioned 
before,  as  well  known,  as  the  only  one  of  its  class,  or  as 
distinguished  above  others  of  like  kind. 

2.  It  is  also  prefixed  to  nouns  employed  in  a  generic  or 
universal  sense,  "^Viv^  gold,  T\^^r\r\  wisdom.  So  in  com- 
parisons, 1]^?  as  a  (lit.  the)  nest,  Isa.  10 :  14. 

3.  It  is  likewise  found  in  some  cases  where  the  English 
idiom  requires  a  word  still  more  specific,  as  a  possessive 
pronoun :  she  tooh  51'^i^n  the  veil.  Gen.  24  :  Qo,  i.  e.  the 
one  which  she  had,  her  veil ;  or  a  demonstrative,  as  be- 
fore words  denoting  time,  Di'^n  to-day,  niisn  thii  yea/r  j 
or  the  sign  of  the  vocative,  ^^ian  O  Icing  ! 


72  SYNTAX.  §§  69--71 


§  69.  Nouns  definite  without  the  Article, 

1.  The  following  are  definite  Avitliout  the  article : — 

(1)  Proper  nouns,  which  only  receive  it  if  they  were 
oj'iginally  appellatives. 

(2)  Nouns  with  pronominal  suffixes. 

(3)  Nouns  in  the   construct   state  before   a  definite 
noun. 

9.  The  article  is  often  omitted  in  poetry  where  it  wou]<i 
be  required  in  prose. 


§  70.  Adjectives. 

1.  Both  qualifying  and  predicate  adjectives  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong. 

2.  Qualifying  adjectives  usually  stand  after  the  noun 
and  agree  with  it  likewise  in  definiteness,  that  is  to  say, 
if  the  noun  is  made  definite  whether  by  the  article  or  in 
any  of  the  ways  specified  in  the  preceding  section,  they 
receive  the  article,  DDH  "]%  a  wise  son,  riniian  f'^ijH  the 
good  land, 

3.  Predicate  adjectives  commonly  stand  before  the 
noun,  and  do  not  take  the  article,  even  though  the  noun 
is  definite,  nn^n  nib  the  tvord  is  good. 


§  71.  Demonstrative  Pronouns, 

1.  Demonstrative  pronouns  follow  the  same  rule  ol 
position  and  agreement,  only  the  nouns  which  they  qualify 
are  invariably  definite,  nbisn  D'^ni'^n  these  things,  n>j« 
D'^in'nn  tliese  are  the  things, 

2.  If  both  an  adjective  and  a  demonstrative  qualify 


§§  72,  73.  *  NUMERALS.  73 

the   same   noun,  tlie   demonstrative  is  placed  last,  "fiiJJi 

tii^-Tr  niitsn  this  good  land. 


§  72.   Comparison  of  Adjectives, 

1.  Comparison  is  expressed  by  means  of  the  preposi- 
tion ya  from^  placed  after  the  adjective  or  other  word 
expressive  of  quality,  d'^D'^SB^  ^"^^^O  ^%^^  loisdom  is  letter 
than  rubies^  lit.  is  good  from  rubies ;  jiatt  b'jiax  /  will  he 
greater  than  thou, 

2.  The  superlative  degree  may  be  expressed, 

(1)  By  adding  bb  all  to  the  comparative  particle  It) , 
Di^"''w'a"b3^  bina  gregMst  of  all  the  sons  of  the  east^  lit. 
great  from  all,  etc. 

(2)  By  an  emphatic  use  of  the  positive,  so  as  to  imply 
the  possession  of  the  attribute  in  an  eminent  degree, 
"O^pL  riBjin  0  fairest  among  women^  lit.  the  fair  one,  etc. 

§  73.  Nvmerals, 

1.  The  cardinal  inx  one  and  the  ordinal  numbers  are 
treated  like  other  adjectives,  and  follow  the  rules  of  po- 
sition and  agreement  already  given. 

2.  The  other  cardinals  may  stand, 

(1)  In  the  absolute  state  before  the  noun  to  which 
t1)ey  belong. 

(2)  Before  it  in  the  construct  state  (if  they  have  such 
a  form). 

(3)  After  it  in  the  absolute  state. 

3.  Nouns  accompanied  by  the  cardinals  from  2  to  10 
are  almost  invariably  plural,  while  those  which  are  pre- 
ceded by  the  tens  (20-90)  or  numbers  compounded  with 
tliem  (21,  etc.)  are  commonly  put  in  the  singular,  D'^nto^ 
D'^STS  "S^ih  njtj  twenty  yea/rs  and  seven  years. 


74  SYNTAX.  *  §§  74,  75, 

4.  The  cardinals  above  OTie  may  receive  the  article 
wlieu  the  noun  is  not  expressed,  but  not  when  joined  to  a 
definite  noun.  D'^is'ni^n  tlie  forty^  ni^n  u-^i^y^_  the  forty 
days, 

§  74.  Apposition, 

One  noun  may  be  in  apposition  with  another,  not  only 
when  both  denote  the  same  person  or  thing,  but  also 
when  the  second  specifies  the  first  by  stating  the  mateiial 
of  which  it  consists,  its  quality,  character,  or  the  like, 
nffinsn  ^^an  the  oxen  the  hrass^  i.  e.  tlie  brazen  oxefii; 
ritt^  D'^SD  t^t  tlwee  measures  (consisting  of)  meal,  . 

§  75.  Tlie  Construct  State, 

1.  When  one  noun  is  limited  in  its  meaning  by  another, 
the  first  is  put  in  the  construct  state.  The  relation  tlius 
expressed  corresponds  for  the  most  part  to  the  genitive 
case,  or  to  that  denoted  in  English  by  the  preposition  of. 

2.  When  the  relation  between  two  nouns  is  expressed 
by  a  preposition,  the  first  commonly  remains  in  the  abso- 
lute State;  it  may,  however,  especially  in  poetry,  be  put 
in  the  construct,  ?3^5n  ""nn  mountains  in  Gilboa, 

3.  Nouns  are  sometimes  in  the  construct  before  a  suc- 
ceeding clause  with  which  they  are  closely  connected; 
thus,  before  a  relative  clause,  "ii|«  Dipa  the  place  xoherc^ 
etc.,  particularly  when  the  relative  is  itself  omitted, 
nbtn-n^a  by  tlie  hand  of  (him  whom)  thou  wilt  seidj 
and  even  before  the  copulative,  n^^l  ^^'?1  wisdom  and 
Tcnowledge, 

4.  An  adjective,  participle,  or  demonstrative,  qualify- 
ing a  noun  in  the  construct  state,  cannot  follow  it  imme- 
diately, but  must  be  placed  after  the  governed  noun, 
binsn  Tr\T\'^  ntds^'Q  the  qreat  worh  of  Jehovah, 


§§  76,  77.  THE   PEETEEITE.  75 

5.  An  article  or  suffix  belonging  to  a  noun  in  the  con- 
struct must  be  attached,  not  to  it,  but  to  the  governed 
noun,  b'-^hn  ''Sis^  the  mighty  men  of  valor,  iirjj  ^'^''^^  his 
idols  of  gold. 

6.  The  preposition  b  to,  belonging  to,  with  or  without 
a  preceding  relative  pronoun,  may  be  substituted  for  the 
construct  relation  in  its  possessive  sense,  i^i?''^^^^  ri^an  the 
house  of  Elisha,  T^^%'^,  ^%%  l^srn  her  father's  sheejp. 


§  76.  Tenses  of  Verbs. 

The  Hebrew  has  distinct  forms  of  the  verb  correspond- 
ing to  the  two  grand  divisions  of  time,  the  past  and  the 
future;  but  all  subordinate  modifications  or  shades  of 
meaning  are  either  suggested  by  accompanying  particles, 
or  left  to  be  inferred  from  the  connection.  Whatever  is 
or  is  conceived  of  as  past,  is  put  in  the  preterite;  the 
future  is  used  for  all  that  is  or  is  conceived  of  as  future. 

§  77.  The  Preterite, 

The  preterite  may  accordingly  be  employed  to  denote, 
1.  The  past,  whether  it  be, 

a.  Absolute,  i.  e.  the  historical  imperfect,  God  S'ja 
created. 

b.  Relative  to  the  present,  i  e.  the  perfect,  what  is  this 
that  tr^ti'p  thou  hast  done  ? 

c.  Relative  to  another  past,  i.  e.  the  pluperfect,  God 
ended  his  worTc  which  Si^lJ  he  had  made. 

d.  Relative  to  a  future,  i.  e.  the  future  perfect,  he  shall 
he  called  holy,  when  the  Lord  "jrnn  shall  have  washed,  eta 

e.  Conditional,  except  the  Lord  had  left  a  remna/nU 
»)D"^7n  %oe  should  have  been  as  Sodom. 

f.  Optative,  'iDn'ia-^b  0  that  we  had  died. 


7B  «?YNTAX.  §  78 

g.  Subjunctive,  ^^^y!  I?"^'?  in  order  tJiat  ye  might  fear, 

2.  The  present,  legarded  as  a  continuation  of  the  past, 
^tyt^t  I  am  thirsty^  prop.  I  have  been  and  still  am  thirsty, 

3.  General  truths,  embodying  the  experience  of  the 
past,  an  ox  "S^"^  Icnoioeth  his  owner^  oxen  always  have 
done  so,  and  alv^ays  will. 

4.  The  future,  when  described  by  the  prophets  as 
though  it  had  already  taken  place,  Babylon  nbsj  ha^s 
fallen, 

§  78.  The  Future. 

The  future  tense  is  used  in  speaking  of, 

1.  The  future,  whether  it  be, 

a.  Absolute,  sntoVx  I  will  mahe, 

b.  Relative  to  a  past,  Elislut  was  fallen  sick  of  his 
sickness^  whereof  tyro^  he  was  to  die, 

G,  Conditional,  but  (if  it  were  my  case)  Tzjn^ij  I  would 
seelc  unto  God. 

d.  Optative,  expressing  desire,  determination,  permis- 
sion, or  command,  so  'in^^^  7nay  all  thine  enemies  perish ; 
all  that  thou  commandest  us,  nb'55  we  will  do;  of  th^  fruit 
bii^s  we  ma?/  eat;  ^nine  ordinances  ^Siaon  ye  shall  heejp, 

e.  Subjunctive,  ^?'^5n  ']Tqb  in  order  that  my  soul  may 
bless  thee, 

2.  The  present,  when  it  is  conceived  of  as  extending  into 
the  future,  why  ^k^t)  weepest  thou  ?  lit.  why  wilt  thou  go 
on  to  weep  ? 

8.  General  tniths,  which  are  valid  for  all  time  to  come, 
righteousness  '^^'T\T\  exalteth  a  nation^  it  does  so  now  and 
always  will. 

4.  Habitual  acts  or  states  continuing  for  an  indefinite 
period  from  the  time  spoken  of,  thus  Job  n^5|^  did  con- 
tinually, not  only  that  once,  but  thenceforward. 


§§  79,  80  PAETICIPLES.  7« 

5.  Tlie  past,  in  animated  description,  as  we  use  the  pre- 
sent, then  "T^TC;  sings  Moses. 

6.  The  future  is  idiomatically  used  witli  D'j'b  and  Dtjtja 
not  yet^  hefore^  whether  the  period  referred  to  is  past  or 
future. 

7.  The  apocopated  and  paragogic  forms  of  the  future 
mostly  have  a  conditional,  optative,  or  subjunctive  sense. 

8.  The  negative  imperative  is  made  by  prefixing  bj$  not 
to  the  apocopated  future,  ^^1??"^^  harm  not 


§  79.  The  Seconda/ry  Tenses. 

1.  When  a  future  with  Vav  Conversive  is  preceded  by 
a  preterite,  or  by  any  expression  referring  to  past  time,  it 
becomes  a  secondary  preterite.  And  a  preterite  with 
Vav  Conversive  preceded  by  a  future,  an  imperative,  or 
any  expression  indicating  future  time,  becomes  a  secondary 
future. 

2.  A  narrative  or  a  paragraph,  which  begins  with  one 
of  the  primary  tenses,  is  mostly  continued  by  means  of 
the  corresponding  secondary  tense,  provided  the  verh 
stands  at  the  beginning  of  its  clause.  If  for  any  reason 
thi«  order  of  the  words  is  interrupted  or  prevented,  the 
primary  tense  must  again  be  used. 


§  80.  Particvples. 

1.  Participles  may  express  what  is  permanent  or 
habitual,  (the  Lord)  ifii^  loveth  righteousness.  Passive 
participles,  so  used,  suggest  not  only  a  constant  experience, 
but  a  fixed  quality  as  the  ground  of  it,  i^'^ia  not  only 
fea/red,  but  tvorthy  to  be  feared. 

2.  Active  participles  most  commonly  relate  to  the  pres 


78  SYNTAX.  §§  81,  82 

ent  or  to  the  proximate  future,  and  passive  participles  to 
tlie  past. 

3.  In  narratives  and  predictions  tlie  time  of  the  parti- 
ciples is  reckoned,  not  from  the  moment  of  speaking,  but 
fi'om  the  period  spoken  of,  the  two  angels  Carrie^  and  Lot 
ao*  was  sitting  in  the  gate  of  Sodom, 


§  81.  The  Infinitive, 

1.  The  absolute  infinitive  may  be  used  for, 

(1)  The  preterite  or  the  future,  when  one  of  those 
tenses  immediately  precedes. 

(2)  The  imperative,  when  it  stands  at  the  beginning 
of  a  sentence. 

2.  The  infinitive,  which  is  a  verbal  noun,  may  be  put 
in  the  construct  state  before  a  following  noun,  whether 
this  be  its  subject  or  its  object.  The  construct  state  ia 
also  used  after  nouns  or  prepositions,  and  sometimes  after 
verbs. 

3.  When  one  verb  is  dependent  upon  another,  it  is 
sometimes  put,  not  in  the  infinitive,  but  in  the  same  tense 
with  the  governing  verb,  ?j^n  b'^Kin  he  was  willing^  he 
walked^  for  he  was  willing  to  walk^  or  walked  willingly, 

§  82.  Object  of  Verbs, 

1.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb,  if  a  definite  noun,  or 
a  pronoun,  may  be  preceded  by  the  particle  riic . 

2.  The  subject  of  passive  verbs,  which  is  really  the  ob- 
ject of  their  action,  and  nouns  placed  absolutely,  occasion- 
ii]ly  receive  Ms? . 

3.  Some  ver])s,  not  properly  transitive,  are  capable  ol 
a  transitive  construction  ;  thus, 

(1)  Verbs  signifying  plenty  and  want,  or  motion,  ilu 


§§  83-85.  NEGLECT   OF   AGKEEMENT.  79 

liotcse  Q'^T?3^,s3  ^%  "loas  full  of  men,  n^^n-ns{  lis;]  they 
went  out  (of)  the  city, 

(2)  Any  verb  may  govern  its  cognate  noun,  or  a  noun 
which  defines  the  extent  of  its  application,  'T'^^']"nK  li^n 
he  10  as  diseased  in  his  feet 

4,  The  verb  usually  stands  first,  its  subject  next,  and 
its  object  last,  unless  the  emphasis  requires  a  difEerent 
order. 

§  83.    Verbs  with  more  than  on£  Object 

1.  Some  verbs  have  more  than  one  object,  viz. : 

(1)  The  causatives  of  transitive  verbs. 

(2)  Verbs  whose  action  may  be  regarded  under  difEer- 
ent aspects  as  terminating  upon  difEerent  objects. 

(3)  The  instrument  of  an  action,  the  material  used  in 
its  performance,  its  design,  or  its  result,  may  be  its 
secondaiy  or  remote  object,  l^ij  ini^  ^'i25*^^;^  and  they  over- 
whelmed him  with  stones,  *i5d:j  Dnifrj'nij  "la-'^'i  and  he 
formed  the  man  of  dust 

2.  If  an  active  verb  is  capable  of  governing  a  double 
object,  its  passive  may  govern  the  more  remote  of  them. 

§  84.  Adverbial  Expressions. 

1.  Adverbs  commonly  stand  after  the  words  to  which 
they  belong. 

2.  Nouns  may  be  placed  absolutely  to  express  the  rela- 
tions of  time,  place,  measure,  number,  or  manner. 

§  85.  Neglect  of  Agreement 

^  1.  When  a  predicate  adjective   or  verb  precedes  its 
noun,  it  often  prefers  a  primary  to  a  secondary  form,  that 


80  SYNTAX.  §  86c 

is   to   say,   the  masculine  may  be  used  instead  of  the 
feminine,  and  tlie  singular  instead  of  the  plural. 

2.  Collective  nouns  may  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural. 

3.  Nouns  plural  in  form,  but  singular  in  signification, 
commonly  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pronouns  agreeing 
with  them  in  the  singular. 

4.  Plural  names  of  inanimate  or  irrational  objects  of 
either  gender  are  occasionally  joined  with  the  feminine 
singular. 

5.  The  masculine  is  sometimes  used,  when  females  are 
spoken  of,  from  a  neglect  to  note  the  gender,  if  no  stress 
is  laid  upon  it. 

6.  Singular  predicates  and  pronouns  are  sometimes 
employed  in  a  distributive  sense  of  plural  subjects. 

7.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives,  and  pro- 
nouns agreeing  with  them  in  the  pluraL 

§  86.   Compound  Suhject 

1.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  words  con- 
nected by  the  conjunction  and^  the  predicate,  if  it  precedes 
its  subject,  may  be  put  in  the  masculine  singular  as  its 
primary  form,  or  it  may  be  put  in  the  plural,  referring  to 
them  all,  or  it  may  agree  with  the  nearest  word. 
^  2.  If  the  predicate  follows  a  compound  subject,  it  is 
commonly  put  in  the  plural,  though  it  may  agree  with 
the  principal  word  to  which  the  others  are  subordinate. 

3.  If  a  predicate  refers  equally  to  two  words  of  dif- 
ferent genders,  it  will  be  put  in  the  masculine  in  prefer- 
ence to  the  feminine;  if  they  are  of  different  persons, 
the  predicate  will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to 
the  third,  and  in  the  fii^st  in  preference  to  either  of  the 
othera 


§1  87-89.  CONJUNCTIONS.  31 

§  87.  .Uejoetition  of  Words, 

1.  Eepetition  may  denote  distribution,  ni©  niij  year 
by  yeai\  plurality,  nn)"*!^  generation  and  generation^  i.  e. 
many  generations^  or  emphasis  and  intensity,  yiss  yhs 
exceeding  dee]^, 

2.  In  verbs  the  absolute  infinitive  is  joined  with  the 
finite  forms  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  intensity,  tm 
n^in  tlwu  shalt  surely  die. 

§  88.  Helative  Pronouns. 

1.  When  the  relative  "i©^  is  governed  by  a  verb,  noun, 
or  preposition,  this  is  shown  by  appending  the  appro- 
priate pronominal  sufiix  to  the  governing  word,  thou 
!?l'>n'inn  n«i?:  whom  I  have  chosen^  ii^'^T  m|ii{  whose  seed, 

2.  When  the  relative  is  preceded  by  J^&?  the  sign  of 
the  definite  object,  or  by  a  preposition,  these  pertain 
not  to  the  relative,  but  to  its  antecedent,  which  is  to  be 
supplied. 

3.  The  relative  is  frequently  omitted,  not  only,  as  in 
English,  when  it  is  the  object  of  its  clause,  but  also  when 
it  is  i}iQ^\]h]QQ,i^andheforsoolc  God  ^nto':?  (who)  made  him. 

4.  The  demonstrative  nj  or  M  is  frequently  used  in 
poetry  with  the  force  of  a  relative,  in  which  case  it 
suffers  no  change  for  gender  or  number. 

§  89.   Conjunctions. 

1.  The  simple  copulative  )  is  used  in  Hebrew,  where 
our  idiom  requires  different  conjunctions ;  the  relation  be 
tween  clauses  so  connected  must  often  be  inferred  from 
their  signification. 

2.  Vav  also  serves, 

4* 


82  SYNTAX.  §  89 

(1)  To  introduce  the  apodosis  or  second  member  of  a 
conditional  sentence,  if  God  will  he  with  me  and  hee^  rtie 
T\^Ty\  then  shall  Jehovah  he  my  God, 

(2)  To  connect  a  statement  of  time  or  a  noun  placed 
absolutely  witli  tlie  clause  to  whicli  it  relates,  on  the  third 
duy  orj^jaJS  Kfef 5  Ahrahami  lifted  wp  his  eyes* 


GRAMMATICAL   TABLES. 


I.     The  Letters,  §1, 

Onler. 

Forma  and  EqQiraleDts. 

Names. 

Rabbinical 
Alpliabet. 

NarncTijAJ 
values. 

1 

t( 

^bif 

Aleph 

1 

2 

a 

Bh,  B 

n-'a 

Beth 

2 

3 

i 

Gh,  G 

b'n'^k 

Gi'-mel 

3 

4 

1 

Dh,  D 

n^t^ 

Da'-leth 

4 

5 

n 

H  ' 

«0 

He 

6 

6 

1 

V 

'ij 

Vav 

6 

7 

T 

Z 

rt 

Zayin 

7 

8 

n 

Hh 

mn 

Hheth 

8 

9 

Q 

T 

rT>a 

Teth 

9 

10 

1 

Y 

ni'' 

Yodh 

10 

11 

=  1 

Kh,  K 

^? 

Kaph 

1^ 

20 

12 

b 

L 

^V 

La'-medh 

30 

13 

B  D 

M 

na 

Mem 

DP 

40 

14 

5    1 

N 

113 

Nun 

i^ 

50 

15 

D 

S 

SP?^ 

Sa'-mekh 

P 

60 

16 

y 

r^ 

Ayin 

» 

70 

17 

8  5| 

Ph,P 

KB 

Pe 

c^r> 

80 

18 

sr 

Ts 

rji 

Tsa'-dhe 

Ti 

90 

19 

p 

K 

e|ip 

Koph 

p 

100 

20 

1 

R 

t3*)'l 

Resh    . 

•5 

.200 

21 

ffl 

Sh,  S 

r» 

Shin 

t 

300 

22 

n 

Th,  T 

IP 

Tav 

P 

400 

S3 

II.     Classification  of  the  Letters,  §2. 


Gutturals,  «  n  n  :? 
Palatals,  ^  ^  :>  p 
Linguals,  "i  12  b  D  n 
Dentals,  r  o  3r  © 
Labials,  n  1  12  s 
■^  shares  the  peculiarities 
of  the  Gutturals. 


Weak, 


Medium, 


Strong, 


(i5  n    1  "^  Vowel-Letters 

|s  n  n  3?  Gutturals. 

r  b  ^    D  -I  Liquids. 

(  T  0  2  in  Sibilants. 

^  I  Aspirates  and 

''^\  Mutes. 


Serviles  n^D^  TW12  )r\^^.    Radicals  the  rest  of  the  Alphabet. 


The    Points,  §4. 


Jjong  Vowels, 

Ka'mets  a  — 
Tse're  e  — 
Hho'lem  0  — 


Short  Vowels. 

Piittahh  d  — 

Seghol  e  ~ 

Ka'mets-Hhatuph  d  -r 


Doubiful  Vowels. 

Hhi'rik    -="     i  or  l 
Shu'rek  -- 
Kib  buts  T 


U  OT  u 


Pronounce  a  as  in  father^  a  as  in  fat,  e  as  in  there,  e  as  in  met,  ^  as  in 
machine,  I  as  in  pin,  o  as  in  note,  6  as  in  not,  u  as  in  rule,  u  as  mfull. 

§  7.     Simple  Sh  va  —  silent  or  vocal. 

(  Hhateph-Pattahh  —  ;  thus  "lb?  ""niodh. 
Lompound  J  i-jhateph-Seghol   -r;  thus  nbi$  ^mor. 
(  Hhateph-Kamets  ~ ;  thus   '^pg:  °nl. 

\  8.   Pattahh-furtive  ~  with  5?,  n  or  !^  at  the  end  of 
words. 

§12.   Daghesh-lene  in  a  a  "i  3  B  n  removes  aspiration. 

§  13.    Daghesh-forte  doubles;   not  found  in  ^^  n  n  :? 
rarely  in  'i . 

§  14.   Mappik  in  final  Ji  when  a  consonant. 

§  15.    Raphe  _=_   opposite   of    Daghesh-lene,   Daghesh' 
Torte,  or  Mappik. 

§  21.   Makkeph  (")  connects  words. 

§  22.    Methegh  -  second  syllable  before  the  accent. 


DISJUNCTIVES. 

Class 

I.     Emperors. 

1.    Silluk 

(,) 

rpsjbo 

fi.  Athnahh 

(.) 

r«fj« 

Class  II.  Kings. 

8.   S'gholta 

C) 

T  :      1 

;;(wrfp. 

4.    Zakeph  Katon 

C) 

r''^i?  R15I 

5.  Zakeph  Gaahol 

('•) 

^'^\  sii?j 

6.  Tiplililsa 

(J 

VT   1    • 

Class  III.  JDulces. 

T.  R'bhr 

(") 

r=^ 

8.   Shalsheleth 

(') 

rb!t)bil) 

9.   Zarka 

(~) 

!^R"?I 

postp. 

10.   Pashtft 

C) 

N-JCB 

postp. 

11.  Y'thlbh 

(.) 

^^^■J* 

prep. 

12.   T'bhir 

(,) 

■^^?P1 

Class  IV.  Counts. 

13.  Pazfir 

/H  X 

-h 

14.   KarnePhara 

/*^^\ 

nns  ''ns 

15.   T'lisha  Gh'dhola 

/  ^\ 

nbiia  !!<!^"'l3pi 

prep, 

16.   Geresh 

/r  X 

aini 

17.   G'rashayim 

/  "\ 

f^izjna 

18.   P'slk 

(t) 

ip-'DS 

CONJUNCTIVES. 

Servants. 

19.   Merka 

\»  / 

20.  Manahh 

\  J  / 

njsia 

21    MeiiaKh'phala 

^  m' 

nb^isa  xs"!^ 

22.    I\.alipakh 

\<  ) 

^5n^ 

23.    Darga 

\s  ) 

«^1^ 

24.    Kadhma 

/  ^  \ 

«?7:? 

25.  Yerahh  ben  Yomo 

\  v/ 

ipi-ia  n^: 

26.   T'lisha  K'lanna 

,'<  . 

ri2wp  xt^">Dn 

poetp. 

^ 

n 

-J 

•n 

•w 

^ 

n 

n 

ritt 

tt 

n 

n 

rm 

^ 

n 

n 

.TO 

IV.     Inseparable  Prepositions  and  Vav 
Conjunctive,  §§  27,  28. 

Primary  form,  ^  S  b  1 

Before  vowelless  Consonants,  3  3  b  ^* 

Before  Gutturals  with  Compound  Sh'va,  the  corresponding  short  towels 

Before  monosyllables  and  accented  syllables,  f  ^  ?  ^  * 

With  the  contracted  article,  the  towel  of  the  article. 

*  Also  before  the  labials  Z.   r ,  and  E  .  but  1  before  vowelless  Yodh. 
+  With  the  interrogative  n533,  '"Tas  ,  na^  or  frab. 

The   Preposition  fn,  He  Interrogative,  the  Article, 
AND  THE  Interrogative  ntt. 

Before  strong  consonants, 

Before    vowelless    consonants  and   strong 
gutturals, 

Before  weak  gutturals. 

Before  gutturals  with  Kamets, 

*  But  with  a  disjunctive  accent  commonly  na . 

Inseparable  Prepositions  with  Suffixes. 

Singular. 

le,     ^%  ^"^  ^pi^b?      i'9,    ^rj,"?^"J 

3/.    n^  rib'  nii?  nsis-: 

Plueal. 

3/  ifia,  '^i  i^b  —  -n-r 

8fi 


V.     Personal  Pronotjns,  ^29. 


1 
2. 


BINGULAE. 


PLURAL. 


J  Thou  m.  nn« ,  nK 
jThou/     m,^'^^ 
JHe 
(She 


We         '^n^x 
Ye  m.        DPfi? 
Ye  /.        )m,  r-'jns 
i5^n  Tbey  m.      on,  n'an 

K-'n,  «nn  §  23.  3.  They  /.       in,   nan 

Suffixes. 


^3n5       ',2K 


Simple.       With  union  Vowels  of  Verbs. 


1  c 


'h"". 


13 


■IS. 
13 


(TrJ 


3  w.  in  in 
pl,  n(i^)  D 
3/.    n        n 


,i  in^    13..  (ins..) 


,  ,D- 


n    ns 

T    »  T  ' 

1. 


■With  Sing.  Nouns.       With  Dual  trnl 
, ' ,  Plur.  ISoxiz*, 

ID.  (13  J  13\ 

^.  (^)  T, 

S3?,  D?'', 

"i   (^,  "in..)    i\(in\.,"'ni) 
D^  nn\  (ii3\) 

n  ni 

1.  1"\ 


Demonstrative. 

Masc.  Fern.  Common. 

Sing,  nr  (it)     n«T  (it,  nr)  t/iis,      Plur.  bs,  n|k  ^f//^^^. 

Relative. 
"1^55  2^^o  or  which ;  abbreviated  form  "»  ("0,  W,  ©) 

Interrogative  and  Indefinite. 
''Ta  who  ?  or  whoever,     n'a  zi?//^^  .'^  or  whatever. 

Verbs. — Their  Species,  §§  31,  32. 

1.  Simple  act.        Kal  bt3p  io  kill. 

2.  "     pass.      Niphal 

3.  Intensive  act.     Piel 

4.  "        pass.  Pual 

5.  Causative  act.    Hiphil 

6.  "         pass.  Hophal 


btjps  to  he  hilled. 

btbp)  io  kill  many  or  to  massacre^ 

biD^  to  he  massacred. 
b^bipn  to  cause  to  kill, 
b'jpn  to  he  caused  to  kill. 


7    Reflexive  Hithpael '^'^:2^^  to  kill  ones  self. 


VI.     Paradigm  of 


KAL. 

NIPUAL. 

PIEL. 

PUAL. 

Fhet. 

3  m. 

^2 

i^P? 

btap 

b|p 

3/. 

">^B 

nbt:p3 

nStpp 

nbtap 

2  m, 

J?^'^i< 

xj^i^p? 

i?^^l? 

Pb^R 

2/ 

^)^i> 

nbibp? 

Pi^^i? 

^b^l? 

1  c. 

'4'^Pr 

""^^^^p? 

"Pi^^P 

"nb'Gp 

Plur. 

3  c. 

*W. 

^btpp? 

6tsp 

*BP 

2  m. 

t3i?ft?I? 

t3tib^p? 

ClFl^^I? 

Qnb^p 

2/. 

#^1? 

li?bt:pD 

TP^^P 

li^btsp 

1   c. 

'i:^^!? 

iiDbt:p? 

^;bBp 

^i)bp^ 

Infin. 

absol. 

bitiij 

btijjn 

btsp 

b^p 

conslr. 

bb^ 

>;5)?n 

btgp 

(btR) 

FUT. 

3  m. 

btbp: 

^^1?: 

btsp: 

b^.R: 

3/ 

btipn 

!^i?pr? 

btapS!! 

bbpn 

2  m. 

btbpn 

!^t:pn 

btapr? 

btsRH 

2/ 

^btppn 

^btp^n 

-Sagn 

^bapin 

1  c. 

'^^I?^ 

^m 

btsps? 

b^Ri? 

Plur. 

3  m. 

^btppr 

^^^gr 

*^Er 

feR? 

3/. 

n^btij^n 

rijbtjpn 

T  :    "It    • 

robtapn 

rab'bpri 

2  m. 

fepn 

6ci;3n 

iilitapn 

'btspn 

2/ 

nAtipn 

!-;3bt;;i3Fi 

rabtapin 

robfepn 

1   c. 

^'^i^? 

''^i? 

b'EJE? 

'btsR? 

Impeb. 

2  m. 

btifp 

b«?)5n 

b^E 

2/ 

''btpp 

^i'^EO 

^Stjp 

Plur. 

2  m. 

fep 

6i3]3n 

6t!E 

wanting 

2/ 

a^^^ 

Hjbtiisn 

f^jbfejp 

Part. 

acf. 

^t^P 

b^E^ 

pass. 

b^g. 

b*rl?? 

bsR^ 

Peefect  Vekbs,  §§83 

-38. 

HirniL. 

EOPHAL. 

BITHPAEL. 

KAL  (mid.  e). 

KAX  (W2tZ.  o). 

^'^Ti'^ 

^irO 

btbpnn 

—  T 

bSiT 

r 

rh-b'^T] 

n5t:i?ri 

nbtfpnn 

T  :  IT 

nbM 

T    ;    rr 

p^^P*? 

^f^i?0 

J?b^E^»7 

P7i| 

nb=B 

T  :       T 

J?>^I?n 

^'r^lrO 

ribj^nn 

:  ;  — T 

rb'DU: 

:  :       T 

v)m 

"^r^IfO 

^nb^pnn 

•  :  — T 

^nbD-j: 

•  :       T 

*^I5r! 

iScj^n 

^bt^pnn 

TO3 

:  IT 

:  IT 

Oinbojjn 

Dnbcj^n 

Dnbi^^nn 

nn-?? 

i^^m 

y^i^m 

iri^"i?n 

ir=5b^]2^»7 

1J?7=? 

(iPr?^) 

^^m 

iiDbajjn 

^sbt^pnn 

:  — T 

:      T 

^ti?- 

i^I?n 

(btipnri) 

T 

bliiD 

T 

^*5I?0 

bti^Enn 

ins 

b'iiT 

b'^!?: 

-^1?: 

bfe?12^: 

"??: 

b^^: 

5^15n 

55^I?n 

b^gnn 

lisn 

bibt^n 

Hi?p} 

5=^1?P 

btognn 

lisn 

b^irn 

-b'bi^n 

'?t?i?Fl 

^biopnri 

''^^?^ 

^bs^Fi 

b'isps 

5=^15? 

btopn^ 

"?T'^ 

b?^^J5 

t^t^l 

*^!?: 

6t)pr\;; 

^^??' 

^b3^: 

rtifm 

n?^^I?!? 

njbtDprin 

ns'iliDn 

njbs'^n 

'ib'ajjri 

^ippFi 

iibtopnri 

;  I—     ;      • 

^ni^sn 

*:pirn 

"=^^I?n 

•^r-r^I?^ 

njbtopnn 

T  ;  —  :     • 

nj^^tpn 

^■•i?l?= 

baps 

^^I2r>? 

^t?? 

bsir? 

^r>ri 

btopnn 

^5? 

^^'i?I?L! 

^btppnri 

i?? 

^b%n 

wanting 

^btcpnri 

ii^n? 

™^t?pn 

nibt?pnn 

5nj"i3 

b"'ibp)j 

btbpn^j 

rl;    T 

i 

VII.    Paradigm  of  the  Pekfect 


Singular. 
1  com,        2  maso.         2  fern,        3  masc.  Sfem, 


Kal  Preterite. 

soTG.  3  masc.    ^dIIji:]^  ip^'^  ifit:^^^     iin5t:p )  rrHisjD 

B/em,    ""pr^SiDi:  ^irSx^])  "^Xf^^l^  ^»^r^'^?i??  ♦"*^5?1? 

rribt:rp  I"  . 

I  com.    —  '^I'nbt^rp  i\^vbx^^  i*^^r?  s!*^?i? 

plub.  3  com.    ^?6tjr?  '^^^^l?  "^^^^l?    ^n*t)|?  n^btji? 

2  7n.m  ^^iinbi^iD     ^n^nb'Dp  vj^fibt:]^ 

icm.     '^j^ibtif)  'q^i)bt2]5  ^n^bt:]!)  si^^t'^I? 


Infinitive.  ^btpjj  [     iTjbtJi:         tjbt)];  ibt^jj  ^Sl^); 


Future. 

plue.  3  masc,  '^'6t^j:>':  ^'^^^^':  "^^^^i??  ^H^bippp:    o^bt:)^:' 


Imperative. 
Sing.  2  masc.       "^jbplj       

^nbtpu 

f^'^I? 

Piel  Preterite. 
Sing.  3  masc.       '^pbtOp         !?jb^p 

^?^I? 

^3tpp 

t^StpR 

HiPHiL  Preterite. 
Sing.  3  masc.  -Ob^tipn   !?|b^t:pn    '?]b-^t:pn 

ib^tppn 

nb^tppn 

Verbs  with 

Suffixes, 

§  42. 

1 

1  com. 

2mase. 

Plural. 
2  fern. 

3  masc. 

3/m. 

'o5oi5 

t=?^^I? 

]bb'q^ 

b5?!3 

1^?I? 

sfinbtjfp       tDinbttj^       l^i^^I?       ^^?I?       l^^tj]: 


siDnbi^i? 

5D^tlb^l5 

^^btjp 
siD^irib^p 

^5t:i; 

Dibt:p 

V  :  T ' ; 

l^^^l? 

^1m 

l^^l? 

i|D6t)fp^ 

■jfep;' 

^^Stpp 

Q'^I? 

^Stpp 

B=r^P 

li^^p 

D^tap 

i^^I? 

?i55^tppn 

Dib-iBisn 

i?f"?i?n 

Db-'cipri 

K'^Rri 

VIII. 

Paradigm 

OF    Pe 

Guttural  Verbs, 

§53. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAU 

rffi  FUT. 

Pret.  3  m. 

—  T 

—  v.iv 

^^^?;D 

,                 1 
—  t:   IT 

bi^" 

3/. 

T    :  viv 

-   r    :  T  IT 

bsNFl 

2771. 

^ip. 

^y^u 

T  :   —  v:  IV 

mrgrj 

bisn 

2/. 

m^. 

:  :  —  v.r.' 

trihyri 

;  :   —  t:    it 

-55sn 

1  e. 

•  :  — T 

•  :  -Y.iv 

•  :   -V.IV 

•  :  — t:   «t 

b3> 

Plur.  3  c. 

^i:^ 

:  viv 

•    V   IV 

:  T  IT 

:      1 

2m. 

t)jn7'^? 

V  :   —  v:iv 

V  :  —  v:  IV 

v  •  —n   it 

njbDHTi 

2/ 

1^7^? 

1  V  :  -v.iv 

]il:)y?^ti 

li?7'^^v 

^^3?Kn 

1  c. 

^=7^? 

^37i?3 

J   —  v:  IV 

wbyn 

Infin.  -46so^. 

T 

T    1" 

"^^V 

Tbyn 

•■•r.   it 

CoTwrr. 

^^? 

..  f  ,.• 

•  -;  I- 

—  t:   it 

KAL{fut.a,) 

FuT.  8  m. 

-a- 

T^?: 

"7"??;: 

— -nrr 

Zf. 

-:  1- 

Tbsn 

••  T  r* 

•  -:  1- 

—  t:  IT 

pmn 

2wi. 

-:  1- 

1';?P] 

'^^^?.^ 

—  n  it 

piai 

2/. 

^l53?n 

•    :  IT  •• 

•  -:  1- 

•    :  t  IT 

T.tnn 

Ic. 

v:  IV 

i'^^^ 

•  -:  1- 

—  t:   nr 

pi™ 

P^MT.  8  m. 

si'i^r 

:  IT" 

•  -a- 

^112T 

:  TIT 

^pio.: 

8/. 

T  :      -:  I- 

r  :    •■  T  1- 

T  :    ••-:  1- 

r  :   —  t:   it 

nji^inn 

2  m. 

:  —  1- 

^Tjrn 

•  -:  r 

:  T  IT 

^pTnn 

'  :   V  IV 

2/ 

nj'|Ia5f} 

r  :    ••  T  i~ 

T  :    ••  -:  1- 

T  :   —  r:   it 

nDprnn 

Ic. 

-a- 

••  n- 

^'^,= 

-t:it 

^Pii 

Ikpbb.  2f?i' 

^^? 

••  T  r* 

••  -r   I- 

Pi^ 

2/ 

"•7^? 

^^12^'tl 

•     :  IT  " 

^TV?!\} 

wanting 

^pjn 

iVwr.  2  m. 

:  • 

'^T2Tn 

:  IT  •• 

•  -:  1- 

iipjn 

2/. 

r  i       -: 

T  :    ••  T  r* 

T  ;    ••  -:  1- 

a^ptt! 

Pabt.  Act. 

"VSS 

"T*^?":? 

PasB. 

nty 

rzy: 

^^?P. 

1 

IX. 

Paradigm 

or  Ayin 

Guttural  Verbs 

,  ^54. 

KAL. 

KIPHAL. 

riEL. 

PUAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

Pbet.  3  m. 

—  T 

"^^Tt 

bi<? 

bS3 

ii??^:- 

3/ 

T  -:iT 

»^bi^f? 

f^^!!?,? 

n'is'a 

T  -;  1 

hBsann 

T  -:(T  : 

2m. 

ijb^j? 

Pb5?3 

nbi^b 

nb&^rinn 

T  :  —  T   :    • 

2/ 

Ipb^n 

i^^^;*? 

i?^i<5 

nb.<?B 

pib^^^r^ 

\c. 

•  :  — T 

^nb^jD 

'i!i^!^5 

•'nbi^b 

''nbi^^nn 

Plur.  3  c. 

~:iT 

^^^f? 

*?? 

^bjsib 

-:iT   ;    • 

2  m. 

DFibsa 

t3ijb]j?3D 

Qi?r^i 

Drnb^h 

Dnb^^•inn 

V  :  —IT  :     • 

2/. 
le. 

:  — T 

inb^3i 

I  V  :  —  :  • 

^2bK?D 

siDbi?3 

-inb]j^r.nn 

1  V  :  —IT  :    • 

iisbj^snn 

• 

iNFDf.  Adsol. 

bij^-» 

T 

bfen 

••  T 

Constr 

b^ 

bj^sn 

••  T     • 

bi«a 

••  T 

Fur,  8  m. 

—  I  * 

^^y 

^^^?r 

bkb: 

^^?J?? 

3/. 

l5i??n 

••  T      • 

••  T   : 

bi^bn 

bw^^nn 

2  m. 

hksc\ 

••  T      • 

bi^jn 

bjkbn 

bj^^nn 

2/ 

-^^f^ 

^5X51? 

•   ~:iT  : 

vs^?j^ 

'^^|riri 

1(5. 

iji??!* 

••T  -: 

bi^bist 

^^5^? 

Plur.  8  w. 

i5s5: 

-;it; 

^^y: 

^^iistjn.^ 

3/ 

T  :  —  :    • 

njb^jn 

T  :  —       ; 

nDbi^Binn 

2  m. 

ii3K?n 

sibiJt^n 

^b]s;3n 

-:iT   : 

^bNtbn 

^b>^rirn 

~:iT  :    • 

2/. 
Ic. 

"5?  to 

nwb&?5ri 
'*bto 

••T« 

bto 

"Ti 

n:bten 

nibi^-inpi 

T  :  — T   :    • 

bi^r^w 

••  T    ;  • 

Impke.  2  m. 

bi?? 

bi^iin 

••  T      • 

••  T 

^i<$^n 

2/ 

^bjs;5 

•    -;iT   • 

^bj}5!» 

•    -:iT 

•wanting 

"^^.^^n 

P^ttr.  2  w. 

-:iT  • 

*N3 

~:iT 

^^?5^r^ 

2/ 

njb^? 

T  ;  — T    • 

riDbi^^ri 

T  :  — T 

^Jb^55r\n 

Past.  ^c^. 

bi?a 

bjkj7j 

••T    : 

^^?r^"-? 

Pa«. 

b^ii^a 

b^55 

bw>^i:a 

I 

X.   Paradigm 

OF  Lamedh  Guttural  Veebs,  ^55. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

HIPHTT,. 

HlTHPAKl. 

Pbbt.  3  m. 

n3TD 

-  X 

n3^D 

r&t 

^'■'^^♦7 

8/ 

nniti 

mib^3 

nnbic 

nn^b^n 

T     •     ;    • 

nhbnirn 

T  ;    ~    ;    • 

2  w. 

T  ;  ~    T 

nnbii? 

T  :  -    • 

rnb-izjn 

T  :  -    :    • 

T  :  ~    -    :    • 

2/ 

nn3i£ 

J T 

nn^Ts? 

•  —  • 

nnbirn 

:  --    i    • 

rinbri^n 

le. 

*^innbti 

^riniir? 

w^i? 

^nnbirn 

^rtfimn 

Plur.  8  6. 

:  IT 

ilftblTD 

sihbiD 

^n^^n 

iiftbnirn 

2  m, 

drinb^ 

ohnbicD 

V  ;  -    :  • 

V  ;   -   • 

dmb'^n  tDnnbnidn 

2/ 

m^^ 

innbiDD 

1  V  :  -    :  • 

irj^^b^ 

]T\nbzT} 

innbn^n 

)  V  :  -  -    i    • 

Ic, 

:  -   T 

mbiD? 

ilDn|l2i 

!i3nbirn 

JiDnbn^ari 

Infin.  Absol 

niSti 

ri^TD? 

r!l?T? 

r^!?^n 

Constr. 

ri'i^ 

nbi^n 

r6w 

n-b'^n 

nbn^'n 

Fur.  8  m. 

nbti: 

nbti: 

r6& 

r^^^iri^. 

rials': 

3/ 

n5ian 

nbisn 

n^m 

-        •        ;       - 

n^nicn 

2  m. 

nbui'n 

~     T     • 

nltiin 

n^b^n 

■n5)n^n 

2/ 

••ribtiri 

•^nb^n 

*fibtiri 

•^n-'b'^rn 

^nbnirn 

Ic. 

-     :  V 

nb^i§ 

nim 

n-'biTi? 

-      -      «      V 

PZwn  3  m. 

"rht: 

^bigr 

^nbiD';' 

^n^i^l 

iiinbriir: 

8/ 

njnbisn 

niin^tiri 

n:rib"i2:'n  nDnbn-in  1 

2  w. 

iinb'cn 

^ribign 

iinbtin 

^rr'Sirn 

^nbripn 

2/ 

njnb^n 

njnbisn 

nDnlTD'n 

njnSirn  njnbn^n 

Ic. 

nS^r? 

nbuJD 

-      T' 

nV^p 

^'i^'^? 

nlnizjp 

Impke.  2  m. 

nbir 

n5iBn 

-      T      • 

n^ir 

nbirn 

nbrnrn 

2/ 

''nbti 

"^nbirn 

X^w 

"n^b-^'n 

•'ribn^n 

PZur.  2  wi. 

iifib^ 

iinb'igri 

^hbis 

^n^pTsri 

iinbnisn 

2/. 

njnbTs 

T   :  -    T    • 

n^niis 

njnbi^n  njnbnirn 

Pabt.  ^c«. 

^!?^ 

T^^^^ 

^'3^'^ 

nbn^^ 

P(W«. 

n^bti 

rtbiDD 

T 

T    :  • 

XL 

Paradigm  of  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  ^  56. 

KAL. 

lapnAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

KAL. 

PEET.3m. 

TSiD 

1D'5P 

iii^iin 

-  \ 

1^? 

8/. 

f^^?.? 

T  :  • 

T        •      • 

nton 

T  :iT 

2m, 

^^55 

niri? 

i?«5n 

T    :  -  s 

nfn5 

T    — T 

2/ 

:    :  — T 

n-jp'i? 

Flic -in 

:    :  —   • 

ritar; 

n^D 

:  — T 

I  6. 

^rnrii 

Tl"^5? 

"ntDsri 

•      — T 

Piter.  3  c. 

SliD55 

iiir*'?n 

:  IT 

2m. 

V    :  — ; 

dniDS^ 

V    :  —  • 

DriTD'an 

Drit^i 

2/. 

1^^55 

1J5^'5? 

l^^i'H 

W^. 

lm 

Ic. 

siD^i; 

^r^'5? 

^Dicin 

:  -  \ 

-T 

Infin,  Ahsol, 

iDii2 

T      • 

itiin 

1^1 

Conatr. 

V  V 

'»fi??n 

iri-'^n 

nri 

Ftjt.  3  m. 

•©5: 

••T     • 

■ti"?: 

T^: 

3/ 

iDin 

"T     • 

TD'^an 

isan 

Iflpl 

2  w. 

isan 

Tfl'^nn 

•can 

Iflpl 

2/ 

•:iT  . 

^^ifl'^an 

•"i'an 

"sriri 

le. 

1S|i$ 

12J?|S< 

TD'^Si? 

iisaijj 

IP!? 

Plur.  8  w. 

iiicr 

;  IT  • 

^12 '^a;: 

vi'a^ 

iDFl" 

8/. 

np^sri 

T    :  "T   • 

njir'^n 

n;ir'an 

(nsrin) 

2m, 

^izisn 

:iT  • 

iiiD'^iin 

ii-i'an 

!i3nn 

2/. 

njTsan 

T    :  "T   • 

njiD'an 

mi^. 

(ratip) 

Ic. 

1D55 

TDiS? 

•ffi'-aD 

im 

Imper.  2  «k 

1233 

^?.?ri 

•ffi?!! 

t- 

2/ 

^fe'B 

^'ic'risn 

^Tfi^in 

wanting 

in 

P?wr.  2  w». 

^b? 

:iT  • 

iiiD'''5n 

!i3n 

2/. 

nj-^a 

T    :  "T   • 

njiflari 

(ni^D) 

Pabt.  Act, 

TS'ib 

iD'-'ag 

Itii 

Pass. 

is'^ij 

T  • 

p^iz 

1*3 

1                            ' 

XII.     Paradigm  os  Ayin 


Peet.  3  m. 

8/ 
2  m. 

2/ 
le. 

Plur.  3  c, 
2  m. 

2/. 
Ic. 


KAL. 


—  T 

nino 
(Dnnnp) 


^5 

T    — 
T  — 


ncD 


T    — T 


nines 
ni2D5 

— T 

Dhinos 


ii^incD 


FIHs 


nniio 
linio 

:     I 

cinnnio 


Infix.  Absol. 
Constr, 


T 


20 
10 


n6n 


niio 


FuT.  3  m. 

8/ 

2m, 

2/ 

P?wr.  8  m. 


20^ 

T 

aon 

T 

non 

T 
T 

T 

^no' 


no: 
nsn 

V 


niion 
ndicn 

*    :      I    : 


8/. 

T 

nrion 

:  • 

T  :        • 

njnfen 

:      1  : 

naniicn 

2  m. 

ii:aor, 

T 

^isn 

^n|n 

tinicn 

:      1    : 

2/ 

ijnsn 

njnfen 

njndicn 

Ic. 

noj 

ID? 

n&D 

^iy^} 

Tmpee.  2  m. 

no 

n?n 

nnio 

2/ 

^no 

^nDH 

^^iiniD 

PZ«r.  2  m. 

^no 

iinferi 

^dnio 

2/ 

a^^^9 

njiDn 

•^,^??'^o 

Part.  -4c«. 

^?P 

niio^j 

Pass, 

s^io 

=^9? 

DOUBIJID 

Verbs,  ^57. 

HIPIUL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAKT^ 

PIEL. 

=^5^! 

2bTi 

^i?=? 

nncn 

T    ••     •• 

tl'^bTi 

nininon 

T  :  :  • 

T          •  -: 

riniincri 

^5??? 

niiicq 

:  :  —         :    • 

ip^o^p 

^niioq 

^raniFiDn 

T9^?? 

^^?n 

^fciin 

^ninpn 

^i??o 

Dmcn 

fiinnniriDin 

dn^cipo 

iJ?^'^?a 

■jnnninon 

1^???? 

^3iiicq 

iiDniinDn 

^DDO^D 

^tri 

■^^^^ 

^?0 

inincn 

"qc::-? 

"T 

it^^ 

^=i^^?: 

^???: 

non 

no^n 

niinon 

^i^?cn 

^?jp) 

nc^n 

niinon 

^fc?5n 

...    X 

^sfa^n 

^ipincn 

'^???^ 

^t!? 

nbiiij^ 

:  V 

■^^T?? 

^s?: 

^lao^'^ 

:      1  :  • 

^DDlDp': 

T     V  •    : 

T  :  ••         :    • 

Jn^ipciDcn 

iinfcn 

^:ao^n 

:       1   :•  • 

J  :  —  : 

ni^iiDD 

T  :  "          :    • 

TOfcDcn 

^  ^?? 

n&ii5 

"^i??? 

^?i7 

niircri 

^?95 

•     "    T 
••     T 

wanting 

•  1  •  * 

•   :  :  — 

T     V  •   -: 

njnnlncn 

^?^T? 

^^'Q 

nb'ra 

T 

niinc/j 

1 

1 

1 

u 

s^III.     Pai 

SIADIGM    OP 

Ayin  Vav 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

PUAL. 

Pbet.  3  m. 

0)? 

Dip; 

Di;ip 

d^bip 

j               8/. 

^'5R 

n^jipD 

n^^ail^ 

rra^ip5 

2m 

nafe 

nib^p? 

n/j^ip 

ri^rip 

2/ 

P-J2 

nii^ipD 

ri7jiip 

n-^tip 

Ic. 

-^qt 

^)nii2iip5 

•^ri^^bip 

^mbip 

Plur.  8  c. 

I'Jlj 

^)^ipD 

^m^^ 

waiij 

2  m. 

Di?'?l2 

Dhi}jip5 

DFl/fjip 

dn-f^ii: 

2/. 

#^E 

l^'i'^^'l?? 

li?"-??ir? 

tP?^ 

Ic. 

«7J13 

iiaii^ps 

^D^fbip 

^27fbip 

Infin.  ^5«oZ. 

Dip 

ciipn 

Comtr. 

Q^P 

Dipn 

D^bip 

Fur.  3  m. 

qt; 

Dnp*; 

CJ^^T'; 

Bbip^ 

8/. 

Q^pri 

Dipn 

D7bipn 

dtipn 

am. 

Dipn 

Dipn 

Diiipn 

d'bipn 

2/. 

"aiijin 

*'!aipn 

^^wpy\ 

^Wp^ 

1«. 

D^ps 

tf^n 

c?T^ 

d7bipH 

Plur.  8  m. 

la^p: 

ii?^ip: 

^topj)': 

"^^m 

8/. 

nr^ipPi 

nj^Jipn 

n57j7bipPi 

nj72'bipn 

2m. 

iCTpn 

siripn 

iii^^ipn 

ii^brjipn 

2/. 

rr^?!pk 

nj/jipri 

rajtipi^i 

ni2^Tp7\ 

Ic 

wp? 

dip? 

'  '^tP) 

d7bip5 

Tmpeb.  2  m. 

Dp 

dipn 

di3ip 

2/. 

^ja^ip 

''^jipn 

^yn% 

wanting 

PZwr.  2  m. 

*ia^p 

si/:3ipri 

ii?b^jif? 

2/ 

"'# 

np7:3ipri 

nj^fbip 

Pabt.  ^cj;. 

ffe 

dtip^ 

Pa«. 

Dlji 

Qip; 

d7bip!a 

98 


AND    AyIN 

YoDH  Verbs,  ^.59. 

HIPHIL. 

nOPHAL. 

HITIIPAEL. 

KAL. 

C3')?n 

Dpn 

D:biprri 

^i 

^"5'j?n 

rv2p}n 

TV2'/2'ypt\'n 

"?^ 

rt^^n 

(n'?fe^n) 

ij7j^jipnri 

nin    riiii^:! 

n^j'^pq 

(n-^^^n) 

mbipnri 

^?^ 

't)1:a^pr! 

(^n:^fe^n) 

^n/^^bipinn 

"ran   ^nii^^ 

^■-'I?n 

^:ji'^^ri 

^/i52ipnri 

Sinn      ^n^S 

onv^ipn  (DPjt)i2^n) 

Dn/fjipnn 

t3^?? 

'jhta'^ipfi 

(OT^^J) 

-|r)!a!aSpnri 

1^?^ 

ii3i/i'^pn 

(^3/^j2^n) 

ii3/fbipm 

ilDnS 

t3pn 

nin      n^i 

t3^pn 

criipnn 

.  ^"? 

t3^p: 

Dfe^"' 

D/bipin;' 

•  T 

D^pn 

Dp^n 

Qisiprr) 

n^nn 

tD^lbn 

dp^n 

d"bipnn 

•  r 

••ss^pn 

^"bp^n 

^i2/jipnn 

•       •     T 

D^PN 

dp^5^ 

ci^^Tr^J? 

n^njj 

^iTii: 

^^m 

^^-^ipn^ 

iin^n" 

njs^ibn 

(ns^jb^n) 

nj/jyjipt^^n 

^^'1?^ 

ii!ap^ri 

^/j/jipnn 

•     T 

^J^^fep) 

(nj^jp^n) 

nj/fbiprn 

as^'ip 

C3t? 

Dp^S 

d/bipn? 

QRO 

d^bipm 

ai 

''^s'fPO 

wanting 

^'i^aipnr; 

"?'"? 

^^^pn 

^^^^ipm 

wi 

^P^-^PO 

nrjijip^ri 

(™?^.) 

t3^P'5 

d/bipxn''j 

=^ 

oibw 

MT 

i 

99 


XIV 

.    Paradigm  of 

Pe  Yodh 

Verbs,  §  58.            ! 
^                  1 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

KAL. 

Peet.  3  m. 

na; 

n-ilD 

n^iain 

niriin 

"T 

3/ 

T    :  IT 

T         • 

T  :iT 

2  m. 

T  :   — r 

nnffit 

T  ;    — 

nnir^n 

!?■#: 

2/. 

:   :    -T 

:  :  — 

nnirin 

nnir^n 

ntin: 

Ic. 

^nrng; 

^riniriD 

^nnibin 

•   :   — 

'p">??: 

Plur.  3  e. 

:  IT 

:    1 

^2''Tr1n 

:       1 

:  IT 

2  m. 

V  :  — : 

dnnisl^ 

V  ;   —      1 

V   :   -      1 

•••  :  — : 

2/ 

m»: 

I  V  :  -    1 

'l^^^^'^'n 

li???^n  1 

•jriirn': 

Ic. 

:   — T 

^sniriD 

:   — 

iisiir^in 

^Dird; 

Intin.  Alsol. 

T 

niiiin 

! 

r 

Constr, 

V     V 

n^^rin 

niB^n 

: 

FuT.  3f». 

^^?. 

n-'^ri'^ 

:i^r 

'^5'? 

8/ 

^"©^ 

nijjn 

n''T2Jin 

n-c^n 

Tzin^ri 

2  m. 

=i^^ 

••T     • 

n-^isin 

n-i^n 

iri'^n 

2/. 

•'i^^jn 

^n^iBin 

^iuj^n 

^?T? 

Ic. 

=^"i?^ 

^^^ 

n^iriu^ 

nuj^i^ 

TZii^N; 

P^wr.  3  m. 

:iT* 

iin^OT 

niTi)^ 

ii-ia-^;; 

3/. 

J^J?"??? 

r   :     -r    • 

T  :    •• 

T   :   — 

nj^i^t? 

2  m. 

:  !•• 

:iT  • 

nn^iin 

:      1 

^liia-n 

2/ 

njnTcri 

r   :    "T   • 

njniin 

r   :    - 

nr'cn^n 

Ic. 

^^? 

•■T« 

n^i?i3 

niD"il3 

^4^? 

Impeb.  2  m. 

^^ 

••T      • 

n^in 

TTi^ 

2/ 
PW.  2  m. 

: 

•    :iT  • 
:iT   • 

wanting 

2/ 

T   :     •• 

TOiT^^n 

nj^n^ 

Paet.  ^c«. 

^T 

n'^Tcii3 

tn'-' 

Pass. 

u^b'; 

niBlD 

T 

T 

[-  XV. 

Paradigm  of  LAMEDti'  Aleph  ViIabs 

^ '. J D >     >    »  J    ■  J '    ^.       ^    .       ' 

5,    §60. 

KAL. 

JllPHAL.  - 

-       *  PlY.jl.i 

-  -    I21THPAEL. 

Pekt.  3  m. 

sia 

T    :  • 

^k? 

{5<"r^n 

J^^i^^nn 

3/ 

i^??» 

T    :    :  • 

T    :    • 

T      •    :    • 

n^jr^nn 

2  m. 

nsi-o 

K^^'r^ 

T             ••     • 

r^T2Tn 

r        ..  —  :    . 

2/. 

tiNia 

.. . . 

nj^kr) 

3^^^?^n 

riv^k-jinri 

Ic. 

•ms7| 

''n^^rj? 

^nnrj 

"n.sr^n 

T.^^f3:■2nn 

Flur,  3  6. 

:  IT 

:    :  • 

:    • 

^K^k^an 

^i^si^rn 

2  m, 

T    : 

.. . 

.. . . 

2/. 

l^^?'-? 

If}^^?"-?? 

1    V         ••    • 

in^^^n 

'in.sr^rri 

Ic. 

T     T 

^^^?"t? 

^:&<k-j 

^2sr^ri 

r.^k^2t)ri 

iNrm.  -45«oi 

T 

jj^i-^D 

^ii7^ 

5^?^n 

Constr 

.      Jj^'i^^ 

••     T      • 

^k'^ 

^^''^"ft! 

^k^^nri 

FuT.  3  m. 

T    :  • 

^i'Q) 

iH^^pT 

^^■=^? 

3/ 

T    ;     • 

^¥^^ 

j^i^^n 

t^^T2ir\ 

^rjrin 

2  w. 

T    :    • 

••     T      • 

i^^^jn 

K^ir^an 

j^k-^nn 

2/. 

•    :    :    • 

•    :   IT  • 

^iji^-^n 

^^^TCTTl 

^i^^12t)T) 

1<J. 

T    :    V 

^m 

^?"^^ 

^'kv^ 

^k'2Tt^ 

Plur,  3  w. 

^ki'T 

'^ki^': 

^ksi^^ 

^^"k'T 

:  —  :  • 

3/ 

T       V    :     • 

T            V     T       • 

njsj^^^an 

ri;^h2r\ 

T       •••-:• 

2«i. 

"^kl-Wi 

:   IT  • 

^bisi-^n 

^5<"i-jn 

^N27::nn 

:   —   ;    • 

2/ 

T       V   :    • 

T            V     T      ' 

njj^-k-^n 

r        V    :    — 

ti:^k'2tT\ 

T        •••—:• 

Ic. 

T    :  • 

••     T  • 

J^?"??? 

J^T91 

^^=^? 

Impee.  2  m. 

T   : 

••     T     • 

xM 

5^?"tl! 

t^k'2m 

2/. 

^■kT2 

•    :   IT  • 

^iks"j 

'^j^t^ii^rn 

^«r^nri 

PZwr.  2  m. 

^ix:27j 

^^^^n 

^^<2i■g 

si.s^k"-:!! 

^N;2S7^nri 

2/ 

T       V   : 

T            V     T      • 

r        V  — 

T       V   :  — 

njfcd-jnri 

Paet.  Act, 

N^b 

• 

^?"J7J 

K^rfj 

i^kmj 

Pass. 

x^r^ 

^?^? 

101 


■  ••"  ^'    :XVI. 

Paradigm 

OF  Lamedh 

\  '  '  ■  ;  ,xkt.\  ■ ,,' 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

PfiET.  3  m. 

n55 

n&? 

n|3 

8/ 

•^^^3 

nnbaa 

T  :  :  • 

nh^a 

2«i. 

i?^^? 

T    ••  ;  • 

rci^a 

2/ 

m^Sa 

n^Va? 

r^a 

I  6, 

•       •     T 

"p-'bias 

•tr% 

Plur.  3  e. 

«3 

■*?? 

^% 

2m, 

t^t'^? 

6^-b?? 

Dh-'^a 

V      ■    • 

2/. 

1^'?? 

'^i? 

1^^>? 

Ic. 

«'i)3 

i='5m 

^')Ja 

Infin.  J[5»(??. 

n5a 

T 

n% 

rft'a 

Constr. 

rilJan 

T      • 

ri^a 

FuT.  3  m. 

nb'a- 

V    T  • 

nVv 

3/. 

niJan 

V   T      • 

nVarn 

2  m. 

n33n 

V  T     • 

n)!5n 

2/ 

"bi? 

^b'an 

^&n 

10. 

".^?« 

^  . 

"i^? 

P^wr.  8  m. 

«r 

% 

i5a: 

8/ 

nr^?!? 

nrb'sn 

T      V   T      • 

nj-'larn 

2  w. 

fen 

!i«an 

T      • 

^^an 

2/ 

TV:    • 

^'^'IPI 

nrVan 

1(5. 

V   :  • 

-.^5? 

'm^53 

V  — : 

lMPBE.2m. 

n5a 

nlJan 

nVa 

2/. 

^^? 

^San 

•    T     • 

^);3 

PZwr.  2  w. 

^Ba 

1^3" 

=1^3 

2/ 

™1a 

^'in 

nr^? 

Pabt.  ^c«. 

nba 

' 

n>ba 

Paw. 

^6a 

f^5?? 

i 

102 


He  Verbs,  §61, 


PTJAL.  HIPHIL.  nOPHAL.  HITHPAEL. 

T  •..  T  :     •  T  :    T  Y  —     .     .           ] 

nh^B  ninbjn  mnb^n  nrVstin 

T  :  •.,  T  :  ;     •  t  :  :    t  t  :  —  :    • 

n^b'^  n-'b^n  n^bbrj  Jn'b'^nri 

Ti^ba  T^^fH  T'^fO  ^0'^?rn 

D^i^b^  tDSn^bjH  ^^'^fO  i2ri^f?J^»7 

'jjn-'bB  1^)"^?"  it'^fO  it^'r?^*? 

iirb'^  r--b'3n  ^j^bbfi  ^3"^|rlrI 

(jibii)  ^b*?»j  »^b'?»7  (>^^5r^r}) 

nby  nb'r  nb'y  nV^in;^ 

nbbn  nbrin  nbr^n  nb'iinD 


V  \  : 

I 


n^nn  mjD  rojn  n^r^nn 


\    : 


r3T 

V  :  - 

V  :  T 

nb;?n 

V  :   Y 

"^?^ 

nbr^n 

V  :    r 

-i.n 

-b;m 

".y?^ 

ob'^ij 

^B?: 

^^iC 

T    V  :  — 

rirb'^n 

6;.n 

^OjT) 

T    V  :  — 

nrbjn 

r^:i3 

nb:a 

^u\ 


^&n  ^b3n  ^b'jn  ^fenn 

ii!?y'  &p  fe^  ^b'sn 


nrb'jpi  nrb'3n  rirb'^n  ns^b'jwn 

T    V  ••.   :  T    V  :  —  T    V  :    T  r    v  —  :    • 

nrb:»n  nri'm  nrb^n  nrbsnn 

T    V  ••.   :  T    V  :  —  T    V  ;    T  r    v  —  :    • 

n^j"  n^ro  n^ro  n^nri!] 

wanting  ^'bjtl  wanting  ''?5^»7 

V  %.  :  V  :    T 


XV^II.    Declension  of  IVouns,  §§  44-47. 

I.  Nouns  loliich  suffer  a  change  in  the  vowels  only, 
i.     With  Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult. 


Sing   dhs,      p'"T>^  master  Const,    'llljjj^ 

-^i^lT  memorial  p^pT 


PL.  Als.  d^iiii^ 


yb/'^  interpreter 


r.-^ 


Const.  "ipl^iS 


Masc  bilTi  great  Fern.  nb1l!i 

T  T 

b^ltOD  Kal.  pass.  part.       Hb^tOp 

)  r  T  I: 

ii.     With  Tsere  in  the  ultimate, 
a.  Monosyllables 

Sing.  Ahs.         V^  tree.  Const      V"^       Pl.  Abs.    U^%V  Const   155 

h.  Polysyllables  having  pretonic  Kamets  in  the  penult. 

Sing.  Ahs-.       ^53  heavy  Const  Ili^or^^S      Pl.  Als.  t]"''l55         Const  '^1^3 
Masc.  '©5'i  dry       Ftm.    ntO'l"!  -^^^c.  C^"l2?n"|        -^«»^-  riitUH"! 

c.  Polysyllables  having  any  other  vowel  than  Kamets  in  the 
penult. 

Sing.  Ahs.    ID  pill?  judge.  Const    t:Sll25    Pi-    ^&5.  lD"ipSp        (^onst  ^p3^ 

•  .  '  .  '  .  y  '  -J   '- 

Masc.  btOD  KaL  Act. part.  Fem-ubtOP  or  DbtDp  ^^«sc.  t:"'::tip        ^'C'».  iTi:Dtip 

•■I  •       T     :   h  V   V    I  •     :    )i  :   )  I 

btop.^pieipart.     nbV'2  orjnb^.p.^     t]^btpp/9        ri1btop.)2 

iii.     With  Kamets  in  the  ultimate. 

?iNO.  Abb  ti'l  fish  Const       t^T 

nnb 

Fein.    ri/2!Dn 


"?25'^p^  sanctuary 

T  I:    * 
I 

^'2*1  word 
*|53?  cloud 


ninb  heart 
^a<ff.     SDH  wise 


PL.  Ahs.     n'^'j'l 

C0H5f.       15*^ 

n^iip'o 

'?5"=Tp)p 

tD^-in^ 

'1?1 

^'?T?. 

^?;,^. 

tj^nib 

'5?b 

btDp?  ^'ipli-  part. 


nbtpp?ornbt)pj   Q'^bijp?         J^'^-^^^j?? 


XVII.    Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47. 


iv.     With  fir 

lal  n,. 

1                                                                  1 

SiNO.  Ahfi.    'n^'^72   appearance   Const  n>iC\^ 

PL. 

Al)s 

ti^^^n 

Const 

^^^y^. 

njp   roed 

n?? 

^^^?r 

'? 

Masc,      nS)'^    fair 

V    T 

1 

Fern.     nS"" 

T    T 

M3SC.    d^ST 

•     T 

Fern. 

T 

V.     Segbolates. 

SisQ.  Abs.       Tjb/3  king 

^''"^''-  "^i^"? 

PL. 

Abs. 

D^Dbv] 

Const 

'pi^^? 

1 
"1^1 5  covert 

^DP 

^'l^HD 

^iv? 

t3^5?  strength 

Dii 

•    T  t: 

'^?? 

i:P3  lord 

b>:i 

D\b:pn 

"'•^^-^ 

ri1)p  death 

&ii^ 

t3\Sl^ 

■•riiT^ 

Y^l  eye 

r? 

Dual 

^''TZ 

^?'? 

■     bppfoot 

hi 

^ii"^?!! 

^^'?^- 

•^fj!^  ear 

1^ 

t'P.TJjJ 

••  :  T 

II.  Nouns  wliiclt  doiihle  their  final  con  sonant, 

SiNQ.  Abs.        b/C!\  camel  Const      b^fi     Pl-    ^&s-    Q"'f)^f\         C'o»5f.    ^b)?? 

ntl?     Dual.  S"i5»^* 


"i"^  garden 
pn  statute 
ntp'  tooth 
Masc*      VO^  small 
M:^  deep 


np)23? 


^""I^^? 


^6s.      ^in??  Hebrew  Cowsi. '^'H^S?  Pl.^Z;s.  tD'^^^H:^  orH^n^S?  Const'^^yz'^ 
Masc    "^nt:  fresh  i''cw.      ^i'^'^'OMasc.  D''^'1p       '^^'^-  rii''"}p 

III.  Ofhe?'  nouns  suffer  no  change, 

SiNQ  ^&s.t2J^ib)5  garmeot      Co?tsf.  ^':]ib^  Pl.  J&5.  tD^tp^^b??  Const,  """uj^^b^ 

I  t  I 

Masc.  ;nitO  good  Fern.    HIHIlJ  ^«5c.  Q^^ltO     ^''c'^i-      iHlnltD 

b^ppTQ   Hiph.part.     Hb^pfp^O  or  ribtOp)2       a^b-ipp)?      ilfi^tpp^ 


XVII.    Declension  of  Nouns,  §§  44-47 


Nouns  with  the  feminine  ending  n^. 
i.     With  Kamets  or  Tsero  in  the  penult. 

SiNQ.  Ahs.       X^y^  fish         Const            ^yr^    Pl.  Ahs.        tlli'^  Const     ^yyr^ 

n?5pD  vengeauce                  t^^^^                      jTlTOpD  ni?iDD 

nsip  lip                   tnstp  ^"^^-     D^.^isfe  ^nsi? 

ii.     From  Segholiites. 

SiNC.  ^&i>.    ni)?^  queeu       Co.i6-«.        n^b)2    Pl-  Ahs.    nlDb)2    Co>w(.     tllDb^ 

nnrrp  covert             mnrip            ninnp  nlnrip 

n?2:5:3?  strength           ri^in^*           nl)2:£3?  nl)2':s:s> 

iii.     All  others. 

Sing.  Ahs.        n5_!i  garden        Const          ^15!^    Pl-  ^&s.        ^iIB^  Cons^.     ^^135 

ni^^^ti^.  salvation          n?Ttri\          tiii^^'T  m*3?^tri^ 

Nouns  with  the  feminine  ending  n. 

SiNG.^&5-ri"l?ptDp  observance  Con5i.ri"}.72'!i) 72  P^,  Ahs.  m'"l)2I9?2  C^ou5^.  tli-|)2'2J?2 

npii^  sucker            tp^v           nipDv  nipip 

I V  V                                                           I V  V                                           )     :      I  III 

nb!ib!i  skull              tib!ib!i            m'b!ib3  ni'risb-i 

nnn:^  Hebrew-woman       ^^13?                    ^I''"!.??  ^i^^l?? 

n^.ib??  kingdom                  n^Db)2                    f^l^^.bTD  tll^pb^ 
_                                                      _ 


XVIII.   P4BADIGM    OF 

Nouns  with 

Suffixes, 

H9. 

SiNGULAE. 

heart      '±b 

king       1\bt 

queen     JlSb^J 

hand     ^^ 

T 

C(miU 

^^ 

IV   V 

n|b73 

T 

Sing.  1  c.  my 

'^?^ 

u 

^i^a 

(( 

*#^ 

(i 

2  m.  thy 

nnnb 

!  ;  it: 

(( 

^?^? 

t( 

!?5r\3b7j 

i( 

'^: 

2/  thy 

^^ 

u 

^#3 

(( 

Tjnsb^j 

(( 

t: 

8  m.  his 

^■i?^ 

u 

iiiba 

(( 

ih3b7j 

(( 

"it 

8/  her 

T  T  ; 

u 

T  ;  — 

u 

T  T  J    ~" 

u 

P!^- 

riur,  1  c,   our 

••  T  ; 

(( 

^35^'5 

(( 

^Dnsb/^ 

u 

1=5 

2  i».  your 

Dinnb 

V  ;  — ; 

(( 

disb^j 

V  ;  ;  — 

(( 

oinsb^j 

it 

q^t: 

2/   your 

)  V  :  -  ; 

(( 

psb^j 

1  V  :  :  — 

(( 

1?J^?^^ 

u 

i?7: 

8  m.  their 

Diinb 

T  T  ; 

(( 

D|b^ 

u 

dteb^j 

t( 

or 

8/.  their 

]^i? 

u 

ll^? 

ti 

]ih 

u 

Plueal. 

D 

V  i.h. 

hearts  D^inb  kings  D'^bb^J 

queens  niib"^ 

iiands  D*'!*' 

(7(ww«. 

-±± 

"iba 

niDb7j 

ir 

5^*71^.  1  <J.  my 

u 

"iba 

u 

•^nisb^j 

t( 

i: 

2  m,  thy 

^^inb 

I    V  T  : 

4( 

*11^'? 

u 

T^^4^ 

i( 

Tt 

2/  thy 

T^?^ 

(( 

Ti^'? 

(( 

Ttl^*^^^ 

(( 

^rt 

3  m.  his 

^'=?^ 

(( 

•il^'^ 

u 

rhi^Db^j 

(( 

11: 

8/.  her 

T     V  T  : 

(( 

01^'^ 

(( 

rj'^hiDb^j 

(( 

n-^; 

Plur.  1  c.  our 

iirinb 

••  T  : 

(( 

!ir5b7j 

•*  T    ; 

(( 

iirniDb:^ 

u 

13'"!!; 

2  m.  your 

i( 

ai'=?> 

(( 

Di-^Db^a 

V    "  :  — 

(t 

V     ••     1  :  ■" 

(( 

eyf 

2/.  your 

(( 

li'^nb 

U 

•ji^^bp 

(( 

1^^^^'?^^ 

(( 

]^^: 

8  m.  their 

i( 

Q'i''??^ 

(( 

fi^!"?^"^ 

(( 

Dn^niipb^j 

C( 

D0"'5r 

8/  their 

(( 

l6^??> 

t( 

1^^5^^ 

(( 

•jn-'niiDbg 

a 

lO":!: 

107 


XIX.     Numerals 

,  ^65. 

Cardinals. 

M.  ASOULINE. 

Fbmtninb 

Ai80l, 

CoTw^r. 

Absol. 

ConaiT. 

One 

r  V 

iflS 

nhK 

nn» 

Two 

Di^bifl 

^3123 

u:r\t 

••  • 

Three 

T      : 

• 

T 

UJblD 

r-pur 

T  T  :  — 

m^ian^ 

y3r)t^ 

3?s-^55 

Five 

T   •  -: 

s^^in 

liibn' 

izj/bn 

Six 

nfei? 

isij 

■^^ 

Seyen 

wai? 

—  :    • 

3^5^ 

jiiD 

Eight 

nibti 

T        : 

nib^ 

Kme 

T    :    • 

r\;^TiJn 

yiLr\ 

—  : 

Ten 

T     T-I 

V  V-: 

V  V 

V  V 

Eleven 

I  nibs 

Twelve 

1   ^^? 

"5^ 

Thirteen 

-lib? 

niijbis 

T      : 

^y^^. 

Foni-teen 

iby 

T   T 

T  T  :  — 

..  • ... 

:?inK 

Fifteen 

T  T 

n^D'jn 

Jrb'w 

^tsn 

Sixteen 

T  T 

rrteiD 

•^il'^? 

TSti 

Seventeen 

T  T 

n:jnT2j 

^y?^. 

:?itD 

Eighteen 

T  T 

nib^ 

nibiD 

Nineteen 

^? 

T    :    • 

..       ;    ... 

5wn 
—  t 

Twenty 

D'^nto?       Sixty             D-'fett? 

One  hundred 

T     - 

Thirty 

D'^Obo        Seventy      W^bytO 

Two  hundred 

D^nx>3 

Forty 

D'^ibanK     Eighty      D^'bb© 

One  thousand 

'^^.^ 

Fifty 

D'^tBttn       Ninety       U'^ilDVi 

Ten  thousand 

ttian 

Ordinals. 

First 

•pfefi^n         Fifth       ''©^'ttn 

Eighth      ''irp© 

Second 

^3©              Sixth            ■>#« 

Ninth        *'y'i©r\ 

Third 

'^©■'b©              Seventh     '^i^'^n© 

Tenth       'h''T»:j 

XX.      Consecution  of  Accenis,  ^20. 


Primary 
Sections. 

m 

"a 

o 
a 
If, 

to    . 

ft 

o 

o 

5 

to     . 

11 

So 
ft 

s 

o 

• 
« 
1 

i 

>(,.) 

» 

,C)C)' 

T) 

X)\.L 

A 

J 

A 

..C) 

eo 

.(.)\y 

Sboondast 
Sbotions. 

t 

^  J 

C) 

<C)\.)' 

a 

• 

jpVi  J|jV^) 

H 

'  J  J  J  J 

1 

XTkusual 
Bbotions. 

1 

<l>« 

yj J jjj 

The  accents  in  parenthesis  are  liable  to  be  substituted  for  those  that  pre« 
c-ede  them.  Thus  in  the  train  of  Silluk  or  Athnahh  occupying  the  nppei 
horizontal  line  of  the  table,  if  T'bhir  is  preceded  by  one  Conjunctive,  it  will 
he  Darga  or  Merka;  if  V)y  two,  the  second  w^ill  he  Kadhnm  or  Munahh;  if 
by  three,  the  third  will  be  T'li.>lia  K'tannii. 

109 


LESSONS  IN   READING   HEBREW 


1.  The  Prefixed  Particles,  §§  24-28. 

In  the  earlier  reading  lessons  the  accents  will  be  but  sparingly  employed.  The 
tone  syllable  will  be  marked  when  it  is  not  the  ultimate ;  and  an  occasional  disjunc- 
tive will  be  inserted  when  it  is  needed  as  a  sign  of  interpunction  or  to  account  for 
a  pausal  form,  §  19. 

tn^nni  tn^    jniana  n?  07x13    jd;*  n?  d;i3    tnwnn  n;'33 

npau    :  ans^a    ninn^   onSi    -ipiaa   itoa^  onS    i  ^ph  ^5?    n"i5?« 
tnb^ia  ih^b  D'^nD^Di  n^^  Di^a  nixb  tD^iiJ    tnni^b 

TjiT-  <  •T»--T  -  X  vv  rrr 


2.  The  Personal  Pronouks,  §  29. 

Remark  1.  Tlie  predicate  of  a  sentence  may  be  directly- 
connected  with  its  subject  without  the  verb  to  be,  which 
must  be  supplied  in  English,  nin^  nr»x  thou  (art)  cTeho- 
vah;  or  the  pronoun  x^n  of  the  third  person  may  be  used 
as  a  copula  instead  of  the  verb  to  ie^  which  must  be  sub- 
stituted for  it  in  translating,  fi'^ri'bx  x^n  nnx  thou  art  God^ 
see  §  67. 

2.  Property  or  possession  is  denoted  by  the  prep.  \  to^ 
belonging  to^  e.  g.  "fixn  ninib  tJie  earth  (belongs)  to  Jeho- 
vah^ is  JehovahbS^  vjosn  ''b  the  silver  is  mine, 

3.  The  preposition  \%  is  repeated  before  both  the  ob- 
jects, between  which  the  interval  is  indicated  Tjj'^ai  ■'3'»| 
b^Uoeen  me  and  thee. 


112  LESSONS   IN-   BEADING   HEBEEW. 

ni:?n      :  D^'iaira  o'^rfb^i  s^^n  nnx  x'bn     :  ^ifn-b:?  nns'i  D:''c'i3 
n^n'bx  nnnn    :nn-Tn   •^bn    qosn   'ib    ion  •'b  nns^i    :n«  DDb 

w  -    -   -:  T  T    -  •  :  I  :•  :•   -  •  ••  •  t  -  ;  t  v  t 

s  Dbls?b  a^in  nix  bx"ite'>  rn^  '^D'^a    :  ••Dbs 


3.  Other  Peonouns.     §  30. 

E.EMAEK  4.  When  a  demonstrative  pronoun  is  joined  to 
a  noun  as  an  attributive,  it  follows  the  noun  and  both 
receive  the  definite  article,  e.  g.  n-Tn  Di'Tn  this  day^  ni'n 
i5^nn  i^Aa^  {?<zy.  When  it  is  used  as  a  predicate,  the  de- 
monstrative stands  first  and  is  without  the  article  Di^n  nj 
tlbis  is  the  day^  §  71.  1. 

.    -  -  -  -  »      T    -  -IT  -  V   -:        T  •■•   -:        T  : 

■'pa  ni»  rfi<T  :  DDb  mcx   ^''ixn  n^^r  :  T\nn  n^iib^   n^^-Tn  f  n^^b 

■  T       s  »    •■•   T    T         T    :  •        T        »      -  J    V   T    r  -  V   -:  t  t         t       }     •• 

^'isb  }  nb&5  nrin  htq  :  ?jto  '^la  :  nbx  ^p  :  nn^  ^^  :  D:^^m  "^b 
n?n  ™  :  K^n  tD'ip  ia  npi«  -iirx  aip^ni  nr^^  ^10  "^sn  nns^ 
Delias  nDD«i  nnni3  pika  ^©i^i  bi^^isia  n^^^Tsa  "»®«  :  r^n  i^^n  nrs 

:  ''b-ntjij-bDn  ''ix  ^b  j  yn^b  nnni? 


4.  Peefect  Verbs.     Kal  Preterite  and 
Infinitives.     §  33. 

The  verbal  forms  should  be  analyzed  or  divided  into  their  significant  elements  ; 
thus  cnb'Mi?  ye  (m.)  killed  is  composed  of  bij?  the  ground  form  of  the  Kal  prei, 
Knd  or)  shortened  from  the  2  m.  pi.  pron.  cn&t . 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

«?^^?  ,^3^^?  ,^^^?    ,^^?  ,ri^t:j    ,ibt:g    ,nbiDij    ,Dnbt:jp 


LESSONS   IN   READING   HEBREW.     •  113 

Remark  5.  Both  foiTQS  of  the  infinitive  may  bo  used 
alone ;  but  tli€  construct  only  is  employed  with  preposi- 
tions, §  81.  2,  thus  bfob,  Vms  not  >iMb,  biaj^a . 

-npn^  ^  :  r\^o  nb'^n-rij .    :  rnijnb  inni   "lin  ni^'a  nb-ij  njn;i 
5195  ib  in;    tnis^an-nx  ^D^'b©-i^b    jtja  ^pa^    jpn^  ona    tr^ia 
nsDO" :  nin-^b  natj  ^nfen  nrmo     j  Da   nbte-a^-i^b     :  nbcb  n^bDi 

::-T  T  -  T-FvT-'  t:it  t  t:-t  :•  ■": 

-ns  nmiQW     jnb2<n  o-'bsn-bs  bs'   nps-^i   nb'^n   n^^^o     :nn©a 

r   :     -    :  r    ••    t  •  ••    -         t  -  :  *:    -t  :  •.-.•-  :    :  -  t  v    t  - 

natijrrns^  nrr\'nw   :^mrnb  p^i   tmsrin-ba-nx  ynio    tmn  oi^n 

T  -  -  V  V  s    -    :  •     :  -  T      »    V   •■•  T   :         -        T  v  t  v   - 

:n?b  ii'^n  tjip  ^3 

^  p^^i  is  followed  by  3  ,  the  usual  Hebrew  phrase  being  to  deave  or  adhere  m, 
where  the  English  idiom  requires  fo  cZca??e  to.  Daghesh-forte  conjunctive  in  3, 
§13.4. 

'  biaia  is  also  followed  by  3  ,  where  our  idiom  requires  to  rule  over. 


5.      NiPHAL,     PlEL,     AND     PuAL   PrETERITES    AND    INFINI- 
TIVES,   §  34. 

A  figure  following  a  verbal  form  indicates  the  number  of  times  it  is  to  be  found 
in  the  paradigm. 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

j^nb-bpi   ,J^^t:pi    ,ir,bT2]?p    ,nbip3   j'liT'^l??   ,^^^1??   ,^^"^1?? 

.  DnbtspD  ,  b^p3 ,  btijjri 

,n5Di^   ,nnb^P   ,bap  ,i3bD]j  ,nb^]j  ,nb^p  j'^nbtaj?  ^^vbh"^ 

,TO^^  ,''%   ,^^^?   ,^>^P  ,^2^^^^)?  ,(2)^^?',1^'?^p',  ^-^^P 

.  Dnba^  ,  nbtsp 

Eemark  6.  The  sign  of  the  definite  object  Mi§  becomes 
Mi?  before  grave  suffixes  and  tiifi?  before  light  suffixes, 
§  (S^.  3,  thus  ''nix  ,  oinij ;  with  the  3  m.  s.  suffix  it  is  ini^, 
with  3  f.  s.  nni^ ,  §  29.  4. 

DDS  ''n©tp?'J  a?^^  '^J^^ip    JDD^asb  ^-^kn  rMt:^':^'}    J^b-^np  x'b 
■nx  yoih  ^©-^p  iT2?bi^-n«    tn^^irb^  nno    jnin''  i:x-'D  onr^w 


J  14  LESSONS   IN   EEADING   HEBREW. 

•j-afen-nx   rinpb    t'^nis^   Dntp'^p  Ji^b    jonb?©   ink    j^ia  oDnij 
J  ^b  ^sajp?  :  ini5  M'np)  ia-ncs-bj-niji  "j^iDrin-nK  nn«tti 

6.  The  Remaining  Pbeterites  and  Infinitives.     §  35. 

Analyze  and  translate : — > 

iDbtapnn ,  "^nbtoprin  ,  inbi:]:!! ,  nbifpn ,  nb-^bipn ,  ^sb^pn ,  dnbppn 
,  ifepinn  ,  (2)  btojjn  ,  b^ppn  ,  'iribtspn  ,  ^Stppn  ,  nbtbpn  ,  nbuppn 

.(2)  btbpnn  ,  b^ppn  ,bt:pn 

Remark  7.  The  absolute  infinitive  is  often  joined  with 
the  finite  tenses  of  the  verb  for  the  sake  of  emphasis, 
thus  '^Pitj'nipn  ffitp*!!  consecrating  I  have  consecrated^  i.  a 
I  have  certainly  or  entirely  consecrated, 

tl?^n-r^^    ''i?^'|J!?r»    os^JpO    *  ^;»'iprin-i5'b  :  ©as    niex    D:'ian-b3'a 
^sniitjn  :  n-ann^  d*!^^  ns's'a  n^awni  tmr\  f-ii^n-ns  rr^rnDn  :  r\\rrh 

:    -    :    •  T   ••   :  t   t         t    v    •  •     :    •  :  •   -      »    v    r   t  v  •     :     •  t 

?jban  :ib  ODnif  I'^'^ipnb  DDn«  o'^n'b^^  b^'nnri-'^s  t::?^n^  triDi^b^n-nij 
nn-^iDri;!    DDnsj    f^bscn    njnn-nx    odd    •'nnbicn  ^    j  niDb-Dn-bj; 

J  DDni5  nt3ii?ttni  rrananvix 

'   See  §26. 

*  Plural  in  form  but  singular  in  sense,  and  therefore  taking  a  singular  verb, 
§  85.  3. 
^  Followed  by  the  prep,  a  in  the  sense  of  sending  upon  or  against. 

7,  Kal  Future,  Imperative  and  Participles.     §  36. 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

,i!«:i?n  ,bii?»  ,  (2)  njVibpn  ,bbj?:«  ,bt3p3  ,(2)  btbpn  ,^^^^, 
.^tpp  ,b^t3p  ,n;bt!)]?  ,bt?p  ,bbp  ^^^^  ,  •'btppx? 

Remark  8.  The  article  before  a  participle  must  some- 
times be  rendered  in  English  by  the  relative  pronoun, 
e.  g.  ^itt^  the  (one)  keeping  or  (he)  7/^A^  25  heepi'ng. 


LESSONS   IN   BEADING   HEBEEW.  115 

9.  When  the  sign  of  the  definite  object  precedes  the 
relative,  it  belongs  not  to  it  but  to  its  antecedent  under- 
stood, see  §  30.  3;  hence  *^tDi?|  n^  means  not  whom  or 
which  J  but  him  who  or  what  equivalent  to  that  which. 

sn'ni'i  niBifi  ini?  n^tc  nin;>  nnyi  nna©:"  i<b  nb;^^;  Di*^  t^nacp 
t  i^^'sn  pten  nirr;  :  "ji^^sin  i?©  nin;'  :  tyik^r\  snjs'En-bs-nij  "ibicn 
D-^ntDbs  i^'^nn  r)5?n^  j^w  njn  wn  ts^bDi  x^yib  :V'^2j?  lb© 
PS©  ^©abn  :DDa  bto'tt'i  nin^  Din  ''5^5  )iiawr^'i  jbi^^to^a  D-^b^ia 

jn'binnn  natbibn  13 

s    -  T    :    -  J    •       I- 


8.  NiPHAL,  Peel  and  Pual  Futuees,  etc.     §  37. 
Analyze  and  translate : — 

.  (2)  f^J^PI^n ",  br?j5D  /^btpgn^',  ^Stpg?  ,  ^^tpg^  /bbj^^ 

,njbio]jn  y^^tpp;"  ,  bi^jpj  ,b^j?i5,  ''btpgn  jJijbfeg  ,bibj^^  ,bDp 
■  '  .  <5t?jjn  ,  ^5t)g  ,  ^bi^i?  ,  b^jjti  ,  baf :•  ,  (2)  bfegn 

Remaek  10.  The  infinitive  with  or  without  the  prepo- 
sition b  maybe  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  as  ^''Pi?r?b  ^rib  i^'b 
^6>  ^'z^/'TZ/  incense  belongs  not  to  thee  or  it  is  not  for  thee  to 
hn/rn  incense, 

11.  The  antecedent  of  the  relative  pronoun  may  often 
be  omitted,  thus  'it&ij  K^n  he  is  the  one  who  or  that  is 
the  thing  which. 

T    T         T         "   :  -:  "Jt    V  V  T  T       s  V   ••.•-:  V    »\    : 


116  LESSONS  IN"   READING   HEBREW 

T       :  -  T  V   -:  •    :    -  v  ::•'■.•  v  t  :    tr   •  rr         - 

9  a,  Hephil,  Hophal,   and   Hithpael   Futures,  etc. 

§38. 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

,(2)  Mj^bgnrj ,  btsj^n:^  ,(2)  b'^ppri ,  'i^r)ipr) ,  b-Djpij ,  b^^pjpa ,  ^Stppnri 


mi     ::;?i»^,   tj'isibi?   D'^sn'sn    j  D':i3T5ri-'j'a   cnb  oDb  Tp^tt  '^pi?: 

nttif  nb  tnbiy  n?  njn  n^in  d:^  non  ni'ipn-i^b  nb-^sirn 
-b:?  ini5  ^rb^;:  J^n^to"!  litJb  n-jn  Dipijn-ip  n^STC^o  '»pbN  nVn^ 
-bs  nx  nri?  rr^nio-an  \T\yvh  n^x  ^i^npn  i^'b  : bi5'ii»':'-b|i 
''SBb  np5?srn  nb^^-^3  n-tn  Dipian-ni^    i3ns«  D'^nntJis    jrr^-ixn^n 

-:•  »TTj-  t:it        •  *v-  Tt-  V  j--:  ••:-  •":. 

:  nin'; 
9  5.  The  Entire  Paradigm  of  bpp. 

The  figures  denote,  as  before,  the  nxtmber  of  places  in  the  paradigm  repre- 
pented  by  the  preceding  form. 

Supply  the  vowels  and  translate : — 

,  (2)  -ibtopn  ,  Dnbtjps  ,  (2)  nsbt:p  ,  (5)  ''btjpn  ,  (3)  inbt:? 
,  (2)  bit)p  ,  (2)  nbt:pnn  ,  nDbt:pnn  ,  i3bt:pnn  ,  b^t:p">  ,  (4)  nbt:pn 
,(4)  bt2pnn  ,bt2pn''  ,(8)  bt:pn  ,(2)  nnbtspn  jb-^wpfi^  ,nbi:pn' 
,(10)bt:pn  ,(3)  i:b:3p  ,(12)  nabtspn  ,^bt2pn  jnb-iripn  ^ib'^-jp'^ 
(2)  bt2pnn  ,b^t:p5  ,  nbt^pnn  ,(2)  ib'^tspn  ,(3)  b-jptt 
,(5)  bt:pi5  ,(5)  ibnp  ,  nbtsps  ,(2)  b^t^pn  jb-itap-a  ,ibt)pnn 
,ib*'t:pn  jb-jptTQ  ,bt2pn:  ,(5)  ibt:pn  ,(2)  nbtapD  ,ib-it:pn  ,bt:pnx 
(7)  b:2p2  ,  (5)  bi3p*»  ,  (3)  '^nbup  ,  nbt3p3  ,  (2)  nDbt:pn  ^Dnbrjpnn 
,(2)  "^btap  jVibtspa  ,(2)  isbopn  ,(2)  ibtopnn  ,(2)  nDbtapnn 
,(2)  inbtspn       j'^b'^tsph     ,(5)    nbap'i     ,(6)    nbop     jinbupj 


LESSONS    LN    READING    HEBREW.  117 

,(8)  anb-Dp  ,(2)  ^nbtopn  ,  iDbtsp:  ,(3)  nbi2p  ,(ii)  bisp  /.Vjpn-' 
.  "'btjpnn  ,inbi:pnn  ,(2)  b^^upri  ^^-b-jprin  j-^nbcprin 


10.  Paragogic   and   Apocopated   Future  and  Impera- 
tive AND  Vav  Conversive,  §§  40,  41. 

Remark  12.  When  a  future  with  Vav  Conversive  is  pre- 
ceded by  a  preterite  or  by  any  expression  referring  to 
past  time,  it  is  to  be  translated  as  a  preterite.  And 
a  preterite  with  Vav  Conversive  preceded  by  a  future, 
an  imperative  or  any  expression  indicating  future  time,  is 
to  be  translated  as  a  future,  §  79. 

13.  ^b  is  the  simple  negative;  bi<  is  used  with  the 
future,  which  takes  the  apocopated  form  if  it  has  one,  to 
express  the  negative  imperative  n^ion  x'b  thou  shalt  not 
deliver ,  "liop  bi5  deliver  not. 

T       :  ~:  —  TT       »-T  T  -  vv-  •■•  T-        I    -   :    •  -  t-  rirr 

D^^nji    nsbBH    nbirr\i    np?T    p:?pi   ns^;)    pto    c:ab^i    ib  "itJaJ! 
'r\it'^1)  n|xn  a^^i^n-nij  nin;'  ninp;)  jbap  vh^  ^y^yrr^vt.  «^3bnb 

nsn-n;:?  nnp    jy-i  ?]i2r  l^^i^'b^    tirii^  '^^'^^^  tiim  b?  rip?;i 


J 1.  Preterites  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  42. 

a.  Third  person  masc.  and  fem.  sing,  of  the  Kal  Pre- 
terite. 

The  forms  should  be  analyzed  or  divided  into  their  significant  elements,  and 
their  separate  equivalents  stated;  thus  i^lfp  he  killed  him  is  composed  of  bbj^ 
8  masc,   eing.  pret.    and  "i  for  ^ir     suffix  of  3  masc.  sing,  with  vowel  of  imioj: 


118  LESSOJVrS   IN   READING    HEBREW. 

(^  ),  and  is  equivalent  to  ink  bl3j? ;  nri5::p5  she  killed  her  is  for  ^T\^'^p 
which  is  composed  of  n'iap  3  fern.  sing.  pret. ,  whose  termination  becomes  r> 
before  suffixes,  and  n  suffix  of  3  fern,  sing.,  and  is  equivalent  to  Pink  »^^'I:p  . 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

,^^?^h'  ,^2<??  /^J'?]?  ,^t'?!?  ,1?^^!?  ,Q^"9I?  ,''?Vi?)?  ,h^P 

,10?^j?   ,fi?^^^I?  j^P^^"?!?  j^^^?'?!?  j'n's'^?!?  ,C]n3i?)5  ,nn^tip 


1. 


6.  The  rest  of  the  Kal  Preterite. 
Analyze  and  translate : — 

,?f^fejp    ,D^bt2j?    j'^^^^t:;?    ,^2^!:t:tp     ,1^^?1?    ^^^^'^     y^*^^^?)? 
,Di^:bi:p    ,^n^:bt2jp   ,D^Dbt:jp   y'^'^bbt:]?   ,?i^b't:p   ,  D?^b*j]p  jli^b^p 

,  D^nbi:p   ,  (2)    D'^nbtijp   ,  Ti'')nbt:p  ,  ^a^^nbtsjp  ,  ^rnbt:)p  ^  inb-gfp 
,(2)'j^nbt:p   ,(2)  rabuj?    , '^?'^ribt:j5   j^'i^nb'Dp   , '^pnb-j]:    ,Dnbi:p 

.  'ji'^nb^sfp  ,  DD^nbi:)?  ,  (2)  ^-^JTinbt:;?^   (2)  0"'^'?^!?  ,  ^n^nbi:]? 
.  '^:rinpb  ,  ims  ,  'r|^®n;'  ,  r^^TS''^;'  ,  men;'  ,  '^?rD*i'a« 

*  This  form  belongs  to  the  first  person  of  the  preterite  as  well  as  to  the  second 
feminine,  although  for  the  sake  of  brevity  it  is  not  repeated  in  the  paradigm, 

c.  The  Piel  and  Hiphil  Preterites. 

Eemark  14.  When  a  verb  is  doubly  transitive,  either 
object  if  a  pronoun  may  be  suffixed  to  the  verb,  thus 
i^'^pj^n  means  either  7ie  caused  him  to  Mil  or  7ie  cavsed 
to  Mil  Mm;  ribro  Dn^^bn  thou  hast  caused  them  to  put 
oil  tunics  J  but  "fl^bij-nij  Dncabn  thou  hast  caused  Eleazai 
to  ])ut  ihe7)i  on. 


LESSONS    IN    READING    irEBREW.  119 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

,  iP.^'^Plpn    ,  (2)  T'nbi:]pn    ,  ^^b'^Pl^n    ,  n-inbt:jpn    ,  •'p^^ippn 
,  iribt2|pn  ,  (2)  n-^nbuipn  ,  nnSipjpn  ,  Ti^:bt2)pn  ,  ^n^S-^ippn 

_  li^nb^p  ,  nn&p  ,  DPbiap  ,  ninbGjp  ,  Diibt^p  ,  l^nbEijp  ,  i:bcp'p 

.  (2)  D^ribDp  ,  D^bsp 

.  ty<nai^n  ,  Dnacn  ,  (2)  T^n'^^n  ,  ^^'^n'lDn 

r,b?  '^•ari  nnb  "isp;^'!    jnnb  ib^  ''?7'?^  ^01?t''^  ^^3  ^^  ^^^  T^ 
^rni-n  -^m^  bbD  Ti'^n^iQ©'!  ?[:§:?  '^pbsj  nsn     J^b-an  ib'if^  ncxHs 
D©nbi  n^'isa  f  nni  ttjib;>  Q'^'ijan  t  tybstpn  njri'i   a^n  '^nnSijj  :  i\b 
I'lrnrabn  j  D'^njan  ^ste'^abn  :  iis'ip'i  nst^n-bs?  inji  n^n  -j-a  npb) 
'15'ifi?  nnai  -i©ND  3  !nb  onb'^nn  nr\x  j  innp-^ann  n-anb'En  :  nshsn 

»        ■;      T  :   -  •  V  -:  -  ' :  T  :  -  I    •  t  -  :  kr     •    :    •  t  t  :    •    -  v    i  \   - 

'    Jb  himsdf^  there  being  no  reflexive  pronouns  in  Hebrew,  the  personal  pro- 
nouns may  be  used  with  a  reflexive  sense. 

«  Used  adverbiaUy,  Juxw.  »  See  §  29.  3.  *  §  See  23.  3. 


12.       FUTUEES,    ETC.,    OF   PeRFECT   VeRBS    WITH   SuFFIXES, 

§  42 
a,  Kal  Future. 

Remark  15.  Those  forms  in  tlie  Kal  future  6  which 
end  \vith  the  last  radical  follow  the  analogy  of  bbp*] . 

In  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  a  the  vowel  of  the 
second  radical  is  not  liable  to  rejection,  but  is  lengthened 
to  Kamets  before  all  the  suffixes  except  the  2  pers.  plur. 
where  Pattahh  is  retained,  e.  g.  ''?r?b©''^  not  "^^nbTT''^  from 
nbi£i7 ,  and  '^pnb©  from  rht . 

16.  Those  forms  in  the  various  futures  and  imperatives 
which  have  personal  endings  undergo  no  change  before 
suffixes,  except  in  the  fern.  plur.  as  stated  in  §  42.  2, 


120  LESSONS   IN    READING    HEBREW. 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

.(2)  ^3!?tpj?n  ,  (2)  n^tppt?  ,^?'9)?p^  A^)^^?^]???  ,Dfej?3  ,^n'^i2]?5< 
.  (2)  ^:^i3ipn  ,  3fbt:]?3  ,  ns^ipps  ,  ^^p?  ,  o?^'^]?^ 

»  See  §43.  2. 

n^^.-acn    nirr^-nni^    j  T\i'^p^^    rrabtea    ©En"'!    :  oriM'^i    nntisn 
^5b  ■'Dbxi  njnlicn  n^i?"D^   rt5   icx   b^:pn   nisx  risi^nn   :nbiyb 

-.  T-"  AT         T-  I:t:'  t:  \    t     ;  •  -  •:--  '-t:v 

:pi»i2nsi  n^'^^n^  tybian-b^  on^i?'!'!]  ^Ojni  qoin-bs-n^  npb   :nbi]? 

'  Translate  the  future  with  vav  conversive  in  these  and  subsequent  exercises 
^s  though  a  preterite  preceded. 
•  See  Remark  8. 

b.  Piel  and  Hiphil  Futures. 

Remark  17.  In  those  forms  of  the  Piel  future,  which 
end  with  the  last  radical,  Tsere  is  shortened  or  rejected 
before  suffixes  as  in  the  3  masc.  sing,  of  the  Piel  preterite. 

18.  Tsere  in  the  Hiphil  apocopated  future,  future  with 
Vav  Conversive,  and  imperative  becomes  Hhirik  before 
suffixes,  e.  g.  nncn-bi^  dest/i'oy  not,  inn''nT»'r)-bx  destroy  Mm 
(or  if)  not 

Analyze  and  translate : — 

.  nb^tppx  ,  '^?i^"'t:p:)  ,  tfb^tpp::  ,  (4)  ^sb'itppri  ,  (3)  u^^'^'^r^ 

-   :     -  ^:  AT  T    r  •       T  •  T    T    ••  T        :  -  ••    :    -  •   :    -    ■ 


LESSUiNS    IJN    KEADING    IIEBEEW.  121 

tDDb  5?air'^  nciJ}  rr^nsn-nfi?   nsD?""   &5b"j    ^n^nir::   i^b   nin;"  n^nn 
^nfcnb;)    :-yT^*sbi5;    n:'i23    5fsn"\«n    :bi?ni»7-b?  ^ro'ib'a::^  ini5   npb 

6'.  Infinitive  and  Imperative. 

Kemark  19.  The  sufiix  of  the  1  pers.  sing,  is  t^ttached 
to  the  infinitive  in  two  forms,  "^ .  expressing  the  subject 
of  the  verb  "^^^'^  ray  hilling  and  ''3  its  object  ''pbipj  to  Mil 
me.  The  remaining  persons  have  but  one  form,  which  is 
used  indifferently  for  the  subject  or  the  object,  ?|^^]j  thy 
hilling  or  to  Mil  tliee^  ^f'^PpO  thy  causing  to  Mllj  to  cause 
tJue  to  Mil  or  to  cause  to  Mil  thee. 

Analyze  and  translate  : — 

,  1^%-^  ,  inb'i?;^ ,  -ijipp  ,  jTibb^  ,(2)  ^:bt:i5  ,  d?>i:p  ,  Dbt:^  ,  DDb^i? 
.  ^p-^^up  ,  ^n^bipp  ,  iDbt:p  ,  Tibt:p  ,  ibipp  ,  nbbp  ,  ibtpp   ,  (2)  ■>??::? 

,a^bt3p    ,DbDp   ,D?£)p    ,DDbDp    j^S^bcpp    ,nbbp    ,(2) '^brpp^ 
^n^b-^ppn  ,DDb^t2pn  ,  (2) '•a.y-'Ppn  ,n^bipp  ,nbi:p  ,  (2)  isHtDp 

.^b^bpn  ,ib'ii:pn  ^'^b'^ppn^  ,''r''^^!?r! 

'   Of  the  two  forms  here  represented  one  has  a  suffix,  the  other  has  not. 
2  Notice  the  position  of  the  accent. 

,(2)''nb«  ,'^ribTD  ,'^rib©  ,'^3nbT0  jOS-aif  j^"!)^^  ?'^'^''?^  j'''^'?? 
,(2)''?1T9T?  ,in>T»  ,Dn|tD  ,nrt©  ,(3)  ^anb©  ,''?nb©  ,(2)'»:n3>« 

Remark  20.  The  copulative  ^  is  sometimes  employed  in 
Hebrew  to  connect  an  action  with  the  time  of  its  occur- 
rence, where  no  connective  is  required  in  English.  In 
such  cases  we  may  use  tJien  as  its  equivalent  or  better 
still  leave  it  untranslated.     Thus  in  my  gathering  Israel 

6 


123  LESSONS   m    READING  HEBREW 

Di  "^rn&'Hj^Di  then  shall  I  he  sanctified  in  them  or  wlien  1 
gather  Isra.el,  I  shall,  etc.,  §  89.  2  (2). 

•    :    -  :  ■.•    -  It-         •.•  T  :    -  •  t   -  -  t    :  •  •.••■•  t  ....  - 

"•irngns^  nin;>  ■'?«-*'2i  D-^iiin  ^irn;^^  an  '^no'njppi  ^  n^i^mt)  bxniri;' 
^:£)b    Ttplpnb    'iirf'i^jpnb.   f\T\^  b^ia^n     :  it'npb  ini^  nirisi'i  j  nia 

'  The  initial  aspirate  has  Daghesh-lene  as  thotigh  the  preceding  word  were 
•'a^N  §  23.  3. 

*  The  accent  would  be  thrown  upon  the  ultimate  by  Vav  Conversive,  §  17.  6, 
but  for  the  f«^lIowing  monosyllable,  §  18. 


13.  Gender  and  Number  of  Nouns,  §§  43-45. 

E.EMARK  21.  Attributive  or  qualifying  adjectives  fol- 
low the  noun  to  which  they  belong,  and  agree  with  it  not 
only  in  gender  and  number  but  also  in  definiteness,  that 
is  to  say,  they  receive  the  article  if  the  noun  is  definite, 
nbi^5  injk  a  great  stone,  r»^i^5n  ^n^cn  the  great  stone,  §  70.  2. 

22.  When  a  demonstrative  and  an  adjective  qualify 
the  same  noun  the  demonstrative  stands  last  nib^5tn  nini^ri 
^^T}  these  great  signs,  §  71.  2. 

23.  Predicate  adjectives  do  not  receive  the  article  even 
tliough  the  noun  is  definite ;  their  usual  place  is  before 
tlie  noun,  but  they  may  also  stand  after  it  "jS^jn  nbiia  or 
nbina  inxn  the  stone  is  great,  §  70.  3. 

24.  Comparison  is  expressed  by  thQ  preposition  IP 
§  72.  1,  tlB^  n|to;?)n  -jnini^  thy  sister  young  froin  thee,  i.  e. 
younger  than  thou;  5"^^  ^"^^^  I  will  he  greater  than  thou, 

nsnn  tD-^bina   D''pbt)ii  o-^sn  n:'ia  tnonn  y-nsj^  D'^w^n  ^crat 
niabn  a-isi^nn  jn©"in  rnabin  ni<nn-b:p  nb^a  pxm  n^ffia  is: 


LESSONB    IN    READING     HEBREW.  123 

tJ^'^b^   ^''bTcn  nin^j   tnx'Tn   nbinsn   n^'in-bs    nx   ^2"'b:j'^   nin;" 

^^'^^  '^^  )^^  ^j^?  ">^^:    nniion   f-ixn  t  a:*^^?^}'!^  ^^^^^^  D''??^: 

j'l^n-'j^Q  nb™  i^'^ni  lis^n^  nbin^ 

'  Vowel  of  the  noxm  assunilated  to  the  preceding  Kamets  as  after  the  article, 
g  25.  3.  a. 

*  Upon  wMt  ground,  i.  e.  for  wlmt  reason^  why. 

*  Upmi  us  or  against  us. 


14.  The  Construct  State,  §§  46,  47. 

Eemark  25.  Nouns  in  tlie  construct  before  a  definite 
noun  (including  proper  nouns)  are  themselves  definite, 
§  69.  1,  Dipg  aiolace.,  but  li"iijn  Dipia  the  place  of  ilie  m'h; 
nin^  p'"i^  ^/^(^  arh  (not  ^t^  a^*^)  of  Jehovah. 

26.  Nouns  in  tlie  construct  state  do  not  receive  the 
article ;  they  are  rendered  definite  by  prefixing  the  article 
to  the  governed  noun,  §  75.  5,  Q'^n'by;  l6-^^  a  man  of  Gody 
D-'nb^n  ir)^  the  man  of  God. 

27.  Adjectives  or  demonstratives  qualifying  a  noun  in 
the  construct  state  do  not  follow  it  immediately,  but  are 
placed  after  the  governed  noun,  §  75.  4,  bii^n  nin^  ni^ 
N'lisni  the  great  and  dreadful  day  of  Jehovah. 

28.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  nouns  in 
the  singular  connected  by  the  conjunction  and,  the  predi- 
cate is  commonly  put  in  the  singular  if  it  precedes  the 
subject,  and  in  the  plural  if  it  follows,  §  86. 

n^^n  ^b3  bb  j  nin^  tms^  ]i-iif}  :  bi^nto^'  in'bst  i;ry&^  \  D'^n^'isn  ^sss 
"^laT^^  D^'fatDn  nwb  in  Jd;*^^?!  'inDi?  jn'^3t:pni  D'^bnsn  cn'b^n 
^'f\2.yp\  { im  '^'^^  D?'i;'in']  ^p?i!  ^p  ^*pn  J  •'^?""i^^"^?'?  p^?  D'?^^n 

•^b^n  nin'i-n^  ^n3tD*»i  :  D'Titcbs  n^m  nil  ntj^  j  rnjkn  ^Db)2  b^ia 

•  .-         T  V  :    :  •  -  •    :  •  :  ••    :   -  •  t  -t  I   v:  t   t        •■  :    -        t 


124  LESSONS   IN    READING    HEBEEW. 

•TD'iti  ^  bb'n  pteti'n  ninna  n&"iB^  nsni^  nin  «bn  :  Dins^  trbfe  I'^a  dn« 

•    :    CT  T  ;  V  T        I     -  :    V  -;  ~  T    » 

■lip  !n3tti<  28. 1. 
'  The  construct  of  D";a ,  a  reduplication  of  tlie  more  usual  form  la 


15.  Nouns  with  Suffixes,  §  49. 

Remauk  29.  The  prepositions  "iHi?  after,  "bi^  to,  b^ 
upon  and  a  few  others  take  the  suffixes  belonging  to 
phiral  nouns,  §  66.  2,  e.  g.  ^IT}}^  not  "^*yn^  after  me, 

30.  The  article  before  Di**  da^i/  limits  it  to  the  present, 
that  which  is  now  passing,  Di'^sn  to-day,  §  68.  3. 

^^T)  T"^?T^I  ^"^1^  ^'^'^^  ^i?'^'"  ''?-¥  ^ir^)  *  ^^^^  Dip'En-'j'a  Dtt© 
D^nien  n^nn^n  bbtt  irii^  nnn  bss  i^b  ^^  DDtJsrbDi^  ODnnb-bDa 

-  •   T   :    -  •  TV  T  T  -T  •  V    :    :  -        T   :  v   :   -  :         t   : 

:  dD-ibs^s  DD'^n'bi^  nSn^  la'^  ^©» 

'  3Jl3tJ3  may  take  a  direct  object,  or  as  in  this  instance  be  followed  by  a 
9  See' Lesson  4,  note  1 ;  also  §  39.  3.  "  §  30.  33. 

*  The  3  plur.  suf .  with  f em.  plur.  nouns  may  be  either  n  ^  or  Dtn''  ^ 

•  Upon  the  subject  of,  concerning. 

16.  Pe   Guttural  Veebs,  §  53. 

Translate  and  give  the  coiTesponding  forms  of  the  per- 
fect verb  bttp : — 

,  ^'pmn  ,  (2)  niay  ,  nb^ij  ,  nia^j  ,  ^'ra^n  ,(2)  in^n  ,  onntt:? 

.  bii^  J  ^bDi^n  ,  njpTnn  ,  pirn 

fT»-T»ft  7t:-t!it  7  '  -t    -  7  "       •  tr         7  •  r>  tt        7  •  -n  ft 


LESSONS    m    READING    HEBREW.  125 

Remark  31.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  nouns  in 
fche  relation  of  the  construct  state,  the  predicate  commonly 
agrees  with  the  first  as  the  principal  noun ;  but  it  may- 
agree  with  the  second  if  this  conveys  the  main  idea.  The 
latter  is  almost  always  the  case  when  the  first  noun  is 
^3 ,  e.  g.  D^'an-bD  ^i£n.';>  all  the  waters  sliall  he  turned, 

32.  If  a  predicate  refers  to  two  words  of  different 
persons  it  will  be  put  in  the  second  in  preference  to  the 
third,  and  in  the  first  in  preference  to  either  of  the  others. 
§  86.  3. 

33.  Nouns  are  sometimes  put  in  the  construct  state 
before  a  following  clause,  §  75.  3,  as  ^^©1$  Dip's  tJie  place 
wliicli  or  where^  etc. 

'td^7\  :  nin^  ^nn«  ^^  riD^nb  nbbj^n-riK  Tjb  ^^n*bj^  r\y\^^  ^bn^:! 
"ih?D  ^tp^^  ^pbif  :  Dnb  D:'^r}-b5  ^DBJi^i  :  D^b  nn;ni  ^©nb  ^jsn;? 
:  bbi|:b  "xti  "Osfys,^  "i^^?5  J  QDn^  nT^^i  nin^i-n^^  dpi;?!?  :  nin;>-nfi^ 
Dipi32  Dnb  bDi5  i^b  irb^n-bi^  D-'n'bxn-o^i^  n^b^'^i  j  itin-nb^  Trbsx^n 
Dnb  n^bj.'^-ioiii  Dip^a  :  Tji-aD  itj  nin;»  nsn^i^n  'ini^sirbs  :  ntn 
i5j  'j'Q^.'^  1  bb^ni?']  '•n'bjj  r\xm    \  ^n-bb?  '^ia  Dnb  n^ij;!  Dni^  •'tJi^-i^b 

'  The  future  followed  by  6<3  has  the  force  of  a  petition  or  request. 
'  State  the  form  and  meaning  of  both  the  K'ri  and  K'thibh,  and  which  reading 
yields  the  more  exact  grammatical  agreement. 


17.  Ayin  Guttural  Verbs,  §  54. 
Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bbg  .v  . 

i^'s^r    j'l^^S?   ^''^^^^  j^"?^^^  j^"?^^    ,"'>^?    jl^-"??   ,(2)  ^^2^1 
,tfp]^s   ,^2b«^  ,01?^'^?  j^^^W  )^^^?    )(''^)%^^'  j*^^^:3  7  ^'^3 

.'n^bbi^:^  ,D^afi5 

•     I       :    -r-      7       •    T  :    » 

•'TCBs  ^D-ia    :  "Tib  inb  T0*^¥:  nin;"  -ifss  fnxia  nin;'  ijD'in;'  ?fn:a 
!n*'2*2'Q  HDnnijii  ^i2iD  nb^^sjj  ^s'libf;  :  n^b^'sarbD  '^nswn-bi^i  nin;«-n» 


120  LESSONS   IN"   READING    HEBREW. 

TS?  i"»na';'i  D'^inbn  ^nnt^^i     :  rbs-bj-ni^i  narian-rx)  nin;»  n^ia 

:nnt2^  rn^i  ^i^'bK  ntt^5    ior^n 

IT   J  I     -  :  I     V    ••  -    T  T    T 


18.  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  §  55. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bbj : — 

n?i^n  ,ri''biD::  ,5^1©  ,^^t?d  ,n%  ,n?;j?ij  ^nbin*  ,n'bTD  ,nnit5 
.  nnbisji  ,  •'shbo  ,  ^:nbo  ,  innb©  ,  n^nM  ,  nbisD 

"t:-       7      --T  7      --r:      J      '  -.n    i       7     - "    -    :    •       7        -    r ' 

Remark  34.  Nouns  in  the  dual  have  verbs,  adjectives, 
and  pronouns  agreeing  with  them  in  the  plural,  §  85.  7. 

n-BW  y5^n-b&5   :?;:nrn55  y^T  "ipiaa  tbDi^b  on'^  r^n^rb  T\y  ina 

T    T  —    :  -  '  r:  :-  v  -  :  Iv       -  ••       t  :•  :•  t        -  -     ~  -  f       1  -t 

J^t'SK  ''pnb©"  nin;!  ^2  n?n;>     tn^sb  nicrn^  ?'ii'^-^i;  jD5n-b|-n« 

•  «  -  ••  '    V       -:  ■.•  -I"  T       ;  -  T  :   -T   -:  t   ••  :       i  " 

KD-bs    jnbrin  n^s-bi^  npbn    \r\nbw  ^tini    I'-^r^i^  "^ax  d^i  nia&5*i 
ntebb  D'^3r2?n   ^Dbn   tiibn     \im  nn3Di5  naD  ■'S  -"bx  tr'bnta  5?3'an 

V  ;   -  :  :  n  •  »  ~    •  T  T    :     -    -  •/         -h    v  t    t    -  t    •  •    :   i-  - :    t  j 

:  DD'^:i5a-bi5n 

1^  The  plural  of  )ili<  is  often  used,  as  it  is  here,  in  a  singrdar  sense. 
'  hpB  is  applied  specifically  to  opening  the  eyes ;  OnO  is  the  general  term  fol 
opening,  and  is  applied  to  anything  whatever. 
■  Tlhn  is  for  tlS^jn  and  consequently  does  not  lose  its  Tsere  in  the  plural. 


19.  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  56. 
Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bb^  . 


LESSONS   IN    READING    HEBREW.  127 

,  ©'i-a   ,  tht<  ,  ^mn  ,  w^'-^^_    ,  Dni»^n  ,  w^i)2  ,  (2)  io'5n  ,  C'^as 

.(8)  ^s^b'-^^Fi  j^no-^as  ,0^12:^5::  ^Tj^'^a:? 

Remark  35.  The  relative  is  often  omitted  as  in  English 
^^J^f5?,0  "^^^  honey  I  gave  thee  to  eat  for  honey  which  I 
gave^  etc ,  §  88.  3. 

nn3?i    n's'ii^-nxi  i-i^si'-nxi  itis^-n^^i  ^2?n  trbia-nx  ^"r^n  ^nhs 

r  -  :  :    -  :•  •  v  :  -  v  :  -    t         '  •/     v  v  '  :  it   :  •    -  t 

-  :  •  T  h  IT  -   ••  •  •  •    /a    •  •    :  -  :•  t         J-  T       ; 

bin^i    pp  "inn  ib   n^i-'an-i^b    :  on^^sb   ^rr^nnii   ^^nbDi^n   cn'i^ 

T  :  »      Jt  t  t  t      •     •  •.•••:•  •    -  :  '       •   :  -   v:  r.-  -   : 

nrib^   :nbi$n   n'^wn-bi   ns?   tfbi^b    t^d   "i%^n    nj^inn   nii^-n? 
•lb  ?:ini5  n;?XT  i<in  ^inrii?:  nniax  nibb  i^in   Tjniric  ^  -"p  'ib  nian-x'b 

T    1     •.•  -  T    T  -    : 

1'^p  T^^om 

'  na  preceded  by  b  is  pointed  nrb  before  a  guttural  and  nsB  before  other 
coasonants, 

*  The  construct  of  n^'N  is  pdx  which,  before  sufSxes,  becomes  "'fntJJt  etc. 
See  §  50. 

20.  Ayin  Doubled  Verbs,  §  57. 

It  is  not  easy  to  distinguish  accurately  the  significations  of  the  different  species 
of  aSG  .  For  tiie  present  the  usual  sense  of  the  passive  and  causative  speciea 
may  be  retained,  the  Piel  may  be  rendered  to  surround  entirely,  and  even  the 
unmeaning  surround  one's  idf  may  be  tolerated  in  the  Hithpael,  which  is  not  in 
actual  use. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  btajj : 

,  ( 2)  ncn  ,  ^:iiip  ,  nrio  ,  r\'^b  ,  ^sp  ,  ^36  ,  (3)=io  ,  np  ,  niap 
,^:isp3  ,'^ap':'  ,npn  ,npn  ns?  ,np3  ,nb3  ,np5  ,^npp  ,''i5r\ 
.  ^niiD^  ,(2 )  ^sio"^  '^sao'^  ,  a^nno  ,  ^nnno  ,  ^riio  ,  nnoa 

••.••.:"  \       /  ••••..:         ••••..:      7  t    :      7  •..  t    :      7      •  -     7         t    -  t 

^pn  ^-^"^.hr)  ,^sip;'  ,np^  ,  niipn  ,^:iipn  jiniatn  ,n3pr! 
'^330'^  .^DDD'^  ,niinD3  ,^nniD  ,n6^n  .no^j^  ,nDs  ,(2)nD'iiDr 

.  Dip;»  ,  nnnb;'  ,  ^fnnbn  ,(2)  ^4?^"; 


128  LESSONS   IN    KEADIJSIG    HEBREW. 

IIemark  36.  Singular  predicates  and  pronouns  are 
sometimes  employed  in  a  distributive  sense  of  plural 
subjects,  §  85.  6,  ^^"i3  ^■^515'?  blessed  is  every  one  of  thos6 
blessing  thee. 

37.  The  conjunction  "j  may  be  used  to  introduce  the 
apodosis  or  second  member  of  a  conditional  sentence, 
§  89.  1,  if  thou  wilt  not,  etc.,  ^p^t'Jf  ^^^^^  shall  cleave  to 
thee^  etc. 

T    T  V  T  IT  T  V    -:  I  T  '      v  -:  IT    :  T  '      V  ":    I 

nnK  n^^bjn  n-'::?3  nn^  -i^^ijj  Jnb^?n  nibbj^n-bs  ^n  ^pn'ii  wisr 
nin;'-b:?  bi5  J  nny'Dn  ''©-bij  nib^a  d'lsnjjf:  ^ba  n^x'^i  jr^^j'©? 
ninar^   ni^    ^^nri    □"'nciitn-'jtj    n-i^n^-nsj    "irit:b    bnn    :  "T^yri 

IT  ::•  -  l-T  •-:!  :-:»--:  -•  •••-:rT:  -t:- 

bien  bisa    i^Dsb   bispb   niSnn   nicii;    ''P'7"i^    o^n^n^n    rn-Tia    dx 
ibxntet'-bD  'ip:?!  ^b-is  bnij  n-jn  oi'^n  trssb 

">   "^T*^  *.  e.  Yodh  superfluous ;  accordinjf  to  the  Maspretic  direction,  there- 
fore, it  is  to  be  neglected  in  reading  the  word. 

'  With  Pattahh  in  the  ultimate  in  place  of  Tsere. 

21.  Pe  Yodh  Verbs,  §  58. 
Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bi^ : 

,ifna«  ,cn''Si  ,^i:ain  ,Bn;«   ,©n;«  ,  (2)  ^n-«©in  ,^inr^ri   ,afc3 

.^"^nnoin  ,D^n''t?i;^  ,^?''^'ii^  /tDDnnis 

Remark  38.  The  interrogative  n  is  employed  in  simple 
direct  questions,  n;;nxn  shall  Hive?  in  indirect  questions 
Diii  is  more  usual ;  inquire  '^VX}^  Q^  lohether  I  shall  live. 

39.  In  a  disjunctive  question,  direct  or  indirect,  the 
first  member  is  introduced  by  ri  and  the  second  ])y  DSi , 
e.  g.^  xb-Dbj:  ^^nto  nSffinn  toilt  thou  heep  (or  in  dependf  ac€ 


LESSONS    EST    READING   HEBREW.  129 

on  a  previous  verb,  [to  hnozo~\  whether  thou  loilt  heejp) 
his  commandments  or  not  f 

'      :•       -r.  T       I  •  -:    r  v   -:  '  v   •••    -         t  v  t   ;  -  it  :  rr    :     •    -  ••       v: 

^sn  nnx)   ji<b-nyt  inisia  nbcnn  ^nnba  nci^-njj  n:?ib'^  "^?7^? 
i5b  Ji^ni^n-bDi  ^2^3  ri^  ■'s  r"in  jn^^rii^  n^a   bs?   nin-i  -im-nci^ 

f     V  IT  T         T  :         •        T       »     "  •  -   ••  T    :    -  ••  -  T       :  •.•    •  :•  -. 

••  :  IT :  -  IT  -:  r  '•.••.•-•        -:  ••  •  -  ••  ••  •  '      :  •:   -  v  t   :    - 

V  ••    T  '-TV  T       :  •  :  :•    ••  T.  n         •••  :  ••  -  ••:-:- 

....  .  .  .  ;.         .        .  .  ........ 

'  Pret.  with  Vav  Conversive.  *  §  52.  1.  »  g  50.  2.  *  §  48.  1. 

22.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs,  §  59. 

The  Piel  of  Q'lp  means  to  raise  :  the  Niphal,  which  is  not  in  use,  may  in  thia 
exercise  be  rendered  to  be  risen. 

Translate  and  give  tlie  corresponding  forms  of  btajj  : 

,  ^ttip7  ,  oniiaipj  ,  (2)  np-^ia^n  ,  TOjb  ,  njiaj?  ,'  (2)  o^p  ,  (2)  op 
,  (3)  ^latjip  ,  ^Di-b^pi   ,  n-bipD   ,  n^ip;   ,  nip?   ,  (2)  nipj   ,  ^la^p;; 
,^ts^p,^t:np  ,Diaipi3  ,  (2)  nsMipi^  ,(2)n5ia^ipn  ,  (2)  DPiaiaip 

jD'ipij  ,t2^p^  ,^?^fe5?  , '^O^i'^'^pn  ,DpT  jD-^p;  ,^tt^l?n  j^^'^pn 
,  inwpn  ,  (2)  ^n'^S   ,  (3)  a^n   ,  ^n'^S;'   ,  wi'^n   ,  ^nn   ,  D'bipin'i 

.(2)^3i9'ip;»  ,nb'ip;'  ,^^T^ 

Eemark  40.  When  the  predicate  precedes  its  subject, 
it  sometimes  prefers  a  primary  to  a  secondary  form,  that 
is  to  say,  it  may  be  put  in  the  masculine  instead  of  the 
feminine  and  in  the  singular  instead  of  the  plural,  §  55. 1, 

41.  The  conjunction  "}  may  be  emphatically  used  be- 
tween a  noun  placed  absolutely  and  the  clause  to  which 
it  relates  §  89.  2,  tha  blessing  nin?^  it  shall  even  be 
given,  etc. 

a* 


130  LESSONS   IN    READING    HEBREW. 

42.  A  present  action  conceived  of  as  unfinished  and 
continuing  in  the  future  is  expressed  by  the  future  tense, 
§  78.  2,  i^inn  i^kxi  whence  art  thou  coming  f  the  action 
being  regarded  as  still  continuing,  whereas  in  ntixa  f^'K'a 
rvhence  have  you  come  ?  the  action  is  viewed  as  at  an  end. 

a«^i  ?fb^  DpH  }  wnb  t^)ii,  'wd  :  nDbn  nci^  im^s.  n^tfn  xb 

r    T  -  '  V    ••  -  »T    T  -  ••    :  •  T     :    IT     T  V     -!  '    V    V    -  T 

?i'')n-i^»^  i^i^v  'ipbij  nsn  tiDmnpb  npn©n  tf^ntn^^  nj^  n'ttip^b 
n^s^n  ^ni»i'>-bi5  ^nbc'^i   \  Tmr\  rra^b^n-bs  ^n^nittjni  ?rbr^-m25x  ^  bbn 

•    T         ••     :      r  V  :     :    •  -  -  t  t    -:  it  :•        >       ■  ,.-;,-      f ..    ..  ...   -;  . 

"iti^a  ''Ji'bi^  ^'^h'bi^'i  ^m  liii^v  v^^  ^-^^^  ncj^n^  trbi5  -iDbn  ^©^^^ 

V    -:  I-         AT        vs         J  •     -  r-  .    -  J    .•    -        J     •      T  •       •     T  :•    —.  r       ,!•••.  -  :    1" 

JiD-ian  nns'i    :xinr\  r&c^^  ^bn  rox    :"inpi^  d©i  n^-ai^  ^ni-an 

tt:-  T-:  r         ».-..  r....  TT  i~|t-.-  t:  t  •  x 

^byy:^  n''Dbnni2n  D-in^ab  njnDi   ''snxb  ^inns©  x'^nn  ncj^  ni^-Tn 

1  §  50.  1. 

"  Supply  the  notin  "place"  as  the  antecedent  of  the  relative,  which  is  itself 
governed  by  a  preposition  not  expressed.  Complete  the  Hebrew  sentence  by 
supplying  the  ellipsis  in  both  cases.     See  §  30.  3. 


23.  Lamedh  Aleph  Verbs,  §  60. 

rhe  Piel  of  i<St7a  may  for  the  sake  of  distinction  be  rendered  to  find  out. 

Translate  and  give  the  corresponding  forms  of  bpp : — 

,  ni^SOT   ,  t^^Ta   ,  (3)  ssttD   ,  Dni5?tiD   ,  (2)  njxitin  ,  Nit::> 

.  Mw^^  7  'init^ttjj  ,  nji^^'Q  ,  ^2x^tj ,  (2)  n:i5itipi  ,  (2)  nj^itin 
I 

Remark  43.  The  verb  K^tt  takes  a  direct  object  in  the 
Kal  to  he  full  ^anything,  and  in  the  Niphil  to  he  filled 
with  anything ;  in  the  Piel  to  fill  something  with  some- 
thing, it  may  have  two  objects. 

...  ._.  _  ...  ..        J    T  T  -  ■  /r    •  V  -  ••  I  •••  T       :  T  f:  •  - 

tuT)^  Dip    tnjTD':^   tyb^i   ni«   nit?  '^ni^'ip-ii'b  ^x^;sM  "^^  C^'?f?"^3 
:  i<"T5a   "^b    i«np  'I'ai^i   ^\   nsx'ipn-bi^   p^bi^   ^'mv\^     \  nin"bi5-bx 


LESSONS   IN    READING   HEBREW.  131 

no«  nini  'lifi^     JD'^'on-ni^  T">i?n  sbisni  ui^t^  rn'hiQ  D'^i^a  o-'-is 

...     -.  X  :  •     —.  •     IT     -  V  I       V      T     T  ..     X        .-  ^     .-  '•.•••••  •     T  •       - 

^b-i5i:3  -lint:  nb  jn«-Tn  fni^n-n^^  Tib  nnb^  n^^m  n^xtt  Tj'^n^asin 

:  n^n'bbj 

'  See  §18. 

24.  Lamedh  He  Verbs,  §  61. 

n^a  in  Kal  means  to  reveal,  i,  e.  to  uncover  a  secret,  in  Piel  to  uncoTier,  ix 
Hiphil  to  exile,  i.  e.  to  uncover  or  strip  a  land  of  its  inhabitants,  in  Hithpael  Ut 
uncov&r  one^s  self. 

Translate  and  give  tlie  corresponding  forms  of  b-bjj : — 
,  ''biin  ,  nb;\3  ,  (2)  n'isi  ,  niba   ,  ^^bj   ,  ^t^%   ,  nnbj  ,  ^bj  ,  ^ba 
,nbai3    ,nV5^    ,^'^?J?    ,0''?'^    j^^?    ?^5^    j^^^    )^x-"'l'^    rOr)*^^?? 
,nb':j^  ,Db^::  ,Db;\n  jnVsn'i   ,J^b'??   j^V?-    j^^^"^  ,  (2)  5^^?^ 

T    T  :      •    -  T      '  V  "  :  T  ;  '  ••  ••  T    T  •  ,-  T   I  V    -:  •    t 

ri-^bsbD^*  i5b  D^^'bT^n  ^'•am  n^^^T]  nsn  T'ign-b:?  a'^n'b^  n©."?  opiai^n 
n'ln-ni^  m'Dnb  nia'b©  nibDD  ^n^i  :  ^rr^sa  iiri^  n-Tn  rr^iin-'S  5ii5 
P'^i  :  ito-^s  i-^bb^  n«-iD  -itJi^D  rr^:©  nb'btj-b^^  nin^  xn^-i^  nin*' 
T'f?  ^^  Dtj  n'lj?"!©^  nt2^n  tnibi?  b:?n  5^5^^^  »^2iT^  T^i'^  n^ 
n^,s  nob5-b3  nx;^  '^m^  jbinr'^irib  T;ni5  nins'i^  jn^^n  nii3  '^d^  nsisa 

T    •  •.•    -:         T  ••  -:i-  T  :  '    :  v  v:  iv  t  •  t     :■     • 

jDbtJin^a  nnto5?3  -n»«3  n^-bten-bs  nnh  nnw5^  i^b  jnin^ 

•  IT   T  •  T    :  vr.'  •••-:-  •    -   r    -         t  -    -  t    ;  vn  t       « 

'  See  Remark  20,  Lesson  12. 

''  "^3  for  ;  or  it  may  be  translated  'but,  to  which  it  is  often  equivalent  after  a 
negative. 

^  The  feminine  in  the  sense  of  the  neuter. 


25.  Numerals,  %^^, 

Remark  44.  In  stating  dates  cardinal  numbers  are 
commonly  nsed  for  the  year  and  day,  and  ordinals  for  the 
month. 

45.  The  age  of  persons  is  idiomatically  expressed  by 
the  words  1?  mn  or  tna  daughter  prefixed  to  the  term  oi 


132  LESSONS   IN    BEADING    HEBREW 

their  life,  tlius  Ji:i?  f^.?^^?^^  son  of  eight  years  i.  e.  eigTii 
years  old. 

See  also  the  rules  in  §  73. 

ny:a^i5   ♦n''T»Jii|  E3?i^   j©"'^  Q^'^tin    \m^  rwt  x'cmi  ni£i'b» 

.     ••     :  T  T  :        ••     :  .  t  v     ~  •    T  t:  t    •  •   -:  t    :     •  ■  T    s 

:nb^b  c^ri^i^i  Di''  D'^ya^x  {nsbiJ?^  Q'^^^-ii?  o'lnij  \w^m}  D'^rn? 
-■jl  :n:©  Diy©n"na  tniia;;'  n:bo-]2i  jd'^d^'^  d;»5c  JD??®  D'^^;' 
tHpsa  nJ^5l  n©"b©  n'linbn  ^nic^  i<^n  nbbia^  ni^  njc  n'ltp'bo 
D'^pi^TCi  D^'nio'  inbxn  D^iDn^Jin  nnips?  D^^ri"©'  m'^fi^jy:  "ito?  n'^:© 
JD:'ni<^^  \t:p,'2V)  nti'bp  qbsf  D'i'nto2?i  u^vi  mj©  nifc^ia  :?nri  nsw 
Wa'iiea  5?3nx  n:T^ia   :  iD'-inb  nn^^  oi'^a  '^ffiisn  tJ'ina  D^ip)©  rora 

tbgE^n-rric^b©   jai^n  n^s^'^nn  jnsJ'isb  rT^tDw  annj^    ti^nH  ni?:j 

:  nsxn  tn^w 

T     ••     T  •  -t 

*  Observe  the  distinction  between  the  predicate  and  the  attributive. 
*§65.  3. 


The  End  of  the  Deluge.     Genesis  8,  1-9. 

t^Tvi^  rox^i^^     iD-^tin  ^^f'^i  pkn-bs?  fi^n  u^nb^  niip'^i  nana 

j::-  :   n  •  -  -it-  it-»vtt  --  rvi  ~-:i —  at-- 

n_2ni     :ni;'  n^-ja^  D''?'Qn  nsjp'a  d^bh  ^nprnj  aiir;  ?fibn  psn  byia 
n^rini     :  t2-i*ii^  ^in  ba?  rj'nnb  Di^i  -itt):?-n5'2oa  "^b^y^n  mn^  rann 

•     --;  ITT-:        r   T  T  vA-  V  ITT  it:-:  ••:-  vj-  t-- 

''cs'i  ^i^iD  lunnb  nnjca  ^n->i»3?3  ^^n-^iriyn  finii^  ^^  nioni  n^bn  rn 

i-       T  i    :  •  V       -  JT   V    :  •        •   -:  rr         H        •   —.  n  v    j    -  r-  t  :         '     a    t  r 

nbttJ^i  :  n«n  bria  a^'En  nm'i-ns?  nifci  iiiur'^  xri  nnism-nfi^  nbo-ii 

-    -  :  -  »    V   rr  T         i-    ■  '    v   -  •/   /  :  -  t  t  « /r       rr  :•  r-   ~  :  - 

ni^s^-K'bi    :nT3"7i<n  ^b  bs?^  n-^isn  ^bpn  riisnb  inxis  nsi'^n-ns 

T    :    IT  I  rr  T    -:  it         r-   !  T   "  ■     -    -  Tj-  —.  :   ■  *    •    i-  «t 

r-ixrrbD  '^DB-bis?  d^^j  ''s  nnnn-bx  rb^^  nfni  }ib.M-aDb  niiia  nii'^n 

>V«tT  TJ-J  -  •«-  r  T"-  "  T"  T»T-  T;-  I-:  -  T  T  - 

:  nnnn-bx  rh)^  nni^  xn^'"!  nfiD'^'^.  ri-^  nbr^i 

IT    -•     -  CT    ••  »T  r»T  -        »7fT--  T  «-:■- 


LESSONS  IN    READING    HEBREW.  133 


The  Creation  and  Fall.    Genesis  1-3. 
CHAPTER  L    X 

'Yai^^'i  5  D'^Tsn  ^3B-b5^  nsDH^itt  u^r\b^  mm  Dim  ^iDB-b:?  trcni  ^n'ii  3 

i"  :  w  V      J  -  IT  •/  /  »v  s.  •  :  I-  V  #T         •  :  I-  t  :  at 

?^pnn-ns  D'^n'bij  to;i^  \  "o^i^  d""*?  v?  ^"^"^^^^  ^^^^  °!*"§n  ^"^'^^  TIJ'?  ^ 

-  hi  r  rr  J"   "  w   -:  •     -    -      ;    j-  -     T-  t  it  -  j-    •  v   -:  •--»«-  ..   ;  — 

1  ^3«  Di*^  ■iph-'in''i  i^jr^n^i  0''^©  y^^p^b  o^rrbx  s'lp'^i  :  i;2'^t\'^^  s 

r    ••  i         Fv  V  •  :  p-  •/  rr         •  :  r-  •  at   t       -    »«  r  rr  •*•       «  »t»:  •  -  'i-         •  :  r- 

TV  » J    T  7  •    -    T    -  -,-..--  It  •  •         •••:  V       J  - 

D'^^n  nnpiabn  r^k  nm^^b  1  trn'bx  fc^^p^i  \  p-^rr^i  n©3'^n  nxnni  •» 

•   T  -         rh    •  t  Ivv  TT--  «■       rs  tH---        M"  •:!-  ATT--  ivTi~: 

t"!?^r?  ^S'7f)    0*^5?'^^  '^^^;!5    5  nitj-13  n'^f^'bx  k^;i   D'lTa;?   xng  11 

-  (r  :    •  :  «•  j  •       »t  v      j  -  r     •     :  /  iv  i  *  :  i- 

»t:  '-tj:  :         «t:  t:at-'j~  \.  -     1    t-  ■    :    -  :  •     -    r    ~ 

i  p-'^n'^n  t'li^n-b:?  n^^i^nb  Q^^is^n  s^'^p'ia  niij^tjb  ^^nn  ?  d"':©i  to 
rbciaiab  bnan  nixian-ni^  nibnan  nhis5T2n  '^sc-ni^  D'^h'b^  tsj5?^i  16 
•jn^i  J  D''??i3n  n^i  nb^i^n  tbtyi'ab  y^y^n  "iiV-sn-r.^^  ni^n  i7 
nb-i'ini  Di'^a  Sisttbi  j  rni^n-b!?  Ti^nb  D^tt^n  5?W3  D^n'b&5  nni^  18 

T  ;  -    -  J  -  :  •   ;  F    V   rr  T         -  «   t  :  •   at   r    -       -    Ij-  ;    •  <       v:  rr 

:•  n         •  :  —  i         •  «       v:  :/--        »    v    a    -         »    j-  v    t         »    /••  •    :    -  :  , 

v-itj  D'^isn  iS'iO''.  D'^h'bi^  ntti^'^1         B         j*^^?'^!"!  ni^  nph-n^i  a 
vcyl'^^    j  D??^n  5^"?  "^^^'^5    T'^^s*"^?    ^isi:?:'   sqiyi   n;n    ttsdj  21 

I  •  «         v;  w-  ••         •   :  It   r  I      <  r  ••   ;  v  ••       |.   :  .      -     _  •     rr 

• .     -   -  ...  «  :    •  :  J  :  a       ••  «       -.i  jt  '  v  *t  t  -    *'*• 

"•ni-i '::  V.  1. 


134  LESSON'S   IN    READING    HEBREW. 

23 

^*  •       ■*  r        •    -:  J  f:,.  •  •  ,-  .• «  •  .•  |-  I     V   rr  t  vr        I     v    t  j 

fn^-in^ni   to^j   ™r}?   '^r^t'   '^tH  ^^?,?    T'D^f^   ^T^n   DTi'bs 

T    ••    :    -  •.  :  T       •   •         I    V    T    T  -    -  V  ..-:  -J--  f,-  .  .  ,-  AT      •    : 

26  "TQi^;;]   :  nrj-^3  Q'^Q^^  ^7,!!!]  ^n.?""^^  ^''^l^.\i  ^^T-l  ^'^^"^   ^S^"*?^ 

T    :  •  -  I    •.•   IT  T         -  /"IT  V  «T   T         T    :  I    r    T    T         T    :  T    •■    :    -  •    -    t    - 

nnpDn    "IDT    ini5   «na    D-^n'bx   cbsa   iisbaria   D'lxrrrK  .  D'^n'bx 

«'••  :  /TT  A  JT  T  «        vi  V  IV  :  :    -    :  r    t    it  t  -C.        VI 

28  ^nn^    ^ns  D-^n'bi^   Dhb  ^12^^^   D-^irbx   nri^   ^nn'^i    :  Dni^   i^na 

V   :  '    :  •        v:  V  t  v  -  •        «  T  '  V  JT :  -  rr  rr  r 

IT  -         T    :  •     -    T    -  I     J    :  T    -       ^  -  ;    .  .  T  A\    ;    •  :         J    v   «t  r  v  j  s     • 

29 "  nTt)5?"b3-ni?    Dib   ^r\ri5   hsn   D'>n*bi<   'iis^^'^'i    :  v^i^n-bs?   ntohn 

•-•J-        T  :■  :•  T  •     -T  ••    .  •        •ft  V      J-  I    V   IT  T         -  V  n      «T 

-J-  F    V-         •    :  /  V   -:        I   V-  T         T  V  !        J    V    T    T         T         J"  ;  -  V   -:  -•.•       —  j" 

*>  ibbb^  Qiia^^n  aiy-bDb^  r^ii^Ji   n^n-bDb^   :  nbDsb  rr^n^  ODb  riT 

J  :  •     -    T    -  I  T  :  J    V    T    T  J-  -         T  t  IT  :    T  :  r.-    :  i-  /vr       "^   -At 

II"  •  :  I-         AT  :    -r  :  v  ir      •     v  rr        t  v  t    -  vjk  v   -:       I    v    t    t         -  j~ 

•  :  |-  V  /»         •  I  I-  *    :  V         ~    •  :  T    T  jv  -:        t  •■•  •        vt  :  <-  - 

3D        ni&T&n  Di'*^  nph 

CHAPTER  11.      n 

"     "*  •       •     :     -  J  -  •         v:  «-  ;  -  it  t    :  r  •  !    v   it   t  :  •   ,-  r    -  v   \  :  - 

3  "5213  nn©  in  •'d  inb^    mp'^n   ^J'-'nuJn  ni^'-ns^    D^iTbi^   tiin'^i 

T    •  -    T  <  j>  A  x-y-  i  ~  •       •     :    -  J  •••  •       VI  '  V  «T :  - 

4  D-^^ouJn  niibin  nbi^        3d       :  niizjs^b  D'^n'bb^  sin-^t?«  iriDxb'a 

•   »-   T    -  «  :       I  V  J-  I   -:  I-  X       •■"■  /T  T  \-    -:  :        -    : 

n  n-»TD  I  bbi  :  D'^'a©^  V"i^  D'irTbx  nitT^  nito:?  ni^a  nsn^ns  pi^ni 

-      J-  J  ;  •    IT    T  :        1    :•  rt  v       v:  rr       :  »  -:  :  at  :   rr   •    :        F    v   it  t  i 

n'^b-an  s'b  ^3  nm^  dtj  n^t^n  ni^g-bsi  i^-i^n  r;;:r;;:  d^t:  niton 
G  nbs?*^  n&5i   t  na^i5n-n&5  ih^b  vk  dini  v'licn-bs'   o'^nb^^  nin** 

JV  -:i-  «■  :  it  T    -:   it  i    -t  i-         '  •     -  JT   t  ;  I     v    t    t  -  •         •.•:  «T        : 

'7  -ni5   D^'h'bi^   nnn^i   ^t<>^   :  nani^n  ^3S3-b3-nx   nptni   pxnn'a 

•        -.t  T       z  V       •  -  IT  T    -:  IT  r  :         t  v  rr     :     •  :  »    •■■  at  t      '   • 

VT   T    IT  »•  :  -  /f    -  J-     :  •  IT    -     :  /-  •  -  t   r    -:  jr      I    •  t  t  t    t    rr 

3  -ni5   air?  oto^-i   anpa   ins^a  p   a'^n'bi^    nin^i   yfe'^i   :  n^^n  C3d5!j 
9  nana   ry-ba  naij^n-p   o'^n'b^^  nin->  nm^'i   \  -is*^  "it&x  D'lsn 

/T    :  •-•  »   •/•  T  T   T    -:  JT      '    •  ■         vt  «T        :  -    :  -  -  "T  t  /v  -:  »t  t    rr 

:2?n3  nia  n^'Mn  f?i  lan  tjinn  a'^':nn  f^!'!  bj^ab  nian  nsnab 
^  n2?mi5b    n'^m    "jns'^    airai   15n-nx   nSprnb   p5?a    i^s'i  "inD-^ 

;t  r    :     -   :  it    t  :  "  t  •  t     •  V    -  v  'i      :     -  :  '  • J"  t  r  j 

11  nb-'nnn    r-^.j^-b^    ni5    nnbn    tc^n    liTO'^s    nnxn    a©    t  D'^^^^n 

T  •     -:     I-  1       ■■    JV  T  -V  ...  J  '  A  •  IT     V      ft  '"  '  T 

12  J  an-^n  insji  nbnan  b«  nia  »inn  T^'^SO  ^vS^?   *  ^0?^^  3®"^'?S 


LESSOITS   US'   READINa   HEBREW. 


135 


Jnnt)  x^n  ^:;''n"in  nn:nn  n^tjx  na-ip  -fbhn  s^^.n  bjj^n  ^it^biBt} 
J  n-ittirbi  m337b  pr-pn   ^nns'^n   n";ijn-n?«   D-^n'biit    nin^'  n;5^1  .cd 
f?ri^  :b5i5P  bbij  Ijn-fj  bbtj  -ibxb  n^ijn-b?  DT;bs  rrr.;"  ns;'^  ^^ 
jn^^P.  ni^a  ^3:9^  T^bDSf:  Di;;a  '^i  ^s-g^  bj^^n  fc^b  5?^n  nit:  n^fin 
'ITS?    ib-ntos^K    i'^nb    D'ls^n    ni-^n   nrj-i^b    D'^n'bK    nirr'   n^b^^'i  is 

•/  <•  <  ;•  v:  r.-  A  -  :  IT  T    rr  '    •-•!  »  I  *        •'  JT       :  v  - 

qi^-b^  nxn  nnisn  r^n-bD  n^7«n-;i3  n'^n'b^   Kin';'  n^^i  ji'^.n^Dig 
Dis^n  ib-«np^  n©«  'bbi  ib-N^p'^-ntt  nixib  nnxn-bx  iin^i  n^hwn 

7T  t    it         »  t»T  •  •-•    -:  :  A  tI:  .  -  i    :   •  t    ■>•  jr  •••  ••  r  -  •    -     r    - 

&i:?bi    ni2nnn-bDb   ni-a©    D'lxn    i^'ip^n     :  ir©    K^n    n^^n    ir5D2  a 

'1     J  :  t    ••    :    -         r  :  ••  t    r    tr  t>:  •  -  I    j  /  ct   -  •• /r 

nin^   'bs':^   :  i'l^Ds  nrj  «2^"^b  DiJjb^  n^ten  rjn  bbb^  D?i?i?n  21 
^m  iiiD'^1  rii3?bs£i3  tini^  ns'^i  lo^'^n  D'li^n-bs?  rra'Tnn  1  wribt^ 

ITT  .»:•-  Ti-'  --  f-  •  -         J  at--  ittit         -  »t"[-  *« 

tiTTscb  mi5nn«  npb-m»i<  2?b2rn-nx  1  n^n'bx  nHn^  p^^i   :  nsnnn  22 

XT   T  -    T    -:   I-  V  '.M J  T    T     rr  V  —  IT    T   I T  V  T    ^^     •    :   -      *• " 

TB-'k-nr:?'^   p'b'Sf  :ni^-T-nnpb  xo^iaici  ^"d  r\m  i^ip-^  rii^rb  'i^tJSt]  24 

•         T  -:i-         1  ■•         -  ,  tTtjiv  V   ••  J-  T    •  r-fr  '  i  a-    t    :     • 

on-'StD  'i^n^n   :  nrifc^  ntenb  ^^ni  ihmii  pnni  i-ax-ni^i  i^nic-r.i^  na 

V    ••    s         ■«    { !•  -  IT  r  JT »  I  V  •«•  :  :    •   J       »   j-  r  i  a    •  v  ••  v  t 

ncttJan'^  i^bi  inci^i  D^i^n  D-^ii:^"^? 


CHAPTER  III.    a 

ntti^'^i  D'^n'ba^  nirr^  n©:?  nox  niton  n^n  Sb-a  b^*^^?  n'^n  ©nsn".  - 

It       •n  JT       t  \T  r  IT  ■:  •••    t    -  j-  -  r  jt   t  t  t    -  j     B* 

n^^m   Man  p  bbtt  ^Di^n   i^b    u^rib^   n^&^-^s   &i5    r-i-i^n-bic  2 

V        J  -  I  rr  -        I  i"  V    •  2         I  J  •       v;  j-    r       r  i  -«  t     •  jt  v 

*^an-!yin3  -iwi^}  f3?n  "inspi  tbjss  ]^TT?.  ''!}S?^  ^Or^^"^?  "^^\3  3 
itti^'^i    J  l^n-QP-is    in   ^:?5n  j^bi   ^31213   tesn   i^b  D^n'bs*  n^&5  4 

■-■       '  ~  '       I     \     :       '  ■•'  A  V  :     •  i  :  •.•     •  :  i  ■«  •        v:  j-    t 

DDbDi^  Di"'3  "^i  D-^h'bx  ^1^  -^s  :i^jn'ar\  ni-a-fc^b  n-ir^^'n-b^  tnsn  n 
nfeijin  s-ini  :  ^^)  nit:  ^§7*;'  Q'ln'bss  on'^^'nT  Dj^r?  -i^IT^PT  ^sis'a  6 
b^b'wrb  y^n  n^ansi   o-'rs^b  &5^n-nixn   ^si   bbi^-ab  ri^n  nit:  *^s 

•     :    -  :        J    ■•    t  <t    :  V  :  •  -     ••  rr  j  r    -:  i-  *  ;  t    -:  i-  :         !     ••   ■^  j* 

w  n:npsrii   :  bn^^^i  n^jr  n^-ibitb-Da  inn;]  bji^ni  i^^'nstj  n;?  nn  7 
sn*ii\n  nnb  ^19?;]^  n;&5n  nb?  ^nsn'^j  on  D'an'^j  ■»5  ^2?"i;:i  cn-'rp 
K^nnri   oi^'n  m^b   wn   nbnn^   D^n'bs^   nin^   bip-r^^   ^ii2t^^  8 

•  '  "J:  I  IT-  '  i"    "    :     •  *f       rt  st:  f  v  :;*r" 

^P?  ^^i?''5  J  Ijn  ys?  tjitin  D-'h'bNi  nin;'  ^rs-a  inr^^n  D'^Jijn  9 
153   '^n:?^?©   ?^bp-ni<   -rai^^'n    t  ns^^^  ib   n^i^^^i    Dixn-:^*    D^r*b«  'i 

AT  .    \      r  J     .  t,  -  T  r.-   -  I  J  -  KT        >T  (f        •■•: 

nnj;  Dys?  '^n  ?^b  Tan  ^^  na^^h   *^=^r}¥i  "'Pr^  dT?""'?  ^T^3  ^i 

p-iiTD  "ifTN  ic:-;  V.  25. 


136  LESSONS   IN   KEADINO   HEBBEW. 

13  '^'n^h    I  bpi^n    fs^n-i-a  ^^-n^ns   xin  ^^la:?  nnw   *^ir«  iimr\ 

-  r-rr  Jrr;-  r  T:rr  *  •»•  tj-t  jv-:  r-tr 

'^D^'iT&n  ©nsn  nfei^n  nia^^ni   n''i»3?  n^^mia  n©xb  D'^n'bM   nirr^ 

•     f         •      '  JTT-  T'lT  -  #fT  J  -  W'lT  ^»I  »TJ 

1  i  npx  ^^ii^  ni<-T  n^'tor  ^3  ©nan-bx  .  o'^n'bi^  nin*^  n^ai^^i  :  bDi^n 

r  X         T  c  »TTi  '--j'::         -  /err-  ^-  v-  t-i-        t- 

AT  :  -  I    J-  »'-::-        1    /"  T    •    rr  /    j~  ' :     i-  •    t  jt     ••  :  '    i¥  • 

tynp^Bn  ^©"li^-bi^i  B'^n  "^"ibn  nsss^a  ?rihnn  ^sinsry  ihaii^  nann 
i^5Db^rii  ^n©x  bipb  fis^^ic  ^s  n^i^  nns^bn      d       j^si-bM^  x^ni 

-'•.•:•  »j:t:-tj-  -t  jtti  irrt-:'  \  \ 

T  T   -:  rr  «t  -:  k:    •  r  '  "  I       .     .    .  ^  ^         |     ..   ,      7 

18  t[b  rr^^sn  ^"^nii  ripi   j  h'^^h  ''^^  bb  nsbD^^n   iinstr^a  ?in^n:?a 

'at        -     j-  :    -  r-  :  - :        1      O  :  •   n*  -  /- ;  ^.  t  r  -:       1         1         t  •    ;         '  v         -.1- 

19  -bi^   ^n^iD  ^5'  dnb   bDi^n  ii'ifc^  nr^rsi  :  niton   nter-nx  nbDxi 
ij  snp^i    J  ni»n  "i&r-bi^i   nr\&  idst^s  p\npb  nstiti   '^s  n-bn^n 

iTf:  •-  ,T  «TT  vt  T-  jrrr  T:wr\  t    <a    '  r  tt-:j» 

21  nHn*^   'te:?'^i    :  '^n-bs  oi^  nn'^n  Kin  *^3  Ts-^n  incx  d®  nnxn 

t:  ---  ^       ^  f.  »t:it  *•  -r  m  -  *:•  /-»tt»t 

22  .  "iisi^'^i         B         J  Dtoab'^n   ni5'  ntns  intjxb^  ni^^b   D'^h'bi^ 
•  nr^i  rii  nia  mib  isfeia  'inxs  ri^n  b'li^n  in  d-^nbi^  nin*' 

JT  -  :  at  T  J  -  r-  T  V    •  J-  -  :  t   ▼  t   t   rr       > «-  •        v.  jt      j 

23  ^innbuj'^i   :  Dbi^b  ''ni  bDi^i   D^^nn  rra  ca    fjpbi   iT  nbtji-ia 

24  ©ns^i   J  Dtoi3  npb  iTTi^  nfan^^n-n^^  ii:^  psrw^  d^^nbi^  nin? 

vit:i-  rr    •  K- v  *v  -:  t  t    -:  jt  v  -:r-         1  V/r      1-    •  X       v  n      ' 

ininn   t:nb  t)^^    d'^i'n^n-nij    n^l5\^   ^^I^''?    1^^?^    °!3?T^^ 


Masoretic  Notes  Explained. 

•'nnn  'n    .     .     .     .     Large  Beth. 
Ki'^l^r  'n     .     .     .     .     Small  He. 
pTO  nn«  ©an     ....     Dagluesh  after  Shurek. 


LESSONS  IN  WRITING  HEBREW 


1.  The  Prefixed  Particles,  §§  24-28. 

Translate  into  Hebrew : — 

A  house  and  field.  A  field  and  a  house.  In  a  house. 
In  the  house.  To  a  house.  To  the  house.  As  a  house. 
As  the  house.  From  a  house.  From  the  house.  The 
house  in  the  field.  From  the  house  unto  the  field.  Light 
and  darkness.  Day  and  night.  From  night  to  night  and 
from  day  to  day.  Darkness  in  the  night.  Light  in  the 
day.  As  the  sun  in  the  heavens.  The  darkness.  The 
evening.  Evening  and  morning.  As  the  sea.  Light 
from  the  sun  in  the  day  and  from  the  moon  and  from  the 
stars  in  the  night.  Bread  from  the  field  for  man  and  for 
beast.  And  flesh.  And  the  flesh.  And  from  the  flesh. 
And  to  the  flesh.  As  flesh.  Not  day  nor  (lit.  and  not) 
night.     From  sun  to  stars.    From  the  sun  unto  the  stars. 

2.  The  Personal  Pronouns,  §  29. 

Direction  1.  In  conformity  mth  Remark  2  on  page  111, 
possessives,  when  not  immediately  followed  by  the  object 
possessed,  are  to  be  rendered  by  the  preposition  b  thus,  lam 
my  beloved's  and  my  beloved  is  mine  ^^  "^"fnTi  '^ni'ib  ''ps? . 
The  verb  to  Tiave  must  be  paraphrased  by  the  same  pre- 
position, e.  g.  You  have  a  brotlier  n^j  DDb  lit.  a  broilier  is 
to  you;  He  has  tio  son  "ji  ib  y^s?  lit.  tliere  is  no  son  to 
him. 


138  LESSONS  IN  WBITINa   HEBREW. 

Translate  into  Hebrew : — 

Ye  masG,  I  and  he.  Tliey  Tnasc,  and  they  fern.  She 
and  thouy^7?i.  Ye  fe'tn,  and  we.  In  us.  In  them  (m. 
and  /.).  In  me.  In  her.  In  thee  (m.  and  /.).  In  you 
(m.  and  /.).  From  eternity  unto  eternity  thou  art  God. 
From  iGrod  to  us.  From  me  to  you.  We  are  in  the 
house,  ye  are  in  the  field.  He  is  in  the  light,  I  am  in 
darkness.  The  earth  is  Jehovah's.  The  silver  is  mine 
and  the  gold  is  his.  Heaven  is  thine.  God  is  for  us. 
God  is  not  like  man.  We  are  like  you.  He  is  like  us. 
The  house  is  yours,  and  the  field  is  theirs.  The  sea 
is  his.  The  bread  is  mine.  I  have  no  bread  in  the  house. 
We  have  a  brother;  he  is  still  living.  You  have  no 
brother.     There  is  no  beast  in  the  field. 


3.  Othee  Pronouns,  §  30. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

This  house.  In  this  house.  This  is  the  house.  That 
field.  From  that  field.  That  is  the  field.  God,  who  is 
in  the  heavens.  Who  is  in  the  heavens?  The  bread, 
which  is  in  the  house.  What  is  in  the  house  ?  Who  am 
I  ?  What  are  we  ?  These  stars.  These  are  the  stars. 
From  this  day.  In  this  day.  Whose  is  this  house? 
Whose  is  that  bread  ?  The  place  in  which  we  are.  The 
land  in  which  I  am.  Who  is  this  masc.  ?  What  is  this 
fern,  ?  Who  art  thou  fern.  ?  Is  this  ^  thou  ^  masc,  f 
This  field,  in  which  thou  art.  The  land,  from  which  they 
are.  These  waters,  which  are  fi*om  the  sea.  Jehovah  is 
mine  and  I  am  his.  Ye  are  light  in  Jehovah.  We  be- 
long to  the  day :  we  belong  not  to  the  night  nor  to  dark- 

Q<'3S. 


lessons  in  weiteng  hebrew.  139 

4.  Perfect  Verbs.     Kal  Preterite  and  Ineintitves, 

§33. 

Write  the  Kal  preterite  and  infinitives  of  ^'bj^,  'in?  and 
bbw  in  all  their  forms  as  they  appear  in  the  paradigm^ 
with  the  proper  signification 'attached  to  each. 

Translate  into  Hebi'ew  : — 

She  killed.  They  killed.  We  killed.  To  Mil.  Thou 
(masc.)  killedst.  I  killed.  Ye  (masc.  and  fern.)  killed. 
He  killed.     Thou  (fern.)  killedst. 

Thou  (m.  andy.)  wast  bereaved.  We  were  bereaved. 
Ye  (m.  andy.)  were  heavy.  She  was  bereaved.  I  was 
heavy.  They  were  heavy.  He  was  heavy.  He  was  be- 
reaved.    To  be  bereaved. 

Direction  2.  In  Hebrew  sentences  the  verb  commonly 
precedes  its  subject,  and  both  precede  the  object  unless 
the  emphasis  requires  a  different  collocation,  e.  g.  i^'^? 
D^'aijri  nx  U^tib^  God  created  the  heavens.  But  if  a  per- 
sonal pronoun  be  either  the  direct  or  indirect  object  it  is 
usually  placed  immediately  after  the  verb  D'ln'bij  ib  "jnj 
tJ^D^i  God  gave  to  hirti  jprojperty. 

Translate  into  Hebrew  : — 

I  shut  the  house.  She  shut  the  door.  He  shut  the 
heavens.  They  ruled  over  this  land.  Who  gave  you 
(Heb.  to  you)  those  vessels  ?  To  whom  did  he  give  this 
field  ?  What  did  they  give  me  ?  The  sun  ruled  over  the 
day  and  the  stars  ruled  over  the  night.  Thou  didst  pour 
water  from  the  heavens  upon  the  earth.  He  poured. 
She  gave  us  gold  and  silver  in  the  vessels.  They  gave 
to  him  honor  and  majesty.  They  kept  the  command- 
ment.    We  kept  the  Sabbath.     God  gave  us  a  command- 


140  LESSONS   USr   WElTIj^G    HEBREW. 

ment  to  keep  the  Sabbath.  He  rested  id  this  day,  bo 
cause  it  was  the  Sabbath.  The  darkness  was  very  great. 
I  dwelt  in  the  house.  They  dwelt  in  the  field.  This  is 
the  bread  which  Jehovah  has  given  to  you. 


5.    NrPHAL,  PlEL,  AKD  PuAL 'PeETERITES   AND  iNTlNITrVES, 

§  34. 

Write  the  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  preterites  and  infini- 
tives of  bttj  with  their  significations. 

Translate : — 

He  was  killed.  To  be  killed.  I  was  killed.  We  were 
killed.  She  was  killed.  Thou  (m,  and  /.)  wast  killed. 
Ye  (m.  and  /.)  were  killed.     They  were  killed. 

They  massacred.  They  were  massacred.  She  was 
massacred.  I  massacred.  Ye  (m.  and/.)  massacred. 
We  massacred.  To  massacre.  To  be  massacred.  Thou 
(m.  and  /.)  wast  massacred.     He  was  massacred. 

The  house  was  sanctified.  The  tabernacle  and  the  ark 
were  sanctified.  Thou  {m,  and  /)  wast  sanctified.  Ye 
(m.  and  /.)  were  sanctified.  To  be  sanctified.  To  sanc- 
tify this  day.  This  is  the  day,  which  Jehovah  has  sanc- 
tified. They  sanctified  this  place.  I  sanctified  the  taber- 
nacle and  the  vessels  which  were  in  it.  Ye  were  sepa- 
rated fi^om  them.  The  day  was  separated  fi'om  the  night. 
We  were  separated  from  you.  He  was  separated  from 
us.  We  were  separated  from  him.  They  subdued  the 
land.  They  were  subdued  before  you.  Ye  were  sub- 
dued. He  has  sworn  to  gather  you  to  this  land.  The 
door  was  shut  in  the  place,  in  which  they  were  gathered. 
What  did  ye  gather  ?  We  gathered  bread.  Flesh  was 
gathered.  They  have  sworn.  We  have  sworn.  She  has 
sworn. 


LESSONS  IN  WErriNG  HEBREW.  141 

6.  TiiE  EEMAiNma  Peeterites  and  Infinitives,  §  35. 

Write  tlie  preterite  and  infinitives  with  their  significa- 
tions in  the  Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  of  bt?}; . 

Translate : — 

I  caused  to  kill.  She  killed  herself.  They  killed 
themselves.  Ye  (m.  and  y!)  were  caused  to  kill.  To  kill 
one's  self.  To  cause  to  kill.  To  be  caused  to  kill.  We 
were  caused  to  kill.  Thou  (m.  and  /,)  MUedst  thyself. 
He  caused  to  kill. 

We  separated  the  silver  from  the  gold.  He  separated 
the  darkness  from  the  light.  Thou  didst  separate  Israel 
from  all  the  nations  which  are  in  all  the  earth.  I  was 
made  king.  Thou  wast  made  king.  Is  it  a  little  (thing) 
to  be  made  king?  A  little  bread.  A  little  flesh.  A 
little  gold.  A  little  silver.  They  cut  off  the  nations. 
The  nations  were  cut  ofE.  Bread  was  cut  off  from  the 
house.  Bread  and  oil  were  cut  off.  We  were  cut  off. 
She  cut  off  man  and  beast  from  the  land.  They  caused 
the  kingdom  to  cease.  He  made  the  kingdom  small.  We 
made  small.  Whom  did  she  destroy?  What  did  she 
destroy  ?  Thou  (m,  and  f.)  didst  purify  thyself.  I  did 
not  purify  myself.  She  purified  herself.  Ye  (m.  and/.) 
purified  yourselves.  They  brought  the  water  near  to  the 
king  David  and  he  poured  it  out  before  Jehovah.  He 
consecrated  the  oil  and  anointed  the  tabernacle,  the  ark 
and  all  the  vessels.  We  consecrated  all  the  silver  and 
the  gold  to  Jehovah. 

7.  Kal  Future,  Imperative,  and  Participles,  §  36. 

Write  the  Kal  future,  imperative  and  participles  oi 
bbp ,  and  the  futures  of  'lis  and  bSio*. 


142  liESSONS   IN   TVRITING   HEBREW. 

Translate : — 

Thou  (m.  and  /.)  wilt  kill.  We  shaU  kilL  I  sliaL 
kiU.  He  will  kill.  They  (m.  and/)  will  kill.  She  will 
kill.  Ye  (m.  and  /)  will  kill.  Kill  ye  (m.  and  /.). 
Killed.     Killing.     Kill  thou  (m.  and/.). 

Thou  wilt  rule  over  us.  He  will  rule  over  them.  The 
stars  shall  rule  over  the  night.  The  sea  shall  not  rule 
over  the  earth.  Rule  thou  over  the  nations.  .  He  is 
ruling.  She  is  ruling.  We  are  ruling.  Ye  shall  rest  in 
the  Sabbath.  Rest  ye  {m.  and/)  with  me  in  the  house. 
Keep  thou  {m.)  this  beast.  Keep  thou  (/)  that  bread. 
Who  is  keeping  the  silver?  Jehovah  is  keeping  Israel. 
Jehovah,  who  is  keeping  Israel,  will  also  keep  us.  God 
shall  keep  thee  in  the  day  and  in  the  night.  We  shall 
dwell  in  heaven.  Shut  (7n.piythe  door.  I  shall  shut 
the  gate.  She  is  shutting  the  house.  The  virgins  are 
dwelling  in  the  house.  The  wild  beast  is  dwelling  in  the 
field.  He  will  subdue  all  the  nations  which  are  under 
heaven.  Thou  shalt  be  clothed  with  majesty  and  splen- 
dor.    I  will  keep  what  I  have  spoken. 

8.  NiPHAL,  PlEL,  AND  PuAL  FuTURES,  ETC.,  §  37 

Write  the  future,  imperative,  and  participle  of  the 
Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual  of  isb^ . 

Translate : — 

We  shall  be  massacred.  Ye  {m.  and/)  will  massacre. 
She  will  massacre.  I  shall  be  killed.  He  will  be  killed. 
Thou  (ni,  and/)  wilt  massacre.  They  (m.  and/)  will 
be  massacred.  Be  thou  (m,  and/)  killed.  Massacre  ye 
(t/l  and/).     Killed.     Massacred.     Massacring. 

Ye  will  be  separated  from  us.  They  will  be  shut  in 
tjie  house  until  the  morning.     All  the  people  will  be 


LESSONS   IN   WmriNG   HEBEEW.  143 

sanctified.  The  company  will  be  sanctified.  These  \dr. 
gins  will  be  sanctified.  Those  nations  will  be  sanctified. 
We  shall  be  sanctified.  Ye  (m.  and/.)  will  be  sanctified. 
Thou  (m.  and/.)  wilt  be  sanctified.  I  shall  be  sancti- 
fied. Jehovah  will  be  honored.  Be  ye  honored.  I 
will  honor  them  who  honor  me  (lit.  the  [ones]  honor- 
ing me).  I  will  sanctify  the  priests.  He  will  sanctify 
them.  They  will  sanctify  us.  It  belongs  to  the  priests 
to  honor  this  house.  It  is  not  for  me  to  honor  him. 
They  will  speak  to  thee.  To  whom  will  ye  speak  ?  God 
is  speaking  to  us  from  heaven.  Wilt  thou  speak  to  me  ? 
Speak  ye  to  them.  I  will  take  heed  that  I  do  not  speak 
evil.  Will  the  gate  be  shut  ?  Will  they  be  shut  up  in 
Jericho  ? 


9.    HrPHIL,  HOPHAL,  AIH)    HlTHPAEL    PuTURES,    ETC.,    §  38. 

Write  the  future,  imperative,  and  participle  of  the 
Hiphil,  Hophal,  and  Hithpael  of  bbj . 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m.  and/)  will  be  caused  to  kill.  We  shall  kill 
ourselves.  Kill  thyself  (m.  and  /.).  Causing  to  kill. 
Thou  (m,  and/)  wilt  cause  to  kill.  Cause  ye  (m.  and 
/)  to  kill  They  (m.  and  /)  will  kill  themselves.  I 
shall  be  caused  to  kill.  Killing  one's  self.  Caused  to 
kill.     He  will  be  caused  to  kill.     She  will  cause  to  kill. 

I  withheld  the  rain  from  you.  I  shall  cause  it  to  rain 
upon  this  field  and  I  shall  not  cause  it  to  rain  upon  that 
field.  Thou  wilt  clothe  them  with  (lit.  cause  them  to 
put  on)  splendor  and  majesty.  He  will  clothe  the 
heavens  with  darkness.  Clothe  (2  m.  s.)  all  the  nations 
with  joy  and  gladness.     He  will  be  made  king  and  ml] 


144  LESSONS   IN   WRITING   HEBREW. 

be  lionored  in  all  the  land.  Ye  will  be  caused  to  reiga 
We  shall  be  caused  to  reign.  Thou  wilt  be  caused  to 
reign.  What  shall  I  offer  to  God  ?  Shall  all  the  rem 
nanfc  be  cut  ofE  ?  Joy  shall  be  cut  off  from  Israel.  All 
these  nations  shall  be  cut  off.  Shall  we  cause  the  work 
to  cease  ?  Who  shall  separate  us  from  him  ?  What  shall 
separate  him  from  us  ?  I  am  separating  between  good 
and  evil.     He  shall  cause  them  to  dwell  in  the  land. 


10.  Paragogic  and  Apocopated  Future  and  Imperative 
AND  Vav  Conversive,  §§  40,  41. 

Direction  3.  In  narrating  the  past,  the  fii'st  verb  is 
commonly  to  be  put  in  the  preterite  and  the  succeeding 
verbs  in  the  futui'e  with  Vav  Conversive,  provided  the 
verb  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause.  If,  however, 
any  verb  of  the  series  is  for  any  reason  removed  from  the 
beginning  of  its  clause  and  so  separated  from  the  con- 
junction, it  must  be  put  in  the  preterite,  §  79.  2. 

4.  In  a  paragraph  relating  to  the  future,  the  first  verb 
is  commonly  to  be  put  in  the  future  or  imperative,  as  the 
case  may  be,  and  the  succeeding  verbs  in  the  preterite 
with  Vav  Conversive,  provided  they  stand  at  the  begin- 
ning of  their  own  clause.  But  if  any  verb  of  the  series  is 
separated  from  the  conjunction  by  an  intervening  word, 
it  must  be  put  in  the  future.  < 

5.  A  negative  imperative  must  be  translated  by  ^J* 
with  the  future,  the  apocopated  form  being  used  if  om 
exists,  §  78.  8. 

Translate  into  Hebrew : — 

He  anointed  me  and  caused  me  to  reisrn  instead  of 
David.      They  drave  out  the  nations  and  subdued  the 


LESSONS   IN    WEITING   HEBEEW.  145 

land  and  dwelt  in  it.  Thou  wilt  gather  them  from  all 
the  nations,  and  cause  them  to  dwell  in  this  land,  and 
thou  wilt  reign  over  Israel  forever  (lit.  to  eternity). 
Ye  shall  keep  the  commandment  and  be  separated  from 
the  nations  and  be  consecrated  to  me,  and  ye  shall  be  great 
from  sea  unto  sea.  Cleave  thou  unto  me  and  thou  shalt 
keep  the  covenant  which  I  have  made  (lit.  cut)  with  thee 
and  thou  shalt  honor  me.  Ye  shall  not  forget.  Forget 
not  ye  what  I  have  spoken  to  you.  Take  heed  that  ye 
forget  not  the  Sabbath  to  rest  in  it  from  all  work.  Wilt 
thou  not  withhold  me  from  evil?  Withhold  not  mercy 
from  me,  O  Jehovah,  and  I  will  keep  (parag.  fut.)  thia 
commandment.  Cut  them  not  off.  We  gave  them  bread 
and  made  (lit.  cut)  a  covenant  with  them.  Pray  reign 
over  this  people.  Shut  the  door.  Pray,  shut  the  door. 
Thou  wilt  not  shut  the  door.  Do  not  shut  the  door. 
We  will  shut.     Let  us  shut. 


11.  Preteeites  op  Peefeot  Verbs  with  Suffixes,  §  42. 

a.  Third  person  masc.  and  fem.  sing,  of  the  Kal  Pre* 
fcerite. 

Write  the  3  m.  and  f.  sing,  of  the  Kal  preterite  of 
b^g  with  suffixes,  adding  to  each  form  its  proper  signifi 
cation. 

Translate  : — 

He  killed  them  {m,  and/.).  He  killed  him.  He  killed 
us.  He  killed  thee  (m.  and/.)  He  killed  me.  He  killed 
you  {rti.  and  /.).     He  killed  her. 

She  killed  us.    She  killed  you  (m.  and  /.).    She  killed 
me.     She  killed  her.    She  killed  them  (m.  and  /.),     She 
killed  him.     She  killed  thee  (m.  and  /.). 
V 


146  LESSONS   LN^    WRITING    HEBREW. 

b.  The  rest  of  tlie  Kal  Preterite. 

Write  the  remaining  parts  of  the  Kal  preterite  of  bbp 
with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

They  killed  you  (m.  and  /.).  Ye  killed  them  {m.  and 
/.).  I  killed  her.  Thou  (m,^  killedst  me.  I  killed  thee 
(m.  and/.).  "We  killed  him.  They  killed  me.  They 
killed  her,  Ye  killed  us.  Thou  (/.)  killedst  him.  We 
killed  you.  Thou  (m.)  killedst  her.  Thou  (/.)  killedst 
her.  Thou  (m.)  killedst  him.  Thou  (/.)  killedst  me. 
He  kept  you  {m.  and/.).  She  kept  him.  Ye  kept  us. 
Thou  (m.)  didst  keep  her.  Thou  (/)  didst  keep  me. 
She  kept  you  (m.  and  /).  We  kept  them  (m.  and  /.). 
They  kept  us.     I  kept  thee  (m.  and  /.). 

He  anointed  him.  He  anointed  me.  Thou  (m.)  didst 
anoint  us.  Thou  didst  p,noint  them.  They  sent  thee  {m, 
and  /.).  She  sent  her.  Ye  sent  him.  We  sent  you  (m. 
and/).  She  forgot  me.  Thou.  (/.)  didst  forget  her. 
We  forgot  her.  I  forgot  him.  He  washed  them  (m.  and 
/).     I  washed  you  (m.  and  /.). 

c.  The  Piel  and  Hiphil  Preterites. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Piel  or  Hiphil  pre- 
terite of  ^bj  with  suffixes. 

Translate,  noting  the  fact  when  the  Hebrew  is  ambiguous : 
He  massacred  them  (m,  and  /.).  We  massacred  you 
(m.  and  /.).  She  massacred  us.  Ye  massacred  us.  Ye 
massacred  them  (m.  and  /.).  They  massacred  us.  They 
massacred  you  (m,  and  /.).  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  didst  mas- 
sacre us.     He  massacred  you. 

They  caused  me  to  kill.  He  caused  you  {m.  and  /.) 
to  kill.  She  caused  to  kill  them  (m.  and  /.).  They 
caused  to  kill  her.     She  caused  thee  (jti.  and  /.)  to  kill 


LESSONS    IN    WRITING   HEBREW.  147 

i"e  caused  me  to  kill.  Ye  caused  to  kill  liim.  I  caused 
tkee  (m.  and  f.)  to  kill.  I  caused  to  kill  them  (m,  and 
y.).  Thou  {m.  and  /.)  didst  cause  to  kill  her.  Tkou 
(m.  and  /.)  didst  cause  us  to  kill.  We  caused  to  kill 
him.     We  caused  you  to  kill. 

He  made  me  great.  He  made  us  great.  He  made 
them  {m,  and/.)  great.  He  honored  you  (m.  and/.). 
He  honored  him.  He  honored  her.  He  bereaved  thee 
(m.  and  /.).  Ye  gathered  them  (m.  and  /).  She  gathered 
us.  We  honored  her.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  didst  honor  him. 
She  honored  him.  She  honored  her.  I  gathered  you  (m. 
and  /.).     They  honored  me. 

They  caused  him  to  reign  over  Israel.  Ye  caused  me 
to  put  on  the  garments.  He  caused  Eleazar  to  put  them 
on.  A  wild  beast  overtook  him  in  the  field.  Thou  hast 
caused  us  to  dwell  in  this  place.  I  have  cut  them  off 
because  they  did  not  honor  me.  Thou  hast  separated 
them  from  all  the  nations  which  are  upon  the  earth.  Ye 
brought  him  near  to  the  tabernacle.  The  sword  has 
bereaved  her,  and  she  has  neither  father  nor  daughter  nor 
brother  (lit.  to  her  is  not  father  and  not  daughter  and 
not  brother). 

12.    Futures,  etc.,  of  Perfect  Verbs  with  Suffixes, 

§42. 

a.  Kal  Future. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Kal  future  of  ^"bj 
with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

He  vi'ill  kill  us.  She  will  kill  us.  I  shall  kill  you  (vu 
and  /.).  Thou  wilt  kiH  her.  We  shall  kill  him.  She 
will 'kill  them.  They  will  kill  her.  Ye  (m.)  will  kill 
her.    Thou  (/.)  wilt  kiU  her.     Thou  (/.)  wilt  kill  me 


148  LESSONS   IN"   WRITING   HEBEEW. 

Ye  (m.)  will  kill  them.  They  will  kill  you  {m.  and 
/).  Thou  (/.)  wilt  kill  us.  She  will  kill  thee  {in, 
and/.). 

Jehovah  will  keep  us  from  all  evil.  Thou  (w.)  wilt 
keep  them  (m.  and  /.).  They  (m.  and  /)  will  remember 
me.  I  shall  remember  them.  Who  will  remember  him  ? 
Will  he  remember  her  ?  Will  she  not  remember  you  (m. 
and  /.)  ?  I  do  not  know  {pret)  him  and  how  shall  I 
remember  him  ?  We  shall  remember  thee  (m,  and  /.) 
and  not  forget  thee.  This  is  the  house ;  wilt  thou  (m, 
and  /.)  remember  it  ?  This  is  the  commandment ;  will 
they  keep  it  ?  Whose  are  these  garments  ?  I  shall  put 
them  on.  Behold  this  babe  !  will  the  mother  forget  it  ? 
(The)  Lord  will  surely  (abs,  inftn.)  remember  you. 
Thou  (in.  and  /.)  wilt  not  forget  me.  Do  not  thou  {m, 
and  /.)  forget  me. 

K  Piel  and  Hiphil  Futures. 

Write  the  different  persons  of  the  Piel  or  Hiphil  future 
of  bt:^  with  suffixes. 

Translate : — 

She  will  massacre  them  (m,  and  /.).  Will  ye  {m.  and 
/.)  massacre  us  ?  He  will  massacre  you  (m.  and  /.). 
He  will  cause  thee  (m.  and  y.)  to  kill  me.  He  will  cause 
'  to  kill  thee.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  wilt  cause  her  to  kill  us. 
I  will  cause  him  to  kill  them.  They  (m.  and  /.)  will 
cause  me  to  kill. 

Thou  (m.)  wilt  deliver  them  and  they  will  honor  thea 
The  Lord  has  remembered  us  and  crowned  (future  with 
Vav.  Conv.)  us  with  honor  and  majesty.  He  will  not 
destroy  me.  Let  him  not  destroy  me.  Jehovah,  who  is 
dwelling  in  Zion,  will  sanctify  the  people  and  deliver 
them  (Heb.  sing.  suf.  referring  to  people)  from  all  ovi) 


LESSONS   m   WEITING   HEBREW.  149 

and  cause  them  to  dwell  in  this  place  forever.  1  will 
cause  thee  to  put  on  sackcloth,  and  will  cause  joy  and 
gladness  to  cease  and  mil  utterly  {ahs.  infin?)  cut  thee 
off.  Thou  wilt  gather  us  and  make  us  great.  We  will 
separate  her  from  the  assembly.  All  the  virgins  shall 
honor  her. 

c.  Infinitive  and  Imperative. 

Write  the  Kal  infinitive  of  ^ij^  with  suffixes  and  give 
the  different  significations  of  each  form. 

Translate,  noting  the  fact  when  the  Hebrew  is  am 
biguous  and  giving  the  alternate  significations: — 

To  kill  you  (m,  and /.).  To  kill  them  (m.  andy!). 
To  kill  her.  To  kill  him.  KiU  (m,  s.  andj9?.)  her.  Kill 
(m.  s.  and^^.)  him.  My  killing.  To  kill  me.  Our  kill- 
ing. His  being  killed.  Massacre  (m.  s,  and  jpl.)  them. 
To  massacre  you  {m,  and/.).  His  massacring  us.  Your 
being  massacred.  Cause  (m.  s.  and  pi.)  him  to  kill  tho 
woman.  My  causing  you  to  kill.  Her  causing  to  kill 
them.  To  cause  him  to  kill  me.  To  cause  me  to  kill 
him.  To  cause  to  kill  thee  (m.  and/.).  Their  being 
caused  to  kill  her. 

To  keep  me.  To  keep  him.  To  keep  thee  (m.  and  f.). 
To  keep  us.  To  keep  them  {pi.  and/.).  Keep  {m.  s.  and 
pL)  them.  My  keeping  the  commandment.  Eemember 
(m.  s.  and^Z.)  me.  Here  am  I  (Heb.  '^Dsn  ,  behold  me), 
send  me.  Hear  us.  Deliver  (m.  s.)  us.  Crown  (m.  s.  and 
pV)  him.  To  honor  her.  He  has  sworn  to  (use  the  prep.) 
gather  us  and  to  cause  us  to  reign  with  him.  Honor  him 
and  he  will  not  forget  to  honor  thee.  Sanctify  us  and 
bring  us  near  to  thee.  Gather  the  priests  to  the  sancr 
tuary;  honor  them  before  all  the  people;  clothe  them  with 
(Heb.  cause  them  to  put  on)  salvation. 


150  lessons  in  writing  hebrew. 

13.   Gender  and  Number  of  JSTotjns,  §§  43-45. 

Translate : — 

A  great  war.  The  great  war.  It  is  a  great  war  (Heb. 
tlie  war  is  great).  This  war.  This  great  war.  This 
great  and  evil  war.  Great  wars.  The  great  wars.  These* 
great  wars.  These  great  and  evil  wars.  These  wars  are 
great  and  evil.  Wars  are  great  evils.  He  uttered  (Heb. 
cried)  a  great  cry.  I  will  make  (Heb.  cut)  a  new  cove- 
nant with  them.  New  garments.  These  garments  are 
new.  There  are  the  new  garments.  He  caused  me  to 
put  on  these  new  garments.  He  rent  the  new  garment 
which  was  upon  him.  A  great  kingdom.  He  shall  reign 
over  all  these  great  kingdoms.  Many  wells.  Large 
rocks.  An  evil  beast.  Good  commandments.  Many 
and  great  nations.  Large  figs.  These  large  figs.  These 
figs  are  large.  The  large  figs  are  very  large.  These  figs 
are  larger  than  those  figs.  Those  figs  are  better  than 
these.     War  is  worse  than  (Heb.  evil  from)  famine. 

14.  The  Construct  State,  §§  46,  47. 

Direction  6.  Observe  that  where  a  short  vowel  is  in- 
serted in  the  construct  plural  agreeably  to  §  47:  5,  the 
first  syllable  is  intermediate  and  a  following  aspirate  will 
not  take  Daghesh-lene,  §  9.  a. 

Translate : 

A  house  of  a  king.  The  house  of  the  king.  In  the 
king's  house  are  vessels,  of  gold  and  vessels  of  silver. 
The  vessels  of  silver  are  more  than  the  vessels  of  gold. 
The  vessels  of  gold  are  smaller  than  the  vessels  of  silver. 
The  priests  of  Jehovah  burned  incense  upon  the  golden 
altar  (Heb.  the  altar  of  gold).    Who  will  shut  the  doors 


LESSONS   IN   WEITING    HEBEEW.  151 

of  the  house  ?  The  rivers  of  the  garden.  The  waters  of 
the  sea.  The  cattle  of  the  earth,  the  beast  of  the  field, 
and  the  fowl  of  heaven.  This  is  the  sign  of  the  covenant 
wliich  I  have  made  with  you.  The  mercy  of  Jehovah  is 
from  eternity  and  to  eternity.  The  blessing  of  Jehovah, 
the  God  of  all  the  earth.  The  kings  of  the  nations.  The 
stones  of  the  field.  The  gates  of  the  city.  The  field  of 
Edom.  The  stars  of  the  morning.  Will  ye  not  keep  the 
commandment  of  the  king  ?  The  good  commandments  of 
God.  The  great  day  of  Jehovah.  Aaron  and  Eleazar 
ofEered  them  upon  the  altar. 


15.  NoTJNs  WITH  Suffixes,  §  49. 

Direction  7.  Nouns  having  suffixes  are  definite  and 
require  attributive  adjectives  joined  to  them  to  take  the 
article,  §§  69,  Vo. 

Write  the  nouns  ii"n  word  and  tJsS  soul  in  both  num- 
bers vdth  the  suffixes  in  their  order,  adding  to  each  form 
its  signification. 

Translate : — 

Thou  shalt  hear  my  voice  in  the  morning.  He  put 
(Heb.  gave)  the  ark  of  God  in  its  place.  His  mercy  is 
to  eternity.  She  caused  him  to  put  on  his  new  garments/" 
He  will  subdue  the  nations  under  us.  Thou  wilt  subdue 
them  under  our  feet.  I  will  clothe  her  priests  with 
(Heb.  cause  her  priests  to  put  on)  salvation.  My  priests 
shall  be  clothed  with  righteousness.  Ye  shall  keep  my 
Sabbaths.  I  have  kept  thy  commandment.  Hear  my 
cry.  She  will  wash  her  head,  her  hands,  and  her  feet. 
He  anointed  my  head  with  (^)  oil.  The  nations  and 
their  kings.     His  holy  tabernacle  (Heb.  the  tabernacle  of 


152  LESSONS   m    WEITING    HEBREW. 

his  holiness).  My  righteous  God  (Heb.  God  of  my 
righteousness).  He  will  not  forget  his  covenant.  His 
voice  is  breaking  in  pieces  rocks.  My  foot.  My  feet 
His  foot.  His  feet.  Their  feet.  He  has  given  salvation 
to  his  king.  Ye  are  dwelling  in  your  house.  This  is  my 
field.     Thy  field  is  larger  than  our  field. 

16.  Pe  Guttural  Verbs,  §  53. 

The  intransitive  verb  ^h'S  to  stand  does  not  in  strictness  admit  of  a  passive, 
and  accordingly  never  occurs  in  the  NiphaL  That  species,  as  found  in  the  para- 
digm, may  in  these  exercises  be  rendered  as  though  '  stand '  had  its  transitive 
sense,  he  was  stood,  etc. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  Ta?  to  stand,  the  Kal  future  of 
bifcj  to  eat,  and  the  Kal  future  and  imperative  of  p\.n  to 
be  st/rong. 

Translate : — 

Ye  {m.  and/.)  stood.  We  shall  stand.  They  {m.  and 
f.)  will  stand.  Thou  {m.  and/.)  wilt  stand.  Stand  thou 
(m.  and/)  I  shall  stand.  To  be  stood.  I  was  stood. 
She  was  stood.  Ye  (m.  and/)  will  be  stood.  Be  ye 
(m.  and/)  stood.  He  shall  be  stood.  We  shall  cause 
to  stand.  Thou  shalt  be  caused  to  stand.  Thou  (m.  and 
/.)  wast  caused  to  stand.  They  were  caused  to  stand. 
They  caused  to  stand.  Caused  to  stand.  Causing  to 
stand.  I  shall  eat.  Ye  (m.  and/)  will  be  strong.  Be 
thou  (m.  and/)  strong.     She  will  eat. 

The  curse  was  turned  to  a  blessing.  I  shall  turn  day 
to  night.  Turn  (thou)  these  stones  to  bread.  Darkness 
shall  be  turned  to  light.  I  shall  cause  them  to  eat  bread. 
He  caused  his  people  to  eat  manna.  Have  ye  not  eaten  ? 
What  have  you  (Heb.  is  to  you)  to  eat?  There  is  no 
bread  to  eat.     It  shall  not  be  eaten.     The  priests  shaU 


LESSONS   LN"   WEITING   HEBEEW.  153 

eat  it  Eat  no  bread  in  this  place.  Ye  shall  not  eat  from 
this  tree.  Ye  have  forsaken  me  and  I  will  forsake  you. 
Will  ye  forsake  me  ?  Thon  shalt  serve  him  and  he  will 
not  forsake  thee.  Serve  Jehovah  with  all  thy  heart  and 
with  all  thy  soul.  All  the  nations  shall  serve  him.  Who 
is  Jehovah  that  I  shall  serve  him?  It  shall  be  said  to 
you,  Ye  are  my  people  and  I  am  your  God.  The  words 
of  Jehovah  were  verified.  He  is  a  living  God  and  an 
everlasting  king  (Heb.  king  of  eternity).  He  is  king  of 
kings. 

17.  Ayin  Guttueal  Veebs,  §  54. 

The  verb  bxa  has  in  Kal  and  Niphal  the  sense  of  redeeming^  in  Piel,  Pual,  and 
FEithpael  that  ot  polluting. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  b^J  . 

Translate : 

He  will  redeem.  Thou  (m.  and/.)  wilt  redeem.  Ee- 
deem  ye  (m.  and  /,)  They  redeemed.  She  was  re- 
deemed. Be  thou  (m.  and/.)  redeemed.  They  (m.  and 
/)  will  be  redeemed.  We  polluted  ourselves.  Polluted. 
Polluting.  Thou  (m.  and/)  poUutedst.  Ye  (m.  and  /) 
were  polluted.  She  polluted.  Pollute  ye  (m.  and  /.). 
Pollute  thyself  (m.  and/).  We  shall  be  polluted.  They 
(m.  and/)  will  pollute.  Ye  (m.  and/)  will  pollute 
yourselves.     I  shall  pollute. 

I  will  bless  him  with  all  my  heart.  God  will  bless  us. 
He  has  blessed  us.  Bless  ye  (m.)  Jehovah.  Bless  Jeho- 
vah, ye  virgins  of  Israel.  He  went  to  bless  his  housa 
His  seed  shall  be  blessed  in  the  earth.  He  will  bless  thee 
and  thy  seed  after  thee.  Ye  shall  be  blessed  in  him.  I 
cried  unto  thee  in  the  night  and  thou  heardest  my  voice. 
We  will  cry  with  a  loud  (Heb.  great)  voice  to  him  thai 
1* 


154  LESSONS   IK    WRITING   HEBREW. 

sittetli  (Heb.  to  the  [one]  sitting)  in  the  heavens.  Ci*y 
not  to  me ;  cry  unto  the  gods  whom  ye  have  served. 
Wash  ye  your  hands  and  your  feet.  Wash  thou  me  and 
I  shall  be  clean.  Cleanse  your  hearts  and  not  (bi?)  your 
garments.  I  will  cleanse  you  from  all  evil.  Forsake  evil 
and  serve  me.  He  drove  out  the  nations  from  before  us 
and  we  dwelt  in  their  land.  Thou  hast  redeemed  us 
The  God  of  Israel  is  thy  Redeemer. 

18.  Lamedh  Guttural  Verbs,  §  55. 
Write  the  paradigm  of  rtj)©  to  send. 

The  Piel  of  this  verb  may  be  rendered  for  the  sake  of  distinction  to  send  a/way. 

Translate : — 

To  send.  To  send  away.  To  be  sent.  To  send  one's 
self.  To  cause  to  send.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  didst  send. 
We  shall  be  sent.  I  shall  send  myself.  Cause  thou  {m, 
and  f.)  to  send.  He  will  send  away.  Thou  (m.  and  f.^ 
wast  sent.  Ye  (m.  and  y.)  will  cause  to  send.  Sending. 
Sent.  Causing  to  send.  He  will  cause  to  send.  She 
will  be  sent.  Thou  (m.  andy.)  wilt  send  thyself .  They 
(m.  and  f.)  will  send.     Send  ye  (m.  and  y. ). 

He  will  sow  his  field.  It  is  time  to  sow  thy  seed. 
Sow  good  seed  in  thy  field.  Bad  seed  which  should  (Heb. 
shall)  not  be  sown.  These  fields  shall  be  sown  to-day.  The 
sower  {^art^  went  to  sow;  and  in  his  sowing  (inf.^  these 
fell  on  the  way  and  the  fowls  of  heaven  ate  them ;  these 
fell  on  the  rock  and  these  on  good  ground.  The  field  is 
the  whole  earth;  the  seed  is  the  word  of  God;  the  sower 
is  the  Son  of  man  and  his  servants  whom  he  has  sent  in 
his  name.  Didst  thou  (m.^  not  sow  good  seed  in  thy 
field?  Didst  thou  (/.)  hear  what  he  said  to  thee?  It  is 
good  to  hear  thy  voice.  She  will  be  heard.  To  be 
heard.      He  will  open  the  house.      The  heavens  were 


LESSONS   m    WRITING   HEBREW.  155 

op<3i]ed  and  a  voice  was  heard,  This  is  my  Sou,  hear  hiin. 
Who  shall  open  the  eyes  of  the  blind '^  The  deaf  shall 
hear.  His  clothes  (were)  rent  {JTal  pass,  part.)  and 
ashes  upon  his  head.  Forget  not  his  commandments. 
Thou  shalt  not  be  forgotten.  He  will  not  withhold  any 
(bs)  good  from  us. 


19.  Pe  Nun  Verbs,  §  56. 

The  Kal  and  Niphal  of  ffiia ,  though  given  in  full  in  the  paradigm,  are  each 
but  partially  in  use,  and  as  they  are  identical  in  signification  they  are  made  to 
supplement  each  other.  The  Niphal  is  found  only  in  the  preterite  and  participle ; 
the  Kal  in  the  infinitive,  future,  and  imperative. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  tt'ij  to  apjproacJi  and  the  Kal  of 
inj  to  give. 

Translate  : — 

Approach  thou  (m.  and  /.).  She  will  approach.  They 
{m.  and  /.)  will  approach.  Approaching.  To  approacL 
We  approached.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  approached.  I  ap- 
proached. I  shall  approach.  I  shall  be  caused  to 
approach.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  causedst  to  approach. 
Cause  ye  (m.  and/.)  to  approach.  Thou  (7/1.  and/.) 
wilt  cause  to  approach.  He  will  be  caused  to  approacL 
Caused  to  approach.  To  cause  to  approach.  To  give. 
Ye  (m.  and  /.)  gave.  Thou  (m.  and  /.)  gavest.  We 
gave.     We  shall  give.     Give  thou  (m.  and/.). 

Give  (imp.  with  He  parag,)  (to)  me  thy  field.  I  will 
give  (to)  thee  instead  of  it  a  field  better  than  it.  Ask 
from  me  and  I  will  give  thee  the  nations.  He  will  give 
me  a  new  heart.  Ye  gave  me  bread  and  I  ate.  Thou 
gavest  this  land  to  him  and  to  his  seed  forever.  He 
sware  to  give  us  this  good  land.  Thou  wilt  give  rain 
upon  the  earth.     He  will  give  them  into  our  hand.     He 


156  LESSONS   IN   WRITING    HEBREW. 

said,  Give  me  thy  hand ;  and  lie  gave  him  his  hand. 
What  will  ye  give  me  ?  I  know  {pret)  that  he  will  not 
suffer  (Heb.  give)  you  to  go.  I  shall  take  a  little  honey. 
Take  half  of  the  blood  and  put  (Heb.  give)  it  upon  the 
altar.  I  have  (see  Direction  1,  Lesson  2)  no  silver  and 
gold ;  I  shall  give  thee  all  that  I  have.  Tell  me,  I  pray 
thee,  what  he  said  to  thee ;  withhold  not  a  word  from 
me.  And  he  told  her  all  that  was  in  his  heart.  They 
did  not  tell  us  the  half.  It  was  told  to  the  king  and  to 
his  servants. 


20.  Ayin  Doubled  Verbs,  §  57. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  ii?  to  surround^  and  the  Piel 

of  ^i?  to  excite. 

Translate : — 

He  surrounded.  We  surrounded.  They  surrounded. 
Ye  (m.  and/.)  surrounded.  Thou  (m.  and/.)  didst 
surround.  She  surrounded.  I  surrounded.  I  was  sur- 
rounded. He  was  surrounded.  Ye  (m.  and/)  were 
surrounded.  She  was  surrounded.  They  were  surround- 
ed. Thou  (m.  and  /.)  wast  surrounded.  We  were  sur- 
rounded. We  shall  be  surrounded.  We  shall  surround. 
Thou  {m,  and  /.)  wilt  be  surrounded.  They  {m.  and  /.) 
will  be  surrounded.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  will  surround.  I 
shall  surround.  Surround  ye  {m,  and  /.).  Be  thou  {m, 
and  /.)  surrounded.  Surrounded.  Surrounding.  To 
surround.     To  be  surrounded. 

They  surrounded  entirely.  We  shall  surround  entirely. 
Surround  ye  (m.  and  /.)  entirely.  I  caused  to  surround 
Slie  caused  to  surround.  She  was  caused  to  surround. 
Ye  (m.  and  /.)  caused  to  surround.  He  caused  to  sur- 
round.    We  caused  to  suiTound.     They  were  caused  tn 


LESSONS   IN    WRITING^   HEBEEW.  157 

suiTound.  They  caused  to  surround.  Cause  thou  (m« 
and  y.)  to  surround.  I  shall  cause  to  surround.  They 
(m.)  shall  be  caused  to  surround.  Causing  to  surround. 
Cause  ye  (m.  and  /,)  to  surround.  Ye  (m.  and  f,)  shall 
cause  to  surround.  Surrounding  one's  self.  We  excited. 
They  (m.  and  f.)  shall  excite. 

I  have  begun  to  give  you  this  land.  Thou  hast  begun 
to  speak  to  him.  Begin  to-day.  The  famine  began  this 
year.  In  those  days  (§  50)  Jehovah  began  to  send  into 
Judah  the  king  of  Edom.  She  began  to  ask.  We  began 
to  demolish  the  statues  and  the  pillars.  They  began. 
They  (m.  and  /.)  will  begin.  They  rolled  the  stone  from 
upon  the  mouth  of  the  well.  The  stone  is  very  great ; 
who  shall  roll  it  for  us  ?  He  is  rolling  himself  upon  the 
ground.  I  shall  curse  thy  blessings.  He  began  to  curse 
and  to  say,  I  know  {prct.)  not  the  man.  Curse  ye  bit- 
terly (abs.  infin.)  the  city  and  its  inhabitants  (Heb.  the 
[ones]  inhabiting  it).  Cursed  is  the  man,  who  shall  eat 
bread  this  day.  Cursed  is  the  man,  who  will  not  hearken 
to  the  words  of  this  covenant.  I  took  thee  to  curse  them 
and  lo !  thou  hast  blessed  them.  Thou  shalt  not  bless 
them  and  thou  shalt  not  curse  them. 


21.  Pe  Yodh  Veebs,  §  58. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  so;  to  d/well,  and  the  Kal  of 
C5J  to  he  dry. 

Translate : — 

To  dwell.  Dwell  thou  (m.  and  /.).  He  will  dwelL 
Ye  (m,  and/.)  will  dwell.  I  shall  dwell.  Thou  (m. 
and  /.)  wilt  be  dwelt  (in).  She  was  dwelt  in.  Be  thou 
(m.  and  /.)  dwelt  in.  Causing  to  dweiU.  They  were 
caused  to  dwell.     They  caused  to  dwell.     She  caused  to 


158  LESSONS   IN    WRITING   HEBREW. 

dwell.  "We  were  caused  to  dwell.  Ye  (m.  and  y.)  were 
caused  to  dwell.  Cause  ye  (m.  and  /.)  to  dwell.  She 
will  be  caused  to  dwell.  I  shall  cause  to  dwell.  Thou 
(rii,  andy.)  shalt  be  dry.  Be  ye  (m.  and/*.)  dry.  To 
be  dry. 

Hast  thou  known  ?  Will  he  know  ?  Wilt  thou  let 
me  know  or  not  ?  Will  he  go  ?  Let  me  know  whether 
he  will  go  or  not.  They  will  go  to-day.  Hast  thou 
remembered  the  commandments  of  Jehovah  ?  Wilt  thou 
keep  them  or  not  ?  He  laiows  (^pret?)  whether  thou  wilt 
keep  them.  Thou  knowest  whether  he  will  keep  them  or 
not.  Wilt  thou  bless  him  or  curse  him?  Who  shall 
dwell  in  thy  holy  place  (Heb.  place  of  thy  holiness)  ? 
Art  thou  my  son  or  not  ?  Tell  (He  parag.^  me,  I  pray 
thee,  whether  thou  art  my  son  ?  Tell  me  whether  thou 
art  my  son  or  not.  Will  the  tree  stand  or  fall?  He 
caused  us  to  go  in  the  wilderness,  where  ^  we  wearied  him 
and  did  not  walk  in  his  ways.  Where  did  we  weary  him  ? 
If  Jehovah  be  (the)  God,  go  after  him;  and  if  Baal, 
serve  him.  Whither  thou  wilt  go,  I  shall  go.  This  is  the 
man  to  whom  ye  shall  go.  To  whom  shall  we  go  ?  thou 
hast  the  words  of  life.  H  ye  will  serve  me  with  all  yoiu* 
heart,  then  (Vav  with  pret.  Rem.  37)  will  I  cause  you  to 
dwell  in  this  land  forever. 

'  Observe  in  this  and  the  following  sentences  the  distinction  between  the  rela- 
tive and  the  interrogative. 

22.  Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  Verbs,  §  59. 

Write  the  paradigm  of  Dip  to  rise  and  the  Kal  of  n"*"!  tc 
contend. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m.  and  /.)  rose.  He  rose.  They  rose.  We  rose 
She  rose.     They  (m,  and  f.)  will  rise.     Rise  thou   {in 


LESSOT^^S   IN    WEITING   HEBEEW.  159 

and  y.).  We  shall  rise.  He  will  rise.  Kise  ye  (jn,  and 
y.).  To  rise.  Kising.  Risen.  To  be  risen.  Ye  (m. 
and  y.)  will  be  risen.  I  shall  be  risen.  Thou  (m.  and 
/".)  wilt  be  risen.  She  was  risen.  We  were  risen.  I 
was  risen.  Thou  (m.  and  /!)  wast  risen.  He  was  risen. 
Ye  (m.  and  f.)  were  risen.  They  were  risen.  He  will 
be  risen.  He  raised.  We  shall  raise.  He  will  be  raised. 
Fie  was  raised.     Raising.     Raised. 

I  caused  to  rise.  Ye  {m.  and  /.)  caused  to  rise.  She 
caused  to  rise.  He  caused  to  rise.  They  caused  to  rise. 
Thou  (m,  and  y.)  didst  cause  to  rise.  They  (m.  and  f,) 
will  cause  to  rise.  Thou  (m.  and  f.^  wilt  cause  to  rise. 
Cause  ye  (m,  and  y.)  to  rise.  We  shall  cause  to  rise. 
Cause  thou  (m.  and  /.)  to  rise.  Causing  to  rise.  I  shall 
be  caused  to  rise.  They  were  caused  to  rise.  Raise  thy- 
self (m.  and  y.).  She  raised  herself.  Thou  (m.  and  f.) 
didst  contend.  I  contended.  He  contended.  She  will 
contend.     Contend  thou  {m.  and  /.).     Contending. 

He  came  to  his  house.  They  came  to  him  and  ate 
Ijread  with  him.  Whence  hast  thou  come  ?  Whence  are 
ye  coming  ?  Whither  didst  thou  go  ?  Whither  art  thou 
going?  Wilt  thou  come  to  me  to-night?  Come  and 
lodge  with  me.  Bring  thy  father  and  thy  mother  with 
thee.  We  came  to  the  well  and  there  was  no  water  in 
it.  Bring  [ye]  my  tunic.  Gold  and  silver  shall  be 
brought.  They  brought  to  him  gold  and  incense.  Shft 
shall  return  to  her  former  state.  Return  from  your  evil 
ways  and  serve  Jehovah.  We  are  from  dust  and  shall 
return  to  dust.  The  virgins  will  return  bringing  water 
from  the  well.  Bring  back  the  silver  which  ye  have 
taken  from  me.  They  brought  him  back  to  the  city  in 
joy  and  gladness.  They  shall  be  brought  back  to  thi« 
land.  He  shall  die.  We  shall  die.  They  put  him  to 
death.    He  was  put  to  death.    She  shall  be  put  to  death. 


160  lessons  in  weiting  hebrew. 

23.  Lajmedh  Aleph  Veebs,  §  60. 
Write  the  paradigm  of  i^?^  to  find. 

Translate : — 

Ye  (m,  and  /.)  found.  We  were  found.  Tliou  (m. 
and  f,^  didst  find  out.  They  caused  to  find.  I  found 
myself.  He  was  found.  To  cause  to  find.  To  be  found. 
Finding  one's  self.  They  (m.  and/.)  will  cause  to  find. 
Ye  (m.  and/.)  will  find.  She  will  be  found.  He  will 
find.  Ye  (m.  and/)  will  find  out.  Find  ye  (m.  and/). 
Cause  ye  (m.  and/)  to  find.     Ye  were  found. 

I  shall  call  to  him  and  he  will  hear  my  voice.  They 
called  the  name  of  the  city  Ur  of  the  Chaldees.  Call  ye 
this  young  man.  Call  to  me  in  the  day  of  evil ;  I  will 
deliver  thee.  Thy  name  shall  not  be  called  Naomi; 
thou  shalt  be  called  (Heb.  to  thee  shall  be  called)  Mara. 
Jehovah  brought  you  out  from  that  land.  I  shall  bring 
you  out  from  all  the  lands  in  which  ye  are  and  will  give 
you  this  good  land  which  I  sware  to  your  fathers.  He 
created  the  earth  and  the  sea ;  and  the  heavens  are  the 
work  of  his  hands.  My  hands  have  created  all  these. 
Thou  didst  create  man  and  beast  upon  the  earth.  Bring 
us  out  from  all  evil.  Fill  the  vessels  large  and  small 
with  water.  Thou  hast  filled  the  earth  with  thy  mercy. 
The  house  was  full  of  men  and  women.  He  caused  it  to 
rain  upon  the  earth  and  filled  our  hearts  with  food  and 
gladness. 

24.  Lamedh  He  Verbs,  §  61. 
Write  the  paradigm  of  T^l . 

Translate : — 

They  revealed.     We  revealed.      She  revealed.     I  le- 


LESSONS   IN   WKITING   HEBEEW.  161 

vealed.  Thou  (m.  and/.)  wast  revealed.  He  was  re- 
vealed. I  was  revealed.  Ye  (m.  and  /.)  uncovered. 
They  uncovered.  He  was  uncovered.  We  were  uncov- 
ered. She  was  exiled.  Thou  (m.  and/.)  wasfc  exiled. 
Thou  (m.  and/)  didst  exile.  They  exiled.  I  uncovered 
myself.  To  exile.  To  uncover.  To  be  revealed.  To 
reveal.  Thou  (m.  and/)  wilt  be  revealed.  I  shall  re- 
veal. He  will  uncover.  We  shall  be  uncovered.  They 
(m.  and/)  will  exile.  She  shall  be  exiled.  Be  ye  (m. 
and/)  revealed.     Uncover  thyself  (ni.  and/).     Reveal- 

The  house  was  built  in  the  city.  My  father  built  it. 
He  began  to  build  it  and  my  brother  finished  it.  I  have 
finished  the  work  which  thou  gavest  me  to  do.  Who 
will  build  an  altar  in  this  place  to  Jehovah  ?  They  built 
a  dwelling  for  him  in  Jerusalem.  All  the  nations  shall 
go  up  to  Jerusalem  to  serve  Jehovah.  To  go  up  and  to 
go  down.  They  offered  burnt-offerings  upon  the  altar. 
I  did  as  Jehovah  commanded  me.  Bring  him  up  to  me 
in  the  bed.  And  it  came  to  pass  (Heb.  it  was)  as  he  fin- 
ished to  offer  the  burnt-offering  that  (Heb.  and)  fire  fell 
from  heaven.  They  made  for  him  a  throne  of  gold. 
Solomon  built  him  a  house.  Wilt  thou  dwell  in  this 
house  which  has  been  built  for  thy  name  ?  He  went  up 
into  heaven.  He  shall  descend  a  second  time  from  hea- 
ven.    Jehovah  appeared  to  Solomon  in  Gibeon. 


25.  Numerals,  §  65. 

Direction  8.  The  preposition  0/ following  a  cardinal 
number  must  be  expressed  by  yn ,  thus  D'^p^DH  )'n  nwm 
five  of  the  horses^  not  Dip^tsn  Tmm  which  would  mean 
the  five  horses  J  D?^^  n^nip'  seven  of  them^  not  Qnyni^'  whicL 
would  mean  they  seven. 


162  LESSONS   IN   WEn-ESTG   HEBREW. 

9.  In  compound  numbers  insert  tlie  conjunction  and 
between  the  different  denominations,  which  may  proceed 
either  from  the  higher  to  the  lower  or  the  reverse ;  thus 
for  sixty -five  write  either  sixty  and  five  ovfive  and  sixty. 

Write  the  masculine  absolute  of  the  cardinals  from  one 
to  ten  in  their  order.  Write  the  present  date,  year, 
month,  and  day. 

Translate,  noting  each  case  in  which  different  forms 
may  be  used,  or  in  which  the  order  of  the  words  may  be 
varied : — 

Four  heads.  Ten  seas.  Twelve  nations.  Thirty  of 
the  Philistines.  Fifty  days.  A  hundred  men.  Six  nights. 
Eight  shekels.  Three  years.  The  seven  stars.  Seven 
of  the  stars.  Seven  stars.  These  seven  stars.  Twe  ity 
rocks.  Eleven  women.  Nine  kings.  Two  vessels.  Nine 
virgins.  Five  stones.  Twenty-four  priests.  Sixty  houses. 
Sixteen  month's.  Eighty  queens.  Six  hundred  years. 
Three  hundred  and  sixty-five  days.  In  the  fifth  year  of 
(Heb.  to)  king  Solomon,  in  the  tenth  month,  in  the  second 
day  of  the  month.  In  the  twenty-first  of  the  eighth 
month.  In  the  third  of  this  month.  The  third  [part]  of 
the  month.  The  fourth  [part]  of  tlie  year.  The  eighth 
[part]  of  the  shekeL  The  eighth  shekel.  Eight  of  the 
shekels.  He  is  eight  years  old.  She  is  nineteen  years 
old.  All  the  days  of  Adam  were  nine  hundred  years  and 
thirty  years  and  he  died, 

26.  To  ACCOMPANY  Gen.  1 : 1. 

Heaven.  Earth.  In  heaven.  In  eai-th.  The  heaven. 
The  earth.  In  the  heaven  and  in  the  eartL  Beginning. 
In  [the]  beginning.  He  created.  God  created.  I 
created.  In  [the]  beginning  thou  createdst  the  earth 
and  the  heaven.     Creating.     God  the  creator  of  (lit.  the 


LESSONS   IN   WRITING   HEBREW.  163 

[one]  creating)  tlie  heaven.  He  will  create.  Thou  wilt 
create.  I  shall  create  an  earth  and  heaven.  He  was 
created  (Niphal).  "We  were  created.  Thou  wast  created. 
I  was  created.  Ye  were  created.  In  [the]  beginning 
were  created  the  heaven  and  the  earth.  In  [the]  begin- 
ning was  created  the  earth.  [There]  will  be  created  an 
earth.     [There]  will  be  created  a  heaven. 


27.  Gen.  1 :  2. 

Darkness.  The  darkness.  And  the  darkness.  In 
darkness.  In  the  darkness.  And  in  the  darkness.  Face. 
The  face.  The  face  of  [the]  deep.  The  face  of  the 
heaven.  He  was.  I  was.  We  were.  Ye  were.  Thou 
wast.  He  will  be.  I  shall  be.  We  shall  be.  They  will 
be.  The  earth  will  be  waste  and  void  (desolation  and 
emptiness).  Darkness  was  on  the  waters  and  on  the  face 
of  the  earth.  Spirit.  The  Spirit.  The  Spirit  of  God 
brooded  over  the  deep.  The  Spirit  will  brood.  In  the 
beginning  the  Spirit  [was]  brooding  over  the  waters. 
God  created  the  darkness  and  the  waters.  The  deep  was 
created.  And  the  waters  of  the  deep  were  waste  and 
void. 

28.  Gen.  1 :  3,  4. 

He  said.  They  said.  And  he  said  (Vav  Conv.).  And 
they  said.  I  said.  Ye  said.  We  shall  say.  She  will 
Fay.  We  saw.  They  saw.  He  saw.  And  he  saw.  He 
will  see.  God  [is]  seeing  in  the  light  and  in  the  dark- 
ness. The  waters  were  seen  (Niph.).  The  earth  was 
seen.  The  light  will  be  seen.  God  saw  the  light.  Good 
light.  Light  [is]  good.  The  good  light.  The  light  [is] 
good     God  is  good.     God  is^  (Heb.  he,  §  67,  2)  light^ 


164  LESSONS  IN   WEITING    HEBREW. 

He  saw  that  the  light  was  good.  God  divided  between 
the  earth  and  the  heaven.  God  [is]  dividing  between 
the  darkness  and  the  light.  The  waters  were  divided. 
They  will  be  divided.  I  divided.  Ye  divided  Thou 
wilt  divide.     Divide  thou. 

29.  Gen.  1 :  5,  6. 

Day  and  night.  The  day  and  the  night.  In  the  day 
and  in  the  night.  To  the  days  and  to  the  nights.  To 
divide  between  days  and  nights.  We  shall  call.  We 
called.  And  we  called  (Vav  Con  v.).  Thou  didst  call 
the  firmament  heaven.  I  called  the  darkness  night,  and 
the  light  I  called  day.  The  light  (Heb.  to  the  light) 
shall  be  called  day.  It  was  evening.  One  evening. 
One  morning.  One  God.  One  earth.  In  the  midst  of 
the  earth.  In  the  midst  of  the  heaven.  Between  the 
heaven  and  the  earth  (two  constructions).  God  shall  say 
to  the  waters,  Be  ye  divided.  Let  there  be  light.  Let 
there  be  darkness.  God  saw  the  firmament.  The  firma- 
ment [is]  good. 

30.  Gen.  1 :  7,  8. 

God  made  the  day  and  the  night.  Thou  madest  the 
firmament.  Thou  didst  divide  the  waters.  I  shall  make. 
He  will  make.  And  he  made  (Vav  Conv.).  I  made  the 
earth  and  the  waters.  We  were  made.  The  earth  was 
made.  The  waters  were  made.  I  made  the  heaven 
which  [is]  above  the  eai-th  and  the  earth  which  [is]  under 
the  heaven,  and  the  waters  which  [are]  under  the  earth. 
He  divided  the  day  from  the  night.  Light  was  made  in 
one  day,  and  the  firmament  was  created  in  a  second  day. 
And  he  called  the  beginning  of  the  day  morning,  and  the 
beginning  of  the  night  he  called  evening.      A  second 


I 


LESSONS   JN   WRITING    HEBREW.  165 

morning.     The  second  evening.     And  it  was  so.     And  be 
did  so. 

31.  Gen.  1 :  9,  10. 

They  were  gathered.  Ye  were  gathered.  We  were 
gathered.  And  they  were  gathered.  Ye  shall  be  gather 
ed  To  be  gathered.  Being  gathered.  He  said  to  the 
waters,  Be  ye  gathered  unto  the  seas.  The  waters  which 
were  under  the  heaven  were  gathered  unto  one  place,  and 
the  waters  which  were  above  the  heaven  were  gathered 
unto  a  second  place.  The  dry  [land]  was  seen.  The 
sea  was  seen.  See  thou  the  earth  and  the  heaven.  He 
made  the  waters  which  are  in  the  sea.  They  called  the 
dry  [land]  earth.  The  collection  (gatheriag  together)  of 
waters  shall  be  called  sea.  The  God  of  heaven  made  the 
eea  and  the  dry  land.  He  divided  the  sea  from  the  dry 
land.     He  said  and  it  was  [done], 

32.    Gen.  1 :  11-13. 


God  said  to  the  earth,  Bring  forth  (either  of  two  verbs) 
grass.  The  earth  brought  foi-th  herb  and  tree.  Grass 
sprang  up.  Grass  was  brought  forth.  He  said  to  the 
herb,  Produce  seed,  and  it  was  so.  The  herb  produced 
seed  (according)  to  its  kind.  I  have  sown  the  seed.  Ye 
have  sown.  They  have  sown.  In  the  morning  sow  thou 
the  seed.  The  seed  was  sown  in  the  evening.  The  herb 
will  produce  seed.  The  tree  will  yield  fruit.  A  fruit- 
tree.  The  fruit-tree  (§  75.  5).  The  seed  of  the  fruit-tree 
is  in  the  fruit.  To  the  tree  yielding  fruit  [there]  is  seed 
I  according  to  its  kind.  The  fruit,  whose  seed  is  in  it.  Seas, 
'  in  the  midst  of  which  are  waters.  A  day  in  which  there 
is  light.     A  night  in  which  there  is  darkness, 


Ififi  LESSONS   IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 


33.   Gen.  1 :  14-16. 

Let  there  be  light.  Let  there  be  a  light  (1  aminary) 
One  great  light.  The  second  small  light.  Two  great 
lights.  The  two  small  lights.  Two  of  (Heb.  from)  the 
small  lights,  which  (Heb.  to  which)  they  have  called 
stars.  The  stars  will  give  light  in  the  night.  He  made 
one  light  for  the  rule  of  the  day.  The  second  light  was 
made  for  the  rule  of  the  night.  He  divided  between 
lights  and  lights  (Heb.  to  lights).  Thou  didst  divide  be- 
tween the  great  lights  and  the  stars.  God  created  the 
lights  and  said  (Vav.  Con  v.)  to  them,  Give  light  upon  the 
earth  and  divide  day  from  night ;  and  it  was  so.  There 
shall  be  signs  in  the  heaven  and  in  the  earth.  One  sea- 
son. A  second  day.  The  third  year.  Two  years  and 
two  days.    Let  there  be  stars  giving  light  in  the  night. 


34.  Gen.  1:17-20. 

In  the  fourth  day  God  made  the  two  great  lights  and 
the  stars  and  in  the  firmament  of  heaven  he  set  (Heb. 
gave)  them.  He  set  the  firmament  above  the  earth  and 
the  earth  above  the  sea.  I  gave.  They  gave.  We  gave. 
Thou  gavest.  She  gave.  Giving.  To  give.  He  will 
give.  We  shall  give.  Given.  Ye  will  give.  One  light 
ruled  the  day.  A  second  light  shall  rule  the  night. 
Thou  [art]  ruling  the  earth  and  the  sea.  God  saw  that 
the  lights  [were]  good.  He  made  the  reptiles  (collective) 
which  are  in  the  waters.  He  divided  between  the  rep- 
tile and  the  fowl.  A  soul  of  life.  The  soul  of  life. 
Thou  madest  the  soul  of  life  which  is  in  the  fowl  and  iii 
the  reptile.     In  the  morning  they  flew  away. 


LESSONS   IN    WRITING    HEBRllW.  1G7 


85.  Gen.  1:21-23. 

They  we  'e  fi-uitf  ul  and  multiplied  (Vav  Con  v.)  and 
filled  tlie  earth  and  tlie  sea.  The  waters  [are]  filling 
(Pi el)  tLe  sea.  The  sea  shall  be  filled.  The  stars  shall 
Oil  the  heavens.  The  moving  soul  of  life  shall  be  fruitful 
and  multiply  upon  the  earth.  Great  monsters.  The 
great  monsters.  All  the  great  monsters  of  the  sea.  The 
monsters  of  the  sea  are  great.  God  created  them  and 
he  will  bless  them.  He  blessed  the  winged  fowl  and 
every  soul  of  life  which  he  had  made.  He  caused  the 
fowl  to  multiply  in  the  earth  and  the  monsters  in  the 
seas.  Blessed  be  God.  Bless  ye  God.  Bless  God,  O 
my  soul.  God  is  blessing  (Piel)  every  morning  and  every 
evening. 

36.  Gen.  1:24-27. 

The  beast  of  the  earth  was  made  after  its  kind.  Man 
was  created  in  the  likeness  of  God,  and  in  his  image. 
The  earth  brought  forth  cattle  and  reptile  creeping  upon 
the  ground.  God  made  lights  for  the  rule  of  the  day  and 
of  the  night;  and  the  man  he  created  for  the  rule  of 
the  earth.  Thou  didst  make  man  according  to  thine 
image  and  in  thy  likeness.  Man  (Heb.  with  arti- 
cle) was  made  in  the  image  of  him  that  created  (Heb. 
the  [one]  creating)  him.  Rule  thou  over  the  fish  of  the 
sea  and  have  dominion  over  all  the  earth.  Let  the  fish 
multiply  in  the  sea.  The  fowl  shall  fly  over  the  face  of 
heaven.  He  made  them  male  and  female.  Every  beast 
of  the  earth  was  made  male  and  female. 

37.  Gen.  1:28-31. 

Subdue  ye  the  earth  and  fill  it  ana  multiply  upon  it 
and  have  dominion  over  all  which  is  in  it.     God  bless  h1 


TG8  LESSONS   IN    WRITING    HEBREW. 

all  that  lie  had  made.  He  saw  that  it  was  very  goc»d. 
He  gave  to  the  man  the  fruit  of  the  earth  for  food. 
Thou  hast  given  to  us  every  herb.  To  the  beast  of  the 
earth  every  green  herb  was  given.  It  will  be  given.  To 
be  given.  Grive  thou.  Give  ye.  See  thou  what  God 
bas  made.  He  made  light  in  one  day.  In  a  second 
day  he  made  the  firmament.  In  a  third  day  the  dry 
[land]  was  seen  and  it  brought  forth  herb  and  trees. 
In  a  fourth  day  he  made  the  great  and  small  lights.  In 
a  fifth  day  birds  and  fish  were  made.  In  a  sixth  day  he 
made  cattle  and  created  man  (Heb.  with  article)  in  the 
image  of  God. 

38.  Gen.  2:1-5. 

The  earth  was  finished.  The  host  of  heaven  was  fin- 
ished. The  eairth  and  the  heaven  were  finished.  I  have 
finished  my  work.  Thou  hast  not  finished  thy  work. 
We  have  not  yet  finished  our  work.  They  Avill  finish 
their  work.  Your  work  will  be  finished  and  ye  will  rest 
These  generations.  These  are  the  generations.  These  are 
the  generations  of  Adam.  These  two  generations.  This 
day.  This  seventh  day.  This  is  the  day  which  God  has 
blessed.  This  is  the  seventh  day  in  which  God  rested, 
and  which  he  sanctified.  No  tree  was  yet  in  the  ground. 
The  earth  had  not  yet  brought  forth  herb  nor  (Heb.  and) 
bush.  In  the  fifth  day  there  was  no  man  and  beast  of 
the  field  there  was  none,  for  they  had  not  yet  been 
created. 

39.  Gen.  2:6-10. 

This  is  the  earth  which  God  created  and  made  (Heb 
[so  as]  to  make).  God  blessed  them  and  said  (Heb.  [so 
as]  to  say,  or  with  Vav  Con  v.)  to  them,  Be  fruitful 


LESSONS   IN    WRITING   HEBREW.  16^ 

feubdue  the  earth  and  rule  (Heb.  to  rule)  ever  it.  God 
caused  it  to  rain  and  watered  the  face  of  the  earth.  He 
causes  it  to  rain  (fut.  §  78,  3)  and  waters  the  ground. 
A  mist  [is]  ascending  from  the  sea  and  the  earth  will  be 
watered  We  are  as  the  grass,  which  sprouted  in  the 
morning  and  in  the  evening  shall  not  be.  This  is  youi 
breath  which  Jehovah  breathed  in  your  nostrils.  He 
placed  Adam  in  the  garden  which  he  had  planted  and  in 
which  he  had  caused  to  grow  every  tree  good  for  food. 
Four  rivers.  The  four  rivers.  The  four  heads  of  the 
river.  The  six  heads.  The  two  gardens.  Three  days 
and  three  nights.  Five  mornings  and  ^ve  evenings. 
One  small  star. 

40.  Gen.  2:11-16. 

Thou  didst  form  Adam  of  dust.  He  made  the  man 
(Heb.  to)  a  living  soul.  A  great  river  is  surrounding 
the  land  in  which  there  is  gold.  The  name  of  the  garden 
is  Eden.  They  called  the  garden  Eden.  The  garden 
shall  be  called  Eden.  In  the  midst  of  the  garden  were 
two  trees;  the  one  was  called  the  tree  of  life  and  he 
called  the  name  of  the  second  the  tree  of  knowing  good 
and  evil.  The  place,  where  the  garden  of  Eden  was,  is 
not  known.  He  went.  I  went.  He  will  go.  We  shall 
go.  To  go.  Going.  He  took  the  man.  He  took  him. 
He  took  her.  He  took  us.  He  took  you.  He  took  me. 
He  took  thee.  He  will  take  the  tree.  Keep  the  seventh 
day  and  (Heb.  to)  sanctify  it. 

41.  Gen.  2:17-20. 

Adam  ate  of  the  evil  fruit  and  died.     This  fruit  is 
good;  thou  mayest  freely  eat  (Heb.  emphatic  iniiii.)  of 
it.     He  aie  it.     She  ate  it.    We  ate  it.     Thou  shalt  eat 
8 


170  LESSONS   IN    WHITING   HEBREW. 

it  Ye  sliall  eat  it.  They  shall  eat  it.  Ye  ate  it.  Ye 
ate  of  (Heb.  from)  it.  It  is  not  good  for  Adam  to  eat  of 
it.  He  formed  him.  He  formed  her.  He  formed  ua 
Thou  formedst  us.  I  formed  you.  I  formed  them.  1 
formed  him.  Thou  didst  put  Adam  in  the  garden  to  till 
it.  He  tilled  the  ground  and  kept  it.  Every  beast  of 
the  field  came  to  Adam.  In  the  cattle  of  the  field,  the 
beast  of  the  earth,  the  fish  of  the  sea,  and  the  fowl  of 
heaven  there  was  not  found  a  help  the  counterpart  of 
Adam.  God  gave  name  (Heb.  called  names)  to  the  day 
and  to  the  night. 

42.  Gen.  2:21-25. 

Adam  slept  because  a  deep  sleep  from  God  had  fallen 
upon  him  (§  66.  2).  A  rib  was  taken  and  was  made  (Heb. 
built)  into  a  woman  and  she  was  brought  to  him.  One 
bone.  His  bone.  His  one  boDe.  Two  ribs.  Her  ribs. 
Her  two  ribs.  One  of  (Direction  8,  Lesson  25)  his  bones. 
Two  of  her  ribs.  Our  three  gardens.  Three  of  our  gar- 
dens. Four  of  their  evenings.  Five  of  your  rivers.  Six 
of  the  heads,  into  which  the  river  was  parted.  Two  of 
the  men.  Two  of  the  women.  They  two,  the  man  and 
the  woman.  Two  of  them.  The  woman  left  her  father 
and  her  mother  and  clave  to  her  husband.  My  mother 
has  forsaken  me.  My  father  and  my  mother  will  not 
forsake  me.  Thou  shalt  do  all  that  thy  father  and  thy 
mother  shall  command  thee. 


43.  Gen.  3:1-5. 

The  cunning  serpent.  This  tree  is  the  best  of  all  the 
trees  (Heb.  collective)  in  the  garden.  The  man  was  the 
greatest  of  all  the  men  of  [the]  east.     The  stars  are  the 


LESSONS   IN    WRITING   HEBREW  l7l 

smallest  of  all  the  lights  in  the  firmament.  The  sea  is 
greater  than  the  dry  [land].  Dying  (emphat.  infin.)  he 
shall  die.  We  shall  die.  I  shall  die.  He  died.  She 
died.  They  died.  Dying.  He  killed  (caused  to  die). 
They  killed.  He  was  put  to  death.  She  shall  be  put  to 
death.  He  said  to  the  woman,  Thou  shalt  not  touch 
the  tree  lest  thou  die.  Touch  thou  this  fruit.  I 
touched  it  and  my  eyes  were  opened  and  I  knew  good 
and  evil.  In  the  day  of  thy  touching  this  tree  (§  89.  3) 
thou  and  thy  wife  shall  die  (§  86.  1). 

44.  Gen.  3  :  6-10. 

The  woman's  eyes  were  opened  and  she  saw.  She  gave 
of  the  fruit  to  Adam  and  he  saw  and  ate.  A  desirable 
tree.  The  desirable  tree.  The  tree  is  desii*able.  He  took 
of  it.  She  took  it.  Ye  took  it.  We  shall  take.  They 
( f?)  will  take.  Its  fruit  was  taken  and  eaten  and  it 
opened  her  eyes.  Open  thou  mine  eyes  and  I  shall  see. 
Both  her  eyes.  The  eyes  of  them  both.  Two  of  their 
eyes.  Their  four  eyes.  They  heard  Jehovah  walking  ^ 
She  heard  the  voice  of  Jehovah  [who  was^]  walking  in 
the  midst  of  the  trees.  I  saw  the  man  eating^.  Where  is 
he  \  Here  he  is  (Heb.  behold  him !).  Where  art  thou  ? 
Here  I  am.  I  heard  the  tree  falling  ^.  The  falling  waters. 
We  saw  the  stars  falling  from  heaven.  The  woman  and 
her  husband  hid  themselves. 

'  The  paxticiple  being-  a  predicate  will  not  agree  with  its  subject  Jehovah  ui 
clefiniteness,  and  hence  must  not  receive  the  article,  Remark  23,  Lesson  13. 
*  See  Remark  8,  Lesson  7. 

45.  Gen.  3  :  11-15. 

Who  commanded  thee  not  to  do  this  evil  [thing] /^m.  f 
Not  to  hear.      Not  to  see.     Not  to  walk  in  the  garden 


17*2  LESSOI^^S   IN    WRITING   HEBREW. 

I  fehall  command  the  stars  not  to  give  light  in  the  n^ght. 
Who  did  this?  Didst  thou  see  the  woman  who  ate 
(Heb.  the  [one]  eating)  this  fruit  ?  Did  the  serpent  de 
ceive  the  woman  ?  Eat  ye  of  it  and  bless  Jehovah.  1 
shall  not  eat  the  fruit  which  he  has  commanded  me  not 
to  eat.  What  is  this,  the  woman  has  done  ?  What  are 
these?  Who  are  these?  The  serpent  is  the  most 
accursed  of  all  cattle.  Thy  mother  is  the  most  blessed  of 
all  women.  Thou  art  the  greatest  of  all  men.  I  told  him. 
It  was  told  to  me.  The  serpent  bruised  his  heel  (Heb 
him  [as  to]  heel).     He  shall  bruise  the  serpent's  head 

46.  Gen.  3  :  16-19. 

I  shall  bless  them  that  bless  (Heb.  blessing)  thee,  and 
curse  them  that  curse  (Heb.  cursing)  thee,  and  all  the 
earth  shall  be  blessed  in  thee.  The  woman  heard  the 
voice  of  the  serpent.  The  woman  hearkened  to  the  voice 
of  the  serpent.  The  man  hearkened  to  the  voice  of  hia 
wife,  and  ate  the  fruit  of  which  God  had  commanded  him 
not  to  eat.  The  woman  bare  three  sons.  Sons  were 
born  to  him.  They  shall  be  born.  I  was  born.  We 
were  born.  These  are  the  names  of  the  sons  of  Adam. 
Whose  son  ai-t  thou  ?  E-eturn  to  dust  (ye)  sons  of  man. 
We  returned.  Have  they  retui^ned  (  Will  they  (/.) 
'  return  ?  He  brought  them  back  (caused  them  to  return). 
Tliey  shall  be  brought  back  to  the  garden  of  the  Lord. 


47.   Gen.  3  :  20-24. 

Adam  called  (Heb.  to)  the  woman  Eve.  The  woman 
was  called  Eve.  The  woman's  name  was  Eve.  God 
called  his  name  Adam,  and  said.  Because  from  the  ground 
I  have  taken  him.    Did  he  not  call  the  man  Adam,  accord- 


LESSONS   IN   WRITIiS^G    HEBREW.  17S 

ing  to  the  name  of  tlie  ground  from  whence  lie  had  taken 
him  ?  Men  have  given  (Heb.  called)  names  to  the  stars 
of  heaven.  God  called  the  nam^  of  the  firmament  hea- 
ven, and  gave  names  to  the  day  and  to  the  night.  See 
thou  the  ground  from  whence  thou  wast  taken.  Take 
ye  of  the  food  which  I  have  brought  for  you  and  eat 
of  it.  Coats  of  skin  were  made  for  the  man  and  for  the 
woman  and  they  were  clothed.  These  God  gave  to  them 
instead  of  the  fig-leaves  which  they  had  sewed  for  them- 
selves. He  said  to  him,  Put  forth  thy  hand,  and  he  put 
it  forth.  1  shall  send  (Kal)  him.  I  shall  send  her.  He 
will  send  us.  He  will  not  send  them.  He  has  com- 
manded us  not  to  send  you.  Ye  will  send  me  away 
(Piel).  We  shall  send  thee  away.  I  shall  drive  you  out 
(Piel)  from  my  garden.  He  will  keep  me.  Thou  wilt 
keep  them. 


I 


HEBREW-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


nij    n.   m.    (const,   '^n^ ,   pi. 

ninjj)  father 
-1125  v.K.  {^h)  toperisk   P. 

to  destroy 
15^5  n.  m.  f.  a  stone 
1^  n.  m.  mist,  vajpor 
Di'lK  n.  m.  JEdom 
liiij  n.  m.  lord,  master 
Dn^  n.  m.  man 
H'ia'i^^  n.  f.  ground,  land 
^'^^^^  n.  m.  Lord 
nnsf  or  nn^j  v.  K.  ^0  love 
brvtk  n.  m.  (D''5ni|:)  tent 
pri?  n.  in.  Aaron 
nix  V.  K.  N.  ^(9  shine.    H.  ^(9 

(?ai^S6  ^(9  shine,  give  light 
nix  n.  m.  light 
n^x  n.  t/r 

Mi«  n.  m.  f.  (rii)  sign 
ts  adv.  then 
^TJi  n.  f.  (n?5Tbj)  ^or 
nx   n.    m.    (const.    ^'HX,    pi. 

D'^ni^)  hr other 
nxni<  n.  m.  J.A«5 
•rrisj  adj.  ^71^ 
tnihx  n.  f .  sister 


nnx  prep,  after 

""^  adv.  (suf.  i'^x)  wliere? 

ni'^x  n.  f.  enmity 

n^^  adv.  where? 

nDD'ifi?  adv.  7?^2^  .^ 

l^k     (const,    r^)    nothing 

there  is  not  or  was  not 
It'i?  adv.  xohere  ?  only  after 

1^,  r^^'Q  tohence? 
ns^s?  n.  f.  ephah 
lO^t^  n.  m.  (d'^»J»|)  m«7i,  hus- 
band, each 
biij  V.  K.  (kc)  ^0  ^ojiJ.     H. 

to  cause  to  eat 
^^  adv.  not 
b^  n.  m.  God 

"5^  prep.  ^(9,  i^/Z/^CJ,  respecting 
n>«  see  n| 
Jnib^j   commonly   in  the    pi. 

D'lnb^  n.  m.  God 
nj^bsj  n.  m.  Eleazar 
DS  n.  f.  (niiax)  mother 
DX  conj.  ^f,  in  a  disjunctive 

question  or 
1'»J$  V.  N.  to  he  verified^  found. 

true 


176 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    VOCABUI.AKY. 


r^biax  n.  Amanah 
Db^x  adv.  truly ^  indeed 
"i^x  V.  K.  (ss)  to  say.    N. 

to  he  said 
Jijx  adv.  wMtlier? 
tJi:s|  n.  m.  man 
^5JSi ,  •'ibJj  pron.  I 
P|«  n.  in.  (D^SJ?)  nostril^  face 
t[^  conj.   «^Z56>,   even;   ^^   t\^ 

how  much  Tnore  or  after  a 

negative  how  much  less; 

Gen.  iii.  1,  is  it   even    so 

that  ? 
"isif  n.  m.  ashes 
sians;  n.  f.  lattice^  ivindow 
nia'i!!*  num.  ybi^^ 
D'lya'^i^  num.  forty 
li'iij  n.  m.  f.  arh 
Yy^.  n*  m.  f.  (mi)  earthy  land 
nSx  V.  K.  P.  to  curse,     N. 

Ho.  to  he  cursed 
t:S'ii^  n.  Ararat 
t^  n.  m.  i,fh*e 
mfex  n.   f.    (const,   moij? ,  pi. 

D'^cp)  xooman^  wife 
"iT?^  pron.  'Z^;A^,  which;  conj. 

^A(2^,  hecause;  "itDxs  (^,9 
nn«i{  n.f.  (n\  and  tr\) pillar 
ribc  sign  of  the  definite  object 
fii?  prep,  with 
ririi?  m.,  ij»?  f.  pron.  thou 

a  prep,  m,  m^^,  at^  with 
^i?3  n.  f.  a  well 


"IS3  n.  m.  garment,  pi.  clotlies 

13   n.    m.    separation;    i'13^3 

^7^    A^s    seimration,    i.   e. 

^1?  V.  H.  j^o  separate,  divide. 

N.  ^(9  f  6  separated 
nbHsi  n.  hdellium 
^ni  n.  m.  emptiness 
n^nn  n.  f.  S^^s^,  C(3^^^Z^ 
Ki3  V.  K.  (fut.  i5ii;)  /^  6'6>m^. 

H.  ^6>  cause  to  come,  hring. 

Ho.  to  he  hrought 
y^.  prep,  heinveen 
n^i  n.  m.  (cr^^)  house 
"•pb^  adv.  72.(9^,  used  with  the 

infinitive 
121  n.  m.  (0*^55)  son 
nbs  V.  K.  to  huild 
i^ns^l  prep,  on  account  of 
b>:?i  n.  m.  Baal,  lord 
ij^ia  n.  m.  morning 
xna  V.  K.  to  create,    N.  ^(?  ^^ 

created 
lia  n.  m.  A«^7 
fi'in:a  n.  f.  covenarA 
5i?  V.  K.  P.  i5^  Z>fes5.   N.  Pu. 

^6>  <^6  hlessed 
ni'ia  n.  f.  6?  hlessing 
1^1  n.  vd.  flesh 
na.n.  f.  (suf.  ina,  pi.  niia) 

daughter 
nSin^  n.  f.  virgin 

bx5  V.  K  ^c?  redeem.  P.  ^<?  ^j?<?/?Z<? 


HEBR£W-E]SrGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


177 


fii^S  n.  Gibeoio 

bil5  adj.  g7'eat^  large 

bna  V.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  he  great 

P.  to  malce  great 
"•in  n.  m.  nation 
lifij  n.  m.  belly 
V^^l  n.  Gihon 
b^5  V.  K.  to  roll 
D5  couj.  also^  even 
b^'D5  n.  m.  benefit 
la  n.  m.  (0*^35)  garden 
tcS?  V.  K.  P.  to  drive  out 
^tX  n.  m.  violent  rain,  shoiv- 

er 

pi'^  (fut.  a)  to  cleave,  adhere. 

H.  to  overtake 
ni'n  V.  P.  to  speak 
"ii^  n.  m.  \oord 
ttJS'i  n.  m.  lioTiey 

^n  n.  m.  David 

nb^  n.  f.  (n?nb'i)  Jo^r 

Dvf  n.  m.  blood 

n^ia'n  n.  f .  Uhen£S8 

ptDia'i  11.  Damascus 

Pp'n  V.  K.  H.  ^6>  crush,  jpulver- 
ize 

'Viyi  n.  m.  thistle 

%y\  n.  m.  f .  way 

i^c'i  V.  K.  to  spring  up,  ^Siidioi 
grass.  H,  to  cause  to  spring 
vp,  bring  forth  grass 

«5r"n  n.  m.  ^r^.9,s 


•n  art.  j^A^ 

n  asks  a  question. 

inn  n.  m.  majesty 

«^n  m.  a^'in ,  i^in  f.  pron.  he^ 

she,  it,  that 
lin  n.  m.  splendor 
n^n  V.  K.  to  be 
tjbn  V.  K.  ^0  go,  walk,    H.  ^(? 

c?«^s^  to  go,  lead,    Hith.  ;((9 

go  for  one^s  self,  walk  about 
in,  nan  int.  (suf.  '^ijn)  lo  ! 

behold! 
T\}r\  adv.  hither 
tjsn  V.  K.  i(^  ^'^^7•7^.     N.  to  be 

turned.      Hith.    to     turn 

one's  self 
in  n.  m.   (pi.   ^^y),   const, 

''Sn)  mountain 
fS'ypi  n.  m.  conception 


con]. 


t^TlC? 


nj  m.  rii^'T  f.  bx,  nb^?  pi.  pron. 

this,  these 
nnj  n.  m.  gold 
rr;!  n.  m.  olive-tree,  olive 
*oi  Y.  K.  to  remember 
IDT  n.  m.  male 
nijT  n.  f.  (n^T)  sweat 
pi?r  V.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  cry 
sipi^T  n.  f .  cry 
"shi  V.  K.  to  sow,    H.  to  pro* 

duce  seed 
s^'^t  n.  m.  56'^ J 


178 


HEBREW-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


sin  V.  H.  to  hide,    N.  Hith. 

to  Mde  one's  self 
H'linn  n.  f.  apron 
bj^'^n  n.  Hiddehel^  l\ris 
t3in  adj.  new 
©•iri  n.  m.  month 
n^''tit|  n.  Havilah 
pTH  V.  K.  (f  ut.  a)  to  be  strong 
"^  adj.  (S^jn)  living  J  alive 
njn  n.   f.    (paragog.    vowel 

ih^n)    life^    living  thing ^ 

beast 
*»!!n  V.  K.  to  live 
d'l^n  n.  m.  pi.  life 
lii)n  n.  m.  f.  window 
^Sn  V.  H.  to  begin 
T^O  V.  P.  to  deliver 
^tn  V.  K.  P.  to  desire,    N. 

to  be  desired 
•'TSW  m\m,  fifth 
yi^T}  n.  m.  Haman 
D"'iB'jan  num.,  fifty 
^on  n.  m.  Mndn£ss,  mercy 
^"orj  V.  K.  ^(9  5^  diminished, 

tofail 
^^^  n.  m.  (■•sn)  AaZ/* 
nnn  n.  f.  sword 
«ir?  adj.  (o'^W'^n)  ^o/" 
•fion  i\.  m.  darJcness 

"lintj  adj.  clean, pure 

*^nt3  V.  K.  ^(9  Z>^  clean,  pure. 

P.  to  purify,  cleanse,     N. 

^  be  purified 


3ii:  adj.  ^oc>6? 

5|3t2  V.  p.  ^6>  50^7,  defile 

n^ib  adv.  72.c>^  ^6^,  before 

fn^^  V.  K.  (inf.  const.  n©n;') 

nca;^  adj.  f.  c^r^/  land 

yi;*  V.  K.  ^0  5^  weary,  P.  H. 
^6>  weary,  to  cause  to  toil 

"t;  n.  f.  hand 

"Sfh^  V.  K.  to  hnow,  H.  ^ 
cause  to  hnow,  let  Tcnoxo 

Vsy\iri  n.  m.  Judah 

''"i^n^  n.  m.  Jew 

nVn^  n.  m.  Jehovah 

ni"^  n.  m.  (0*^^;)  day 

rw  n.  f.  (a\)  dove 

qpi'^  n.  m.  Joseph 

nS;  V.  K.  ^6>  5^(2r,  brin^ 
forth.     N.  Pu.  ^(9  be  bom 

^"n  see  tf?n 

DJ  n.  m.  (o'^ia::)  5^(^ 

nps^^  n.  m.  Jacob 

^%^^  V.  K.  ^(9  ^^  (9z^^,  go 
forth,  H.  ^  ^^1^56  to  go 
forth,  bring  forth 

pi;;'  V,  K.  to  pour 

"I?:  V.  K.  (fut.  "12'i^.n)  to  form 

«\^  V.  K.  (fut.  sn^:)  ^(^'/^ar 

T];*  V.  K.  ^0  ^<?  down^  de- 
scend 

p'^o^n^  n.  Jerusalem 

T\y)  n.  m.  m<907i 

irni^  n.  Jericho 


HEBllEW-ENGLISII   VOCABULAEY. 


179 


p'jj  n.  m.  greenness 

cS;>  or  tr\^  V.  K.  H.  to  d/rive 

out 
bijnto;'  n.  m.  Israel 
a®;  V.  K.  to  sit,  dwell,  in- 

liabit 
i&l  V.  K.  (fut.  ^tyi)  to  sleep 
5?©'^.  n.  m.  salvation 

3  prep,  according  to,  as,  lilce 
*in?  K.  (fut.  a)  to  he  heavy. 

P.    to  honor,   '  N.    to   he 

honored 
^iis  n.  m.  honor,  glory 
T»ns)  V.  K.  P.  to  suhdue.    N. 

to  he  subdued 
Jib  adv.  thus,  so 
"fi^  n.  m.  priest 
ISDis  n.  m.  star 
b^s  V.  P.  (bibS))  to  contain 
tJ^3  n.  m.  Gush 
^^  conj.  for,  hecause,   that; 

after  a  negative  hut 
bb  n.  m.  (suf .  ifc)  all,  every, 

the  whole 
kSs  v.  K.   to  withhold,  re- 
strain, N.  to  he  restrained 
nbs  V.  K.  to  come  to  an  end. 

P.  to  complete,  finish,   Pu. 

to  hefimjished 
^'^^  n.  m.  (D'^^5)  vessel,  a/rticle 
1?  adv.  5(9.    15  ^$  therefore 
t\i^  n.  f.  '^^;m^ 
XD3  n.  n).  (Mi)  throne 


viob  n.  m.  s^^'2;<?r 

?|?  n.  f.  (d'?s?)  ^tJ^Zm  of  tlie 

hand,  sole  of  tlie  foot 
1^*13  n.  m.  cheruh 
tTi|  V.  K.  ^(9  cut,  cut  off,  ma]c6 

a  covenant.    H.  to  cut  off. 

Ho.  to  he  cut  off 
D'l'ntos  n.  m.  pi.  Ohaldees 
nsns  n.  f.  (pi.  fiisp)?,  const 

niins)  tunic 

^  prep,  to,  for 

K'b  adv.  71(9^ 

nb  n.  m.  (riiib)  A^ar^ 

nnb  n.  m.  (mi)  heart 

©nb  or  «nb  v.  K.  (fut.  d?)  to 

put  on,  wea/r,  he  clothed 

with.    H.  to  cause  to  put 

on,  to  clothe 
t2nb  n.  m.  flame 
nnb  n.  m.  f .  hread 
b;*?)  n.  m.  (nb;'b  §  48.  2,  pi.  ni) 

night 
pb  V.  K.  to  lodge 
'ibsb  see  D'^is 
"rbb  V.  K.  to  capture 
n]?b  V.  K.  to  take,     N.  Pu. 

Ho.  to  he  taken 


'li^'Q  adv.  very 
nKia  num.  hundred 
ni&5ia  n.m.  (D\  and  mi) 

luminary    . 
bbyt'a  n.  m.food 


180 


HEBREW-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


'li^'Q  n.  m.  wilderness 

rrq  pron.  what?    whatever ; 

ni2S,  ird-^^  for  lohatf  why? 
^tra  n.  m.  inst/i'uction 
^byn  n.  m.  (D'l.  and  tri)  season 
M^tt  V.  K.  to  die.    Ho.  to  be 

jput  to  death 
T\ra  n.  m.  death 
niTi?  n.  m.  (ni)  (3^?i5(3^r 
n^-Q  n.  f.  Z>(?^ 

^."bia  V.  H.  to  cause  to  rain 
'TtJ^  n.  m.  rain 
"%  pron.  who?  whoever 
D^^'b  n.  m.  pi.  water 
V^  n.  m.  species^  hind 
"liti  V.  K.  to  sell 
tsCpri  V.  K.  to  fill  or  5^/^Z/.   P. 

to  fill    N.  Pu.  25c?  he  filled 
nisb-a    n.   f.    (const.    riDKbia. 

suf.  iDDKbtt  )  'zz;oryb 
rrbnb'a  n.  f.  war^  fighting 
tfb'a  V.  K.  ^c>  7'^^^7^.     H.  to 

cause  to  reign^  to  mahe 

Mng,   Ho.  to  he  made  hing 
^^•59  n.  m.  hing 
nsbia  n.  f.  queen 
tydya  n.  f.  (§  9.  7)  hingdom 
nibiaia   n.   f.    (const.    M?^ 

hingdom 
nbtett^  n.  £.  (const 

dominion^  rule 
\q  n.  m.  manna 
yo     prep,     from,^    out    of ; 


ni2'53  n.  m.  rest 

^'V^  V.  K.  to  withhold^  heep 
bach.     'E,  tohe  withheld 

"OTq  n.  a  little 

t:?'a  H.  to  mahe  small  orfew 

1^:?^    n.    m.    (a\    and    ni) 
fountain 

b?ia  adv.  ahove 

^^Tq  n.  f.  (const.  nS^tt)  cave 

xi-a  V.  K.  to  find 

nnsc"D  n.  f.  s^cj^^'z^^ 

T\\Ta  n.  f.   commandment 

nijP'a  n.  m.  gathering  tog  ether ^ 
collection 

oiptt  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  ^^ac?^ 

X'lis  n.  f.  ifcj^rc/'  (^^i5?5<^7») 

nikn'a  n.  m.  s^^7^^,  ap^ea/r- 
ance 

■>5nnia  n.  m.  Mordecai 

nctt  V.  K.  ^c?  anoint 

]?««  n.  m.  tabernacle^  dwell- 
ing 

btttt  V.  K.  i((?  rule^  with  2  be- 
fore its  object.  H.  to  cause 
to  rule 

t2|c'a  n.  m.  judgment 

^5  particle  of  entreaty,  noio^ 

pray^  I  pray  thee 
^i?  V.  H.  to  tell.  Ho.  to  he  told 
"%%  prep,  before,  in  the pres- 

enx^e  of  over  against;  1J35 

corresponding  to,  a  conn 

teipart 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    VOCABULAEY. 


181 


yi?  V.    K.   to  touchy  with  % 

before  its  object 
©ij  V.  K.  N.  to  approach 
^nj  n.  m.  (d'^.  and  rii)  river 
r|i3  V.  K.  to  rest     H.  (n-'in 

or  n'lsn)   to  cause  to  rest^ 

put^  place 
nb  n.  m.  Noah 
i^'nj  n.  m.  serpent 
5^135  V.  K.  to  plant 
''^25^5  n.  f.  Naomi  {sweet) 
*!??  n.  m.  young  man 
nsj  V.  K.  to  breathe^  hlow 
i^sj  V.  K.  to  fall,  fail 
T»5DD    n.   m.  f.    (D\   and   ni) 

nij?5  n.  f.  female 
iWD  V.  H.  ^0  deceive 
D'liiJD  see  n©iji 
s^^?3-  n.  f.  hreath 
Tr35  V.  P.  ^6>  demolish 
inj   V.  K.   i(6>  give,  put    N. 
Ho.  i{<9  he  given 

ii?  V.  K.  to  surround 

^yo  V.  K.  P.  to  shut,  shut  up. 

N.  Pu.  to  he  shut    H.  to 

cause  to  sJiut 
"lio  V.  N,  to  he  shut,  stopped 
J?bo  n.  m,  roclc 
"ISO  V.  P.  to  recount,  tell 


"Q?  V.  K.  to  serve,  till 
13?  n.  m,  servant 


nnij  V.  K.   to  pass,    H.   to 

cause  to  pass 
"1?  prep,  unto,  until 
n-^y   n.  f.  company,  asserrh 

hly 
n?  n.  Sden 
"lis?  adv.  yet,  besides 
b"^2?  n.  m.  sucMing,  hahe 
DpiS'  n.    m.    eternity ;   D^'^i^^ 

forever 
qis?  n.  m.  fowl,  hirds 
q^S'  V.   K.  P.   256>  /2^ 
*i-i.i?  adj.  hlind 
"H>  n.  m.   (mi)  sH?2. 
st:j  v.  K.  to  leave,  forsake 
IT?  n.  m.  help 
"It:?  V.  P.  to  crown 
■>:?  n.  (with  art.)  Ai 
r?  n.  f.  (n:'r5?)  6?/^ 
W  n.  f.  {n^^vy  city 
Dn"^:?   n.  m.  (D^iaTi?)    nalced- 

ness,  naked 
^?  prep,  upon,  over,  concern- 

ing 
f^3y  V.  K.  to  go  up,     H.  to 

bring  up,  offer 
nbj'  n.  m.  leaf 
nbb  n.  f.  burnt-offering 
^^5?  n.  m.  EU 
n}'^  see  obis' 
D!?  n.  m.  (^^12:?)  people 
n:?  prep,  ("li??  or  ''IBS')  with 
^i?:?  V.  K.  ^<9  stand 
^i^  n.  m.   (mi)  dust 


182 


HEBKEW'-ENGLISH    VOBABULARY. 


f  5?  n.  m.  tree^  and  collectively 


3:2:^  n.  m.  j>ain^  sorrow 

lin^:?  n.  m.  ^ain^  sorrow 

D?:^  n.  f.  (D\  and  ni)  hone 

3p^  n.  m.  (const,  aj??!,  pL 
D''.  and  tii)  heel 

3n:b  n.  m.  f.  (ni)  evening 

"yy^  n.  m.  raven 

Din?  adj.  (n^^?)  7i<zfe(i 

D^"!?  adj.  cunning^  subtle 

DiD^  n.  m.  (rii)  ^^7^5 

81^:?  V.  K.  to  do^  make^  pro- 
duce,   N.  to  he  done^  made 

*i4?  n.  HL  Esau 

"liteij  n.  m.  decade^  ten 

^'T^'$.^  num.  i(^/i^A 

t^5  n.  m.  f.  (tJ'^riS?)  ^^m^  in  the 
sense  of  duration 

«iri?  adv.  now 

MB  n.  m.  (const.  **©)  mouth 

littf^B  ji^  Pison 

D'^ncbc  n.  m.  pi.  tlie  Philistines 

"fB  conj.  Z^5^,  ^7^a^  ^0^ 

D^^is  n.  m.  pi.  fa/ie ;  *'5?^  or 
""DB'b?  hefore^  in  the  pres- 
ence of 

d?lB  n.  m.  f.  time  in  the  sense 
of  repetition 

npis  V.  K.  to  open  the  eyes. 
N.  to  he  opened 

nSfi  Y.  K.  P.  H.  to  separate^ 
part    N.  Pu.  to  he  parted 


Jiis  V.  K.  to  he  fruitful 
''ns  n.  vn.  fruit 
T^i'^^  n.  m.  Pharaoh 
"lE'iE  n.  Pharpar 
fT^B  n.  Euphrates 
t2i?B  V.  K.  i5(?  ^afe  ojf  clothes 
nns  V.  K.  to  open,    N.  to  hi 
opened 

«i?  n.  m.  (n\  and  ni)  Ao5^ 

P'li  n.  m.  righteousness 

nis  V.  P.  ^(9  command 

X\^^  n.  f.  Z/oTz, 

Dbi  n.  m.  image 

2?b':?  n.  f.  (const.  5?bs,  pi.  D\ 

and  ni)  side^  rih 
nis  V.  K.  P.  to  sprout^  to  shoot 

forth,  H.  to  cause  to  sprout 
n^:j3^  n.  f.  cry 
nn?  n.  f.  (nSs)  trouhle   ' 

bnp  V.  P.  to  receive^  accept 

f  n^  V.  P.  to  gather,  N.  ^^  he 
gathered 

"inj  V.  K.  to  hury,  N.  ^(?  Zxj 
huried 

Dig  n.  m.  ^«s^ 

n-ianp  n.  i.  former  state 

n-a-ip  n.  f.  ^«5^ 

©ni?  V.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  be  holy. 
P.  H.  to  sanctify,  conse- 
crate. N.  Pu.  to  he  sancti- 
fied. Hith.  to  sanctify  or 
purify  one^s  self 


HEBEEW-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


183 


loip  n.  m.  holiness,  a  holy 
jplace  or  thing 

nij?  V.  N.  to  he  gathered  to- 
gether 

^ip  n.  m.  (f^i)  voice,  sound 

d^P  V.  K.  to  arise 

f  ip  n.  m.  thorn 

T^5,  W  adj.  (nit5p)  little, 
small 

*^t:p  V.  H.  to  hv/rn  incense 

ri'l^ibp  n.  f.  incense 

bb'p  V.  K.  to  he  light,  dimin- 
ished 

n^^p  n.  f.  a  cv/rse 

■fp  n.  m.  end 

fc^'ip  V.  K.  ^(?  {?aZ^.    N.  Pu.  jJ6> 

6^  called 
^"ip  V.  K.  (fut.  «)  to  come 

near,    approach.     H.    to 

hring  near,  offer 
5?'i)p  V.  K.  to  rend 
n^n    V.  K.  (fut.  with  Vav 

^iVl)    to   see.    K    to   be 

seen,  appear 
tstk^  n.  m.  (D'^fe^t')  head,  source 
n^^fcxn  n.  f.  beginning 
y^  adj.  (•^5'^)  much,  many 
^in  V.  K.  to  he  many,  mul- 
tiply intrans.     P.  H.  (inf. 

abs.  ^%yi)  to  make  ma/ay, 

multiply  trans. 
'^'S^'yy  num.  fourth 
^5T  n.  f.  (D?^?'^)  foot 


T&r\  V.  K.  to  rule,  have  do- 
minion 

D'^unn  n.  m.  pi.  troughs 

Vr^  n.  m.  f.  (tii)  breath,  wind, 
Spirit 

T^^^  V.  K.  to  run 

Dinn  adj.  merciful 

D'^iann  n.  m.  pi.  mercies,  coniA 
passions 

5]'!'^  V.  P.  to  brood,  hover 
over 

f  ri'i  V.  K.  to  wash 

n^^n  V.  K.  to  contend 

toisn  V.  K.  to  creep 

te^"!  n*  m.  creeping  thing^ 
reptile 

J?*]  adj.   («^?7)  5a<^,  ^'2;^7 

1^'^  n.  m.  famine 

n:bn  n.  f.  evil 

vi^'^  n.  m.  firmament 

rrpD  n.  m.   (n\  and  Mi)  field 

m^  n.  m.  bush,  shrub 

u^io  Y.  K.  to  place 

bii?  V.  H..  to  be  wise,  act  wisely 

n^bto  n.  f.  garment 

nraio  n.  f.  gladness 

pi?  n.  m.  sackcloth 

q'li?  V.  K.  to  burn 

life  n.  m.  joy 

tt^^'^t  n.  f.  remnant 
^b'^'it  num.  seventh 
yio  V.  N.  ^o  swea/r 


184 


HEBREW-ENGLISH    V^OCABULARY. 


Sfeij  n:?ntD  n.  m.  seventeen 

^n©  V.  P.  to  break  in  pieces 

nnw  V.  K.  (fut.  0  and  a)  to 
rest^  cease^  Jceep  Sabbath, 
H.  to  cause  to  rest  or  cease 

nio  n.  ni.f.  (suf.  toi?)  Sab- 
hath 

Dn'iD  n.  m.  onyx 

n^ttj  V.  K.  to  return,  P.  H.  to 
cause  to  return^  bring  back 

t]^©  V.  K.  to  bruise^  crush 

nnw  V.  H.  to  destroy 

m'^©  V.  K.  to  put 

i5«  V.  K.  to  lie  down 

Wt  V.  K.  to  forget 

tfii?  V.  K.  to  subside 

^3T?  V.  K.  (fut.  a)  to  be  be- 
reaved.    P.  to  bereave 

DDtD  V.  H.  to  rise  ea/rly 

1??  V.  K.  to  dwell  P.  H.  to 
cause  to  dwells  to  station 

n^T?  V.  K.  P.  H.  to  send^  send 
away^  put  forth 

^jt'hio  num.  third 

^^'to  V.  H.  to  cast 

nrfbic  n.  in.  Solomon 

Di?  adv.  there ;  ri/QO  thither 

DO  n.  m.  (mi)  name 

bbt^itt©  n.  ra.  Samuel 

D^^'a©  n.  m.  pi.  heawen 

•fQ^  n.  m.  oil 

tP'QT?  V.  K.  to  hear^  with  a 
direct  object  or  with  3 ; 
to  hearken 


'rbffi'  V.  K.  to  keep,,  observe,  N. 

to  keep  one^s  self  take  heed 
©'^fe  n.  m.  f.  sun 
niTTi  n.  f.  (d*^.)  2/^«^ 
''2©*  n.  m.  crimson 
"^tp'  num.  second 
0^5^  m.  D^fntt'  f.  num.  ^i^{) 
n'lDirf  adv.  a  second  time 
"^?©  n.  m.  f.  (D"^.)  gate 
nnsTD  n.  f.  handmaid 
n)5ttf  V.  H.  to  cause  to  drinks 

to  water 
bjj^'  n.  m.  shekel 
fntt'*  V.  K.  to  creep,,  teem  withy 

increase  abundantly 
T^'iiD  n.  m.  creeping  thing,  rep- 

tile 
'^ist  num.  sixth 

i^j^P)  n.  f.  desire 

n5J^nn.f.  i?\)  fig-tree,  fig 

rinn  n.  f.  ark 

^nn  n.  m.  desolateness 

Dinn  n.  m.  f.  (rii)  ocean,  the 

deep 
^5^  n.  m.  midst 
ni'ibin  n.  f.  pi.  generations 
i^n^  prep,  under,  instead  of 
V^n  n.  m.  sea-monster 
"isn  V.  K.  to  sew 
iiJsn  V.  K.  to  lay  hold  of 

seize 
rrb'^'in  n.  f.  deep  sleep 
rijj^TiJP)  n.  f.  desire 


ENGLISH-HEBREW  VOCABULARY. 


Aaron  pn^ 
above  bri? 
to  accept  ^np  P. 
-^according  to  5 
on  account  of  "i^^sja 
to  adhere  ps'^  K. 
after  ^ns? 
Aliab  ni?nj^ 
Ai  ^50 

Amanah  nj^i?: 

!(6>  anoint  T\wi  K. 
a/pron  riiisin 
2^«9  appear  ritjn  N. 
appearance  Hij'^'a 
^c'  approach  ttiw  K.  N.  ; 
K. 

article  ''^3 


^I'^l? 


assembly  M^i? 

bdellium  nV^a 

256>  Z>^  n^^n  K. 

to  bear  (bring forth)  ^\*i  IC 

beast  (domesticated)  ni:n3 

<^^as?5  (wild)  Jijn 

because  "123^5,   ''3 

before  adv.  D'^'b 

^^(9r6  prep.  %)5 ,  ''SSb  ,  ^3S-b5 

^6>  5^^m  bbn  H. 

beginning  ri'ii&icn 

behold  'jn  ^  nin 

benefit  b^i35 

jfc?  bereave  bb©  P. 

^6>  J^  bereaved  bbij  K. 

besides  "lis? 

between  y% 

birds  Vfs 


186 


ENGLISH-HEBREW   VOCABULARY. 


^  to   hless    ^!i?    K.    (only  in 
pass,  part.)  P.  s 

blessing  hd'isi  r 

blind  'i^J'  > 

blood  D^i 

^()  Z>Zo^  n&j  K. 

bone  D3|:3? 

^(/  ^6?  horn  lb;  IN. 
"thread  onb' 

^o  Z^r^^^^  in  pieces  "istj  P. 

breath  n^irs,  n^n 

^^  breathe  nsj  K. 

^6>  5^•^7^^  i^ia  H. 

to  bring  hack  sit?  P.  H. 

to  bring  forth  fc52f;»  H. 

to  bring  forth  children  nb^  H. 

to  bring  forth  grass  st^  H. 

^0  67'm^  ujp  Tb^s  H. 
^{?  Z>r(9(96Z  qrin  P. 
-X  brother  n^J 
^c>  bruise  Pl^©'  K. 
^(?  5'^/^7(^  n;n  K. 
^^  Z>  W7'^  ^^,  K. 
^c?  Z'Z^rTi  incense  ^^J  H. 
burnt-offering  nbb 
^c>  S'z^r^/  nnj  K. 

but  (after  a  negative)  *^3      ^ 


^0  mZZ  i^'np  K. 
to  cajpture  'i?b  K. 
^c>  cast  tybo  H. 
>c'(7^i5Z^ni3na 


^c>  cms^  nntg 

Chaldees  n^'^tos 

cherub  ITO 

city  ^"S 

clean  "lini: 

i^^  J^  {?Z6a?i  "^nt:  K. 

^c?  cleanse  *int:  P. 

^c?  cleave  {adhere)  P^*!  K. 

to  be  clothed  with  ttfnb  oi 

©nb  K. 
clothes  D'^'!*?? 
collection  nip's 
^^  (?6>???^  xia  K. 
^<9  C(9m^  72.^a?'  3'ip  K. 
to  command  njs  P. 
commandment  nisp 
company  Tn'V 
compassio7is  u'^w^ 
to  complete  nbs  P. 
conception  V^y^ 
concerning  b? 
^6>  consecrate  ©"ip  P.  H. 
^6>  contain  bi3  P. 
^c>  contend  i*^*?  K. 
corresponding  to  ^553 
counterpart  "iji? 
covenant  tT'^iS 
^<9  cr(?6i^6  i^na  K. 
^c?  <?r^6/>  te'a'i  K.,  fn©  I^* 
creeping  thing  tettn,  f'jti 
crimson  ^V^ 
to  crown  *i^y  P. 


ENGLISII-HEBEEW    VOCABULARY. 


187 


to  crush  p^'n  K.  H.,  qitJ  K 

to  cry  p?T  K. 

cunning  D^"i? 

to  cv/rse  nn^  K.  P. 

cur^e  nbbp 

Gush  tJ^ 

^^  c?z^?{  nt)?  K. 

to  cut  off  tT\'2  K.  H. 

Damascus  ptei?1 
darkness  ?f^n 
daughter  1^3 
David  T\ri 
'day  ni'' 

^0  he  put  to  death  ri^ia  Ho. 

decade  "litoij 

^d>  deceive  i^ifj  H. 

^A^  J<?^  Dinn 

/f6>  ^^^  bxa  P.,  tjit:  P. 

^6>  deliver  f  ^n  P. 

^6>  demolish  T^inj  K. 

^  descend  Ti;  K, 

desire  •^J^P),  !^p^©*^\ 

j56>  desire  "ran  K.  P. 

desolateness  inn 

25<9  destroy  "insj  P.,  nni?  H. 

if(9  ^^6  )nitt  K. 

^<9  divide  b*!?  H. 

^^  (^^  nte^  K. 

dominion  "^wa 

to  have  dominion  T\y\  K. 


.  x|  6/(9(97'  ribi 
|t/(9z;^  nbii 

to  cause  to  drink  npij  H. 
to  drive  out  W'DJ  K.  P.,  ty^ 

or  T^-n;  K.  H. 
dry  land  ntja^ 
to  he  dry  cn;'  K. 
dust  "^B? 

^f^  ^^^^/  mrj  K.,  1?©  K. 
dwelling  'J?i»^ 

(?«<?A    T&^'i? 

^c>  rise  early  dd©  H. 
(?(Zr^A  "f"!?^ 
«?(a^5i5  D'lp,  n^ip 
^7i  the  east  of  b  anl^a 
to  eat  bDij  K. 

Eleazar  "iT^bx 

emptiness  ^^"i 

to  come  to  an  end  nbs  K, 

enmity  ^l'l^? 

6pA(3^A  n&^i^ 

eternity  obis? 
Euphrates  rins 

evening  I'llj 

^6?7*2/  bb 

^'y^7  adj.  I?"!,  n.  wn 


188 


ENGLISH-HEBREW   VOCABULARY. 


face  D?SNI,  D"^?B 

to  fail  bsp  K. 

to  fall  bsj  K. 

famine  ^yn 
^father  nij 

to  fear  si; 

female  Si?i?3 

^(9  m«^6  y^^^  tt^tt  H. 
%  field  STito 

figi  fig-tree  rij«r\ 
fighting  f^^nb"!? 
^o/ZZ  a^b^  K.'  P. 
^()  //icZ  i5|ti  K. 
to  finish  nbs  P. 
fire  m 

fi/rmamient  V9!^ 
fish  njn 
fiame  t:n^ 

tofij/^'^^K.  P. 

v/br  conj.  ''3,  prep,  b 
X  forever  ^)^'S'^ 

to  forget  Tom  K. 

to  form,  "1?;  K. 

former  state  ^7? 

to  forsake  nT:j  K. 

«/  T     T     J      - 


to  he  fruitful  nns  K. 
i5c>  he  full  «bti  K. 

garden  "ja 
garment  ^ji ,  ?Tabte 

^^  gather  T'^p  P. 
^0  5^  gathered  together  nj^  N. 
gatliering  together  nijpp 
generations  niibin 

to  give  light  *iii^  H. 

gladness  nr^stp 

^Z(9r^  nil  5 

2^0  go  tfbn  K. 

^0  ^6)  doivn  Tn;  K. 

^(9  goforth^  go  out  i<?^  K. 

/(?  go  up  Tbv  K. 

^6?Z6/  nnj 

God"^^.,  D-TTbs 

^/•^(^^^  binj 
^6)  he  great  b'lj  K. 
^6>  maJce  great  bia  P. 
greenness  771 
ground  nia'iy: 

half^V^. 
Haman  1'cn 


ENGLISH-HEBEEW    VOCABULARY. 


189 


handmaid  nnstD 

incense  trpp^ 

Havilah  nb^in 

to  hum  incense  "it:;;  H. 

\lie^^r\ 

toinx^reaseahundantly  pijK. 

head  w'fc^i 

indeed  DJI2X 

to  Jiea/r  J^tti?  K. 

^  inhabit  nt?;  K. 

to  liea/rTcen  :^^©  K. 

instead  of  nnn 

lieart  nb ,  nnb 

instruction  ^tf^ 

heaven  D^^i?© 

into  a 

j5(9  ^^  Am'e;^/  "J53  K.               ^ 

Jsm^Z  b^-nirr* 

to  take  heed  nia©  N.                s 

e^  i5Vi,  i^\^ 

7^(?^Z  ng? 

>^^^  ^T?                             ^ 

Ja^t?^  np$^ 

A^rS  ntoi                            > 

Jehovah  nin^ 

HiddeUl^^Vt 

Jericho  'tm^. 

to  hide  «nri  H.                   v 

Jerusalem  pb©in^ 

hither  nan                           :^ 

J"^^  ^'i^n;» 

^(9  fey  hold  of  tesn  IC         "^ 

Josejph  V[W 

holiness  tJ'Tp 

joy  liteto 

i^^  5^  ;^oZ2/  '^^  K.                r^ 

Judah  nnw 

honey  ©5*7 

judgment  watDti 

^(97l(?r  ^il3 

^0  Ao?^(97•  ^ns  P. 

jk>  fe^  ntttD  K. 

host  i^ns 

^^  ^^6^  5ao^  i^?*?  K. 

Ac^-ws^  n^ia                           A 

^  fe^jt?  Sdblath  rin©  K 

to  hover  over  t^^  P. 

^^W  n.  I"^ 

how  riDD'i^ 

hindn£ss  ^orj 

^c>'Z^;  mt^cjA  less  ''?  tji? — Ae?^? 

^%  ^jb-i? 

much  more  id. 

^c>  make  king  ^rb-sa  H. 

husbam^d  tD*^K 

ki/rigdom  ri^Dbtt ,  JiDbtttt 

^{?  ^Tic^-z^;  T]"^  K. 

'  /''pi?,  ^?bi$ 

^(?  ?^^  ^Tic^'w;  T\'^  H. 

^dx 

image  obi 

feTz^J  ^7^,  Tjif 

m  a 

la/rae  biia 

190 


ENGLISH-HEBEEW   YOCABULAEY. 


to  lead  tf^n  H. 

^0  5^  m^Tiy  ran  K. 

leaf  nb:j 

Mara  ^'yi^ 

to  leave  a??  K. 

master  "jinij 

lest  "IB 

mercies  D^'^^'D 

to  lie  down  HD©  K. 

merciful  D^n"! 

life  njn,  D^^fn,  tdsj 

mercy  "ion 

X^^^A^{  ^ii^ 

m^6?s^  tj^n 

a  light  nixi? 

m^'s^  n&? 

V  to  give  light  "li^^  H. 

m^onth  tf^n 

lihe  3                                    y 

m(?(??2/  H!?? 

liheness  in'iia'n 

Mordecai  ^"^^^ 

Z^^i^Z^  ft:s>                               H 

morning  ^^ 

«  Z^Yz^Z^  "oyq                          y 

mother  DX 

to  live  ^::ri,  n;n  K. 

mouth  nia 

V  living  '^H 

m-z^cA  an 

living  thing  HJH 

^^  multiply  intrans.  nan  K«, 

Zt?/  in,  nan 

trans,  nan  P.  H. 

^<?  zo^^(5  r^?  K. 

^  lord  Xn^ ,  ^?:a 

naked  DTO 

Lord  \3'ix 

nakedness  on''? 

^0  Z(?^^  sn^f  K                      51 

Tiam^  DT? 

luminary  '^iK'Q 

Naomi  '^^3J5 

nation  ''in 

majestn/  "inn 

^c?  S/'m^  n^^r  an^  H. 

^0  ma^^  ntoy  K. 

^0  (?^w^  T^a/*  an^  EI. 

^(?  m«^d  a  covenant  fi'n?  K. 

new  i^y) 

to  make  few  or  sm^ZZ  'om  H. 

night  ^i^ 

^0  m(^^<?  ^m^  tl^'a  H.            > 

Noah  nb 

^(?  mo^fe  many  rinn  P.  H. 

nostril  V^         .^ 

ma?^  '^?T 

not"^^.,  ''riba,  i^b 

^  m^Ti  Dn« ,  tj'-^^ ,  tfisK 

ifA^T*^  is  not  or  t^«5  7^^  T« 

young  mam,  ^i 

that  not  "ia 

manna  'J'a 

72/C>^  yet  ontt 

many  a'^ 

710^  (entreaty)  K2 ,  (time)  nn? 

ENGLISH-HEBEEW   VOCABULARY. 


191 


to  observe  ^tt©  K. 

ocean  Dinn 

to  offer  nb^  H.,  n-ig  H. 

oil  -m 

oli/ve^  olwe-t/ree  ts^l 

one  ^riij 

onyx  onizJ 

to  ojpen  nna  K. 

to  open  the  eyes  Hgs  K. 

or  (in  a  disjunctive  question) 

out  ofTQi 
over  b5 

o^^T*  against  IJ3 
overtalce  "py^  H. 

r^i?^^  r\^  K.  P.  H. 

people  fi? 
to  perish  ^52?  K. 
JPTiaraoh  Jiins 
Pharpa/r  'nfi'js 
Philistines  D'^htoV? 
pilla/r  n'licij 
Pison  l^ttJ^'B 

to  place  ri^s  H.,  D'^te  K. 

to  plant  5^5  K. 

^(?  ^(?'z^r  p?;  K. 

^r<3^2^  /  I  pray  thee  KJ 

m  the  presence  <2/^  '^35 ,  ''5?^ , 

"J    ~ 

T^ priest  Ill's 
^o  produce  JTtey  K. 


to  produce  seed  r^nt  H. 
to  pulverize  pp'3  K.  H. 

^6>  he  pure  "int?  K. 
topu/rify  ^intt  P. 
topwrify  on^s  self  "^"^  Hith. 
i5(9^'2^i5  n^:  H.,  105  K.,  ri'^u?  K. 
to  put  forth  rbt  K.  P. 
^(9  j?'Z^^  (??2.  clothes  tin^  or  "©'5^ 
K. 


queen 


nsbtt 


r(2m  "1^9 

^(?  c<3^'z^s^  ^6>  /"(zm  "itaia  H. 

i5^  receive  b^p  P. 

j(<9  recount  *iSO  P. 

^(9  redeem  bi^j  K. 

^(9  7•6^^?^  tl^^  K. 

^{?  remember  *i?T  K, 

remnant  M'''?*?^ 

^0  r^'/i  J  :?'np  K. 

reptile  to*! ,  f  no 

respecting  "bJJ 

i5c>  7-^5^  r|i3  K.,  nnT§  K. 

to  reim/rn  intrans.  ^'lO  K, 

rib  :?bs 

righteousness  p'li 

^(9  m^  ^(^W^Z^/  DDTJ  H. 

river  inj 
r(9(?^  2?^o 
25^  roll  bba  K. 

to  rule  bT?ia  K.,  nn'n  K. 


192 


ENGLISH-HEBREW  VOCABULABT. 


to  7'un  'p'n  K. 
\Sabhaih  nat? 
Ho  he&p  Sabbath  ^n©  K. 

sackcloth  pi? 

salvation  v€l 

Samuel  bi?^^© 

to  sanctify  tJn^  P.  H. 

to  say  n^K  K. 
y  sea  d;» 

sea  monster  "plPj 

season  li^itt 

second  '^po 

«  second  tim£  ti^}t 

to  see  r\)r\  K. 

seed  'S'ii 

to  jproduce  seed  ^"^1  H. 

to  seize  testj 

to  sell  ^5^  K. 

^  send^  send  OAJoay  f^^© 
P.  H. 

to  se;pa/rat6  ^'^a  H.,  lr\^  K. 
H. 

sepa/ration  *ia 

serj^ent  tD'nj 

servant  ^5^ 

seventh  ''5?''iin 

to  shine  ^i»  K.  K 

to  shoot  forth  r\^%  K.  P. 

shrub  l^'to 

fe  sA-z^^,  shut  v/p  ^59  K. 


K. 


P. 


> 


side  5?^? 

^^7^' ^  5103 
sister  ninic 

s^a?^A  ''ISO 

to  sleep  ys^  K. 
&^  sleep  t\^"Dr\ 
small  ibj 
^(?  make  small  t:?!Q  BL 

/(?  so^7  ^513  P. 
Solomon  sib'b© 

sorrow  nsib,  "jia^y 

sound  ^ip 

sou/rce  tii^*j 

^0  s^'w;  :^!!T  K. 

^^  s^^a^  15'7  P. 

species  V^ 

,spirit  tm 

splendor  "Tin 

i56>  spring  up  (said  of  grass) 

to  sprout  Tmi  K.  P. 
to  stand  *Ta?  K. 
sta/r  a?i3 
^6>  station  1?^  P.  H. 

^0  J^  strong  pin  K. 


ENGLISH-KEBKEW    VOCABULAEY. 


193 


to  suhdnte  t5ns  K.  P. 
suhtle  trr\v 

suckling  b^  >c 

)^8un  liJ'^^* 
to  surround  n?D  K. 
to  swear  :?it?  N. 
sweat  WT 
sword  3'jn 

tabernacle  'J?^'a 
i5c?  j{«^^  njb  K. 

^  ^id  off  clothes  t2T?B   H. 

^6>  tema  with  X^t  K. 

jfo  tell  n5?  H.,  nso  P.  x 

tent  bnii 

i{A(2^  conj.  ^t% ,  ^'S ;  pron.  )^'^" 

that  not  "*!§ 

then  TK 

therefore  15  ^? 

thither  traij . 

25A6>^  ^ris 

throne  i5B3 

^A-z^s  Jib  >; 

Tigris  bg'jn 

^^m<9  (duration)  tt? 
^^^(9  (repetition)  D$9 

^  1^0  -^«  ,  b 

9 


^(9  c^-z^s^  to  toil  3?5iJ  P.  H. 

to  touch  2?5p  K. 

^^(?,  t/rees  T? 

trouble  «^^s 

Proughs  D'^^nn 

^(9  be  found  i/rue  I^JJ  N. 

j{(?  ^2^72.  tfSin  K. 

Ur^"^^ 

va^or  1!& 

to  be  verified  p??  N. 

vessel  *^^3 
virgin  ThT^ 
voice  bip 

to  t^^aZi  ^^'^  K. 

to  walk  about  5^0  HitL 

wa/r  f^^O^^ 

to  -z^^^toT*  ts*^'^  H. 

to  t^;^fl57*  t5ab  or  toab  K!* 
to  wea/ry  ^5?  P.  H. 
to  be  wea/ry  ^5;  K. 


194 


ENGLISH-HEBREW   VOCABULAEY. 


t  well  n.  *i^^ 
ywJiat?  ™ 
/whatever  rfn 

whence  f  If^^ 

wJwref  ^^,  n?« 
s  which  ^to'fij 

whither?  nj&J 

who  "y^X 

who?  **tt 

whoever "% 

whole  is 

why  ?  T\^} ,  nijb 

wilderness  ^y^ 
wind  HTi 


\  window  J^§'^^5 


▼  \  •» 


to  he  wise  ^5^  H. 

to  act  wisely  i?te  H. 

with  ri;$,  a,  d2? 

jfc?  withhold  fc^bs  K.,  :^59  K, 

woman  siTJs: 


T     t 


yet^'ys 

young  mam,  ^i 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made 
4  days  prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


{APR  0  7  2005 


DD20  15M  4-02 


